Cisco C-Series Integrated Management Controller server Configuration guide

PDF

문서

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI

Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

First Published: 2017-08-17

Last Modified: 2018-03-21

Americas Headquarters

Cisco Systems, Inc.

170 West Tasman Drive

San Jose, CA 95134-1706

USA http://www.cisco.com

Tel: 408 526-4000

800 553-NETS (6387)

Fax: 408 527-0883

THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. ALL STATEMENTS,

INFORMATION, AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE ACCURATE BUT ARE PRESENTED WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEIR APPLICATION OF ANY PRODUCTS.

THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE INFORMATION PACKET THAT SHIPPED WITH

THE PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS REFERENCE. IF YOU ARE UNABLE TO LOCATE THE SOFTWARE LICENSE OR LIMITED WARRANTY,

CONTACT YOUR CISCO REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY.

The Cisco implementation of TCP header compression is an adaptation of a program developed by the University of California, Berkeley (UCB) as part of UCB's public domain version of the UNIX operating system. All rights reserved. Copyright

1981, Regents of the University of California.

NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER WARRANTY HEREIN, ALL DOCUMENT FILES AND SOFTWARE OF THESE SUPPLIERS ARE PROVIDED “AS IS" WITH ALL FAULTS.

CISCO AND THE ABOVE-NAMED SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THOSE OF

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE.

IN NO EVENT SHALL CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT

LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO DATA ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL, EVEN IF CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS

HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

Any Internet Protocol (IP) addresses and phone numbers used in this document are not intended to be actual addresses and phone numbers. Any examples, command display output, network topology diagrams, and other figures included in the document are shown for illustrative purposes only. Any use of actual IP addresses or phone numbers in illustrative content is unintentional and coincidental.

Cisco and the Cisco logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Cisco and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. To view a list of Cisco trademarks, go to this URL: https:/

/www.cisco.com/go/trademarks

. Third-party trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company. (1721R)

C O N T E N T S

P r e f a c e

C H A P T E R 1

C H A P T E R 2

C H A P T E R 3

Preface xv

Audience

Conventions

Preface

This preface includes the following sections:

•

Audience, page xv

•

Conventions, page xv

•

Audience

This guide is intended primarily for data center administrators with responsibilities and expertise in one or more of the following:

• Server administration

• Storage administration

• Network administration

• Network security

Conventions

Text Type

GUI elements

Document titles

TUI elements

System output

Indication

GUI elements such as tab titles, area names, and field labels appear in this font.

Main titles such as window, dialog box, and wizard titles appear in this font.

Document titles appear in this font.

In a Text-based User Interface, text the system displays appears in this font.

Terminal sessions and information that the system displays appear in this font

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1 xv

Preface

Conventions

Text Type

CLI commands

[ ]

{x | y | z}

[x | y | z] string

< >

[ ]

!, #

Indication

CLI command keywords appear in this font.

Variables in a CLI command appear in this font.

Elements in square brackets are optional.

Required alternative keywords are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars.

Optional alternative keywords are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars.

A nonquoted set of characters. Do not use quotation marks around the string or the string will include the quotation marks.

Nonprinting characters such as passwords are in angle brackets.

Default responses to system prompts are in square brackets.

An exclamation point (!) or a pound sign (#) at the beginning of a line of code indicates a comment line.

Note

Means reader take note. Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to material not covered in the document.

Tip

Means the following information will help you solve a problem. The tips information might not be troubleshooting or even an action, but could be useful information, similar to a Timesaver.

Timesaver

Means the described action saves time. You can save time by performing the action described in the paragraph.

Caution

Means reader be careful. In this situation, you might perform an action that could result in equipment damage or loss of data.

xvi

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Preface

Related Cisco UCS Documentation

Warning

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

This warning symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could cause bodily injury. Before you work on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar with standard practices for preventing accidents. Use the statement number provided at the end of each warning to locate its translation in the translated safety warnings that accompanied this device.

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

Overview

This chapter includes the following sections:

•

Overview of the Cisco UCS C-Series Rack-Mount Servers, page 1

•

Overview of the Server Software, page 1

•

Cisco Integrated Management Controller, page 2

•

Overview of the Cisco IMC User Interface, page 3

Overview of the Cisco UCS C-Series Rack-Mount Servers

The Cisco UCS C-Series rack-mount servers include the following models:

• Cisco UCS C220 M5 Rack-Mount Server

• Cisco UCS C240 M5 Rack-Mount Server

Note

To determine which Cisco UCS C-Series rack-mount servers are supported by this firmware release, see the associated Release Notes. The C-Series release notes are available at the following URL: http:// www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps10739/prod_release_notes_list.html

Overview of the Server Software

The Cisco UCS C-Series Rack-Mount Server ships with the Cisco IMC firmware.

Cisco IMC Firmware

Cisco IMC is a separate management module built into the motherboard. A dedicated ARM-based processor, separate from the main server CPU, runs the Cisco IMC firmware. The system ships with a running version of the Cisco IMC firmware. You can update the Cisco IMC firmware, but no initial installation is needed.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Overview

Cisco Integrated Management Controller

Server OS

The Cisco UCS C-Series rack servers support operating systems such as Windows, Linux, Oracle and so on.

For more information on supported operating systems, see the Hardware and Software Interoperability for

Standalone C-series servers at http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps10477/prod_technical_reference_ list.html

. You can use Cisco IMC to install an OS on the server using the KVM console and vMedia.

Note

You can access the available OS installation documentation from the Cisco UCS C-Series Servers

Documentation Roadmap at http://www.cisco.com/go/unifiedcomputing/c-series-doc .

Cisco Integrated Management Controller

The Cisco IMC is the management service for the C-Series servers. Cisco IMC runs within the server.

Note

The Cisco IMC management service is used only when the server is operating in Standalone Mode. If your C-Series server is integrated into a UCS system, you must manage it using UCS Manager. For information about using UCS Manager, see the configuration guides listed in the Cisco UCS B-Series

Servers Documentation Roadmap at http://www.cisco.com/go/unifiedcomputing/b-series-doc .

Management Interfaces

You can use a web-based GUI or SSH-based CLI or an XML-based API to access, configure, administer, and monitor the server. Almost all tasks can be performed in either interface, and the results of tasks performed in one interface are displayed in another. However, you cannot do the following:

• Use Cisco IMC GUI to invoke Cisco IMC CLI

• View a command that has been invoked through Cisco IMC CLI in Cisco IMC GUI

• Generate Cisco IMC CLI output from Cisco IMC GUI

Tasks You Can Perform in Cisco IMC

You can use Cisco IMC to perform the following chassis management tasks:

• Power on, power off, power cycle, reset and shut down the server

• Toggle the locator LED

• Configure the server boot order

• View server properties and sensors

• Manage remote presence

• Create and manage local user accounts, and enable remote user authentication through Active Directory

• Configure network-related settings, including NIC properties, IPv4, VLANs, and network security

• Configure communication services, including HTTP, SSH, IPMI Over LAN, and SNMP

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Overview

Overview of the Cisco IMC User Interface

• Manage certificates

• Configure platform event filters

• Update Cisco IMC firmware

• Monitor faults, alarms, and server status

• Set time zone and view local time

• Install and activate Cisco IMC firmware

• Install and activate BIOS firmware

• Install and activate CMC firmware

You can use Cisco IMC to perform the following server management tasks:

• Manage remote presence

• Create and manage local user accounts, and enable remote user authentication through Active Directory

• Configure network-related settings, including NIC properties, IPv4, VLANs, and network security

• Configure communication services, including HTTP, SSH, IPMI Over LAN, and SNMP

• Manage certificates

• Configure platform event filters

• Update Cisco IMC firmware

• Monitor faults, alarms, and server status

• Set time zone and view local time

No Operating System or Application Provisioning or Management

Cisco IMC provisions servers, and as a result, exists below the operating system on a server. Therefore, you cannot use it to provision or manage operating systems or applications on servers. For example, you cannot do the following:

• Deploy an OS, such as Windows or Linux

• Deploy patches for software, such as an OS or an application

• Install base software components, such as anti-virus software, monitoring agents, or backup clients

• Install software applications, such as databases, application server software, or web servers

• Perform operator actions, including restarting an Oracle database, restarting printer queues, or handling non-Cisco IMC user accounts

• Configure or manage external storage on the SAN or NAS storage

Overview of the Cisco IMC User Interface

The Cisco IMC user interface is a web-based management interface for Cisco C-Series servers. The web user interface is developed using HTML5 with the eXtensible Widget Framework (XWT) framework. You can

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Overview

Cisco IMC Home Page

launch the user interface and manage the server from any remote host that meets the following minimum requirements:

• Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher, Mozilla Firefox 3.0 or higher

• Microsoft Windows 7, Microsoft Windows XP, Microsoft Windows Vista, Apple Mac OS X v10.6, Red

Hat Enterprise Linux 5.0 or higher operating systems

• Transport Layer Security (TLS) version 1.2

Note

In case you lose or forget the password that you use to log in to Cisco IMC, see the password recovery instructions in the Cisco UCS C-Series server installation and service guide for your server. This guide is available from the Cisco UCS C-Series Servers Documentation Roadmap at http://www.cisco.com/go/ unifiedcomputing/c-series-doc .

Cisco IMC Home Page

When you first log into Cisco IMC GUI, the user interface looks similar to the following illustration:

Navigation and Work Panes

The Cisco Integrated Management Controller GUI comprises the Navigation pane on the left hand side of the screen and the Work pane on the right hand side of the screen. Clicking links on the Chassis, Compute,

Networking, Storage or Admin menu in the Navigation pane displays the associated tabs in the pane on the right.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Overview

Navigation and Work Panes

The Navigation pane header displays action buttons that allow you to view the navigation map of the entire

GUI, view the index, or select a favorite work pane to go to, directly. The Pin icon prevents the Navigation pane from sliding in once the Work pane displays.

The Favorite icon is a star shaped button which allows you to make any specific work pane in the application as your favorite. To do this, navigate to the work pane of your choice and click the Favorite icon. To access this work pane directly from anywhere else in the application, click the Favorite icon again.

The GUI header displays information about the overall status of the chassis and user login information.

The GUI header also displays the total number of faults (indicated in green or red), with a Bell icon next to it. However, clicking this icon displays the summary of only the critical and major faults of various components.

To view all the faults, click the View All button to display the Fault Summary pane.

Note

User interface options may vary depending on the server.

The Navigation pane has the following menus:

• Chassis Menu

• Compute Menu

• Networking Menu

• Storage Menu

• Admin Menu

Chassis Menu

Each node in the Chassis menu leads to one or more tabs that display in the Work pane. These tabs provides access to the following information:

Chassis Menu Node Name

Summary

Work Pane Tabs Provide Information About...

Server properties, Chassis status, Cisco IMC information, and

Server Utilization.

Inventory

Sensors

Power Management

Faults and Logs

CPU, memory, PCI adapters, power supplies, cisco VIC adapters, network adapters, storage, SAS expander, and TPM.

Power supply, fan, temperature, voltage, current, LED readings, and storage.

Power cap configuration and power monitoring.

Note

This option is available only on some UCS C-Series servers.

Fault summary, fault history, system event log, Cisco IMC logs, and logging controls.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Overview

Navigation and Work Panes

Compute Menu

The Compute menu contains information about the server, and the following information is displayed in the

Work pane.

Compute Menu Node Name

Remote Management

Work Pane Tabs Provide Information About...

KVM, virtual media, and Serial over LAN settings.

BIOS

Troubleshooting

Power Policies

PID Catalog

The installed BIOS firmware version and the server boot order.

Bootstrap processing, Crash recording, and a player to view the last saved bootstrap process.

Power restore policy settings.

CPU, memory, PCI adapters, and the HDD details.

Networking Menu

Each node in the Networking menu leads to one or more tabs that display in the Work pane. These tabs provides access to the following information:

Networking Menu Node Name

General

Work Pane Tabs Provide Information About...

Adapter card properties, firmware, external ethernet interfaces, and actions to export or import configurations, and reset status.

vNICs

Host ethernet interfaces information such as name, CDN, MAC address, MTU and individual vNIC properties.

vHBAs

Host fibre channel interfaces information such as name, WWPN,

WWNN, boot, uplink, port profile, channel number, and individual vHBA properties.

Storage Menu

Each node in the Storage menu corresponds to the LSI MegaRAID controllers or Host Bus Adapters (HBA) that are installed in theCisco UCS C-Series Rack-Mount Servers. Each node leads to one or more tabs that display in the Work pane and provide information about the installed controllers.

Storage Menu Node Name

Controller Info

Work Pane Tabs Provide Information About...

General information about the selected LSI MegaRAID controller or HBA.

Physical Drive Info

General drive information, identification information, and drive statusl

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Overview

Toolbar

Storage Menu Node Name

Virtual Drive Info

Battery Backup Unit

Storage Log

Work Pane Tabs Provide Information About...

General drive information, RAID information, and physical drive information.

Backup battery information for the selected MegaRAID controller.

Storage messages.

Admin Menu

Each node in the Admin menu leads to one or more tabs that display in the Work pane. These tabs provides access to the following information:

Admin Menu Node Name

User Management

Work Pane Tabs Provide Information About...

Locally-defined user accounts, Active Directory settings, and current user session information.

Networking

NIC, IPv4, IPv6, VLAN, and LOM properties, along with network security settings.

Communication Services

Certificate Management

HTTP, SSH, XML API, IPMI over LAN, and SNMP settings.

Security certificate information and management.

Firmware Management

Utilities

Device Connector

Cisco IMC and BIOS firmware information and management.

Technical support data collection, system configuration import and export options, and restore factory defaults settings.

Starship management and network settings.

Note

This option is available only on some C-Series servers.

Toolbar

The toolbar displays above the Work pane.

Button Name

Refresh

Description

Refreshes the current page.

Host Power

Displays the drop-down menu for you to choose power options.

Launch KVM

Displays the drop-down menu to launch the Java based or HTML based

KVM console.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Overview

Cisco Integrated Management Controller Online Help Overview

Button Name

Ping

Reboot

Locator LED

Description

Launches the Ping Details pop-up window.

Enables you to reboot Cisco IMC.

Allows you to turn on or turn off the locator LED.

Cisco Integrated Management Controller Online Help Overview

The GUI for the Cisco Integrated Management Controller (Cisco IMC) software is divided into two main sections, a Navigation pane on the left and a Work pane on the right.

This help system describes the fields on each Cisco IMC GUI page and in each dialog box.

To access the page help, do one of the following:

• In a particular tab in the Cisco IMC GUI, click the Help icon in the toolbar above the Work pane.

• In a dialog box, click the Help button in that dialog box.

Note

For a complete list of all C-Series documentation, see the Cisco UCS C-Series Servers Documentation

Roadmap available at the following URL: http://www.cisco.com/go/unifiedcomputing/c-series-doc .

Logging into Cisco IMC

Procedure

Step 1

In your web browser, type or select the web link for Cisco IMC.

Step 2

If a security dialog box displays, do the following: a) (Optional) Check the check box to accept all content from Cisco.

b) Click Yes to accept the certificate and continue.

Step 3

In the log in window, enter your username and password.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Overview

Logging out of Cisco IMC

Tip

When logging in for the first time to an unconfigured system, use admin as the username and password as the password.

The following situations occur when you login to the Web UI for the first time:

• You cannot perform any operation until you change default admin credentials on the Cisco IMC

Web UI.

• You cannot close or cancel the password change pop-up window and opening it in a tab or refreshing the browser page will continue to display the pop-up window. This pop-up window appears when you login after a factory reset.

• You cannot choose the word 'password' as your new password. If this creates problems for any scripts you may be running, you could change it to password by logging back into the user management options, but this is ENTIRELY at your own risk. It is not recommended by Cisco.

Step 4

Click Log In.

Logging out of Cisco IMC

Procedure

Step 1

In the upper right of Cisco IMC, click Log Out.

Logging out returns you to the Cisco IMC log in page.

Step 2

(Optional) Log back in or close your web browser.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Logging out of Cisco IMC

Overview

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

C H A P T E R

Installing the Server OS

This chapter includes the following sections:

•

OS Installation Methods, page 11

•

KVM Console, page 11

•

PXE Installation Servers, page 13

•

Booting an Operating System from a USB Port, page 14

OS Installation Methods

C-Series servers support several operating systems. Regardless of the OS being installed, you can install it on your server using one of the following tools:

• KVM console

• PXE installation server

KVM Console

The KVM console is an interface accessible from Cisco IMC that emulates a direct keyboard, video, and mouse (KVM) connection to the server. The KVM console allows you to connect to the server from a remote location.

Instead of using CD/DVD or floppy drives physically connected to the server, the KVM console uses virtual media, which are actual disk drives or disk image files that are mapped to virtual CD/DVD or floppy drives.

You can map any of the following to a virtual drive:

• CD/DVD or floppy drive on your computer

• Disk image files (ISO or IMG files) on your computer

• USB flash drive on your computer

• CD/DVD or floppy drive on the network

• Disk image files (ISO or IMG files) on the network

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Installing the Server OS

Installing an OS Using the KVM Console

• USB flash drive on the network

You can use the KVM console to install an OS on the server.

Note

When launching the KVM Console from Internet Explorer 6 SP1 on Windows Server 2003, the browser will report that it cannot download a required file. If this occurs, click the browser Tools menu and select

Internet Options. Click the Advanced tab and, in the Security section, uncheck the checkbox for "Do not save encrypted pages to disk." Launch the KVM Console again.

Installing an OS Using the KVM Console

Note

This procedure describes only the basic installation steps. Detailed guides for installing Linux, VMware, and Windows can be found at this URL: http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps10493/products_ installation_and_configuration_guides_list.html

Before You Begin

• Locate the OS installation disk or disk image file.

• You must log in as a user with admin privileges to install an OS.

Procedure

Step 1

Load the OS installation disk into your CD/DVD drive, or copy the disk image files to your computer.

Step 2

If Cisco IMC is not open, log in.

Step 3

In the Navigation pane, click the Compute menu.

Step 4

In the Compute menu, select a server.

Step 5

In the work pane, click the Remote Management tab.

Step 6

In the Remote Management pane, click the Virtual KVM tab.

Step 7

In the Actions area, click Launch KVM Console.

The KVM Console opens in a separate window.

Step 8

From the KVM console, click the VM tab.

Step 9

In the VM tab, map the virtual media using either of the following methods:

• Check the Mapped check box for the CD/DVD drive containing the OS installation disk.

• Click Add Image, navigate to and select the OS installation disk image, click Open to mount the disk image, and then check the Mapped check box for the mounted disk image.

Note

You must keep the VM tab open during the OS installation process. Closing the tab unmaps all virtual media.

Step 10 Reboot the server and select the virtual CD/DVD drive as the boot device.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Installing the Server OS

PXE Installation Servers

When the server reboots, it begins the installation process from the virtual CD/DVD drive. Refer to the installation guide for the OS being installed to guide you through the rest of the installation process.

What to Do Next

After the OS installation is complete, reset the LAN boot order to its original setting. Always follow your OS vendors recommended configuration, including software interoperability and driver compatibility. For more information on driver recommendations and installation, follow the Cisco UCS Hardware Compatibility list here: https://ucshcltool.cloudapps.cisco.com/public/

PXE Installation Servers

A Preboot Execution Environment (PXE) installation server allows a client to boot and install an OS from a remote location. To use this method, a PXE environment must be configured and available on your VLAN, typically a dedicated provisioning VLAN. Additionally, the server must be set to boot from the network.

When the server boots, it sends a PXE request across the network. The PXE installation server acknowledges the request, and starts a sequence of events that installs the OS on the server.

PXE servers can use installation disks, disk images, or scripts to install an OS. Proprietary disk images can also be used to install an OS, additional components, or applications.

Note

PXE installation is an efficient method for installing an OS on a large number of servers. However, considering that this method requires setting up a PXE environment, it might be easier to use another installation method.

Installing an OS Using a PXE Installation Server

Before You Begin

• Verify that the server can be reached over a VLAN.

• You must log in as a user with admin privileges to install an OS.

Procedure

Step 1

Set the boot order to PXE first.

Step 2

Reboot the server.

If a PXE install server is available on the VLAN, the installation process begins when the server reboots. PXE installations are typically automated and require no additional user input. Refer to the installation guide for the OS being installed to guide you through the rest of the installation process.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Installing the Server OS

Booting an Operating System from a USB Port

What to Do Next

Booting an Operating System from a USB Port

All Cisco UCS C-series servers support booting an operating system from any USB port on the server. However, there are a few guidelines that you must keep in mind, prior to booting an OS from a USB port.

• To maintain the boot order configuration, it is recommended that you use an internal USB port for booting an OS.

• The USB port must be enabled prior to booting an OS from it.

By default, the USB ports are enabled. If you have disabled a USB port, you must enable it prior to booting an OS from it. For information on enabling a disabled USB ports, see topic Enabling or Disabling

the Internal USB Port in the server-specific installation and service guide available at the following link: http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps10493/prod_installation_guides_list.html

• After you boot the OS from the USB port, you must set the second-level boot order so that the server boots from that USB source every time.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

C H A P T E R

Managing Chassis

This chapter includes the following sections:

•

Chassis Summary, page 15

•

Chassis Inventory, page 19

Chassis Summary

Viewing Chassis Summary

By default when you log on to the Cisco UCS C-Series rack-mount server, the Summary pane of the Chassis is displayed in the Web UI. You can also view the Chassis summary when in another tab or working area, by completing the following steps:

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Summary.

Step 3

In the Server Properties area of the Chassis Summary pane, review the following information:

Name Description

Product Name field The model name of the server.

Serial Number field The serial number for the server.

PID field

UUID field

BIOS version field

Description field

The product ID.

The UUID assigned to the server.

The version of the BIOS running on the server.

A user-defined description for the server.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Chassis

Viewing Chassis Summary

Name

Asset Tag field

Description

A user-defined tag for the server. By default, the asset tag for a new server displays Unknown.

Step 4

In the Cisco IMC Information area of the Chassis Summary pane, review the following information:

Name Description

Hostname field A user-defined hostname for the Cisco IMC. By default, the hostname appears in CXXX-YYYYYY format, where XXX is the model number and YYYYYY is the serial number of the server.

IP Address field

MAC Address field

The IP address for the Cisco IMC.

The MAC address assigned to the active network interface to the Cisco

IMC.

Firmware Version field

Current Time field

Local Time field

Timezone field

The current Cisco IMC firmware version.

The current date and time according to the Cisco IMC clock.

Note

Cisco IMC gets the current date and time from the server BIOS when the NTP is disabled. When NTP is enabled, Cisco IMC gets the current time and date from the NTP server. To change this information, reboot the server and press F2 when prompted to access the BIOS configuration menu. Then change the date or time using the options on the main BIOS configuration tab.

The local time of the region according to the chosen time zone.

Allows you to select a time zone by clicking on the Select Timezone option. In the Select Timezone pop-up screen, mouse over the map and click on the location to select your time zone or choose your time zone from the Timezone drop-down menu.

Step 5

In the Chassis Status area of the Chassis Summary pane, review the following information:

Name Description

Power State field

The current power state.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Chassis

Viewing Chassis Summary

Name

Overall Server Status field

Temperature field

Overall DIMM Status field

Power Supplies field

Fans field

Description

The overall status of the server. This can be one of the following:

• Memory Test In Progress—The server is performing a self-test of the installed memory. This condition normally occurs during the boot process.

• Good

• Moderate Fault

• Severe Fault

The temperature status. This can be one of the following:

• Good

• Fault

• Severe Fault

You can click the link in this field to view more temperature information.

The overall status of the memory modules. This can be one of the following:

• Good

• Fault

• Severe Fault

You can click the link in this field to view detailed status information.

The overall status of the power supplies. This can be one of the following:

• Good

• Fault

• Severe Fault

You can click the link in this field to view detailed status information.

The overall status of the power supplies. This can be one of the following:

• Good

• Fault

• Severe Fault

You can click the link in this field to view detailed status information.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Chassis

Viewing Chassis Summary

Name

Locator LED field

Front Locator LED field

Overall Storage Status field

Description

Whether the locator LEDs are on or off.

Whether the front panel locator LED on the chassis is on or off.

Note

This option is available only on some UCS C-Series servers.

The overall status of all controllers. This can be one of the following:

• Good

• Moderate Fault

• Severe Fault

Step 6

In the Server Utilization area of the Chassis Summary pane, review the following information in a graphical representation:

Name Description

Overall Utilization (%) field The overall realtime utilization of CPU, memory, and

IO (input and output) of the system in percentage.

CPU Utilization (%) field

The CPU or computation utilization of the system on all the available CPUs in percentage.

Memory Utilization (%) field

IO Utilization (%) field

The memory utilization of the system on all the available memory (DIMM) channels in percentage.

The IO resource utilization of the system in percentage.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Chassis

Chassis Inventory

Chassis Inventory

Viewing Power Supply Properties

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Inventory.

Step 3

In the Inventory work pane, click the Power Supplies tab and review the following information for each power supply:

Name Description

Device ID column The identifier for the power supply unit.

Status column

The status of the power supply unit.

Input column

Output column

FW Version column

Product ID column

The input into the power supply, in watts.

The maximum output from the power supply, in watts.

The firmware version for the power supply.

The product identifier for the power supply assigned by the vendor.

Viewing Cisco VIC Adapter Properties

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Inventory.

Step 3

In the Inventory work pane, click the Cisco VIC Adapters tab and review the following high level information:

Name Description

Slot Number column The PCI slot in which the adapter is installed.

Serial Number column

The serial number for the adapter.

Product ID column The product ID for the adapter.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Chassis

Viewing SAS Expander Properties

Name

Cisco IMC Enabled column

Description column

Description

Whether the adapter is able to manage Cisco IMC. This functionality depends on the type of adapter installed and how it is configured. For details, see the hardware installation guide for the type of server you are using.

Description of the adapter.

Viewing SAS Expander Properties

Before You Begin

The server must be powered on, or the properties will not display.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Inventory.

Step 3

In the Inventory work pane, click the SAS Expander tab and review the following information:

Name Description

ID column The product ID of the expander.

Name column

The name of the expander.

Firmware Version column

Secondary Firmware Version

column

The firmware version the expander uses.

The secondary firmware version of the expander.

Hardware Revision column

SAS Address column

Server Up Link Speed column

The hardware version of the expander.

The SAS address of the expander.

Up link speed received with the LSI RAID Controller.

Note

This is available only on some C-Series servers.

You can view up to four speed levels for Server 1 and 2 respectively using the Filter icon on the top right hand corner of the SAS Expander table. Select the Tick mark next to the speed filter to view the individual speed in the table.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Chassis

Viewing Storage Properties

Enabling 6G or 12G Mixed Mode on a SAS Expander

You can enable or disable a 6 gigabyte or 12 gigabyte mixed mode speed support for a card using this option, which is a toggle button.

Note

This option is available only on some C-Series servers.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Inventory.

Step 3

In the Inventory working area, click the SAS Expander tab.

Step 4

In the SAS Expander working area, click Enable 6G-12G Mixed Mode.

Step 5

(Optional) Click Disable 6g-12G Mixed Mode to disable the feature.

Viewing Storage Properties

Before You Begin

The server must be powered on, or the properties will not display.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Inventory.

Step 3

In the Inventory work pane, click the Storage tab and review the following information:

Name Description

Controller field PCIe slot in which the controller drive is located.

PCI Slot field

The name of the PCIe slot in which the controller drive is located.

Product Name field

Serial Number field

Firmware Package Build field

Product ID field

Name of the controller.

The serial number of the storage controller.

The active firmware package version number.

Product ID of the controller.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Viewing Network Adapter Properties

Name

Battery Status field

Cache Memory Size field

Health field

Description

Status of the battery.

The size of the cache memory, in megabytes.

The health of the controller.

Managing Chassis

Viewing Network Adapter Properties

Before You Begin

The server must be powered on, or the properties will not display.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Inventory.

Step 3

In the Inventory work pane, click the Network Adapters tab and review the following information:

Name Description

Slot column

The slot in which the adapter is installed.

Product Name column

Number of Interfaces column

External Ethernet Interfaces

The product name for the adapter.

The number of interfaces for the adapter.

ID—The ID for the external ethernet interface.

MAC Address—The MAC address for the external ethernet interface.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

C H A P T E R

Managing the Server

This chapter includes the following sections:

•

Managing the Server Boot Order, page 23

•

Configuring Power Policies, page 37

•

Configuring DIMM Blacklisting, page 51

•

Enabling DIMM Black Listing, page 52

•

Configuring BIOS Settings, page 52

•

BIOS Profiles, page 71

•

Setting Dynamic Front Panel Temperature Threshold, page 75

Managing the Server Boot Order

Server Boot Order

Using Cisco IMC, you can configure the order in which the server attempts to boot from available boot device types. In the legacy boot order configuration, Cisco IMC allows you to reorder the device types but not the devices within the device types. With the precision boot order configuration, you can have a linear ordering of the devices. In the web UI or CLI you can change the boot order and boot mode, add multiple devices under each device types, rearrange the boot order, set parameters for each device type.

When you change the boot order configuration, Cisco IMC sends the configured boot order to BIOS the next time that server is rebooted. To implement the new boot order, reboot the server after you make the configuration change. The new boot order takes effect on any subsequent reboot. The configured boot order remains until the configuration is changed again in Cisco IMC or in the BIOS setup.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Server Boot Order

Note

The actual boot order differs from the configured boot order if either of the following conditions occur:

• BIOS encounters issues while trying to boot using the configured boot order.

• A user changes the boot order directly through BIOS.

• BIOS appends devices that are seen by the host but are not configured from the user.

Note

When you create a new policy using the configure boot order feature, BIOS tries to map this new policy to the devices in the system. It displays the actual device name and the policy name to which it is mapped in the Actual Boot Order area. If BIOS cannot map any device to a particular policy in Cisco IMC, the actual device name is stated as NonPolicyTarget in the Actual Boot Order area.

Note

When you upgrade Cisco IMC to the latest version 2.0(x) for the first time, the legacy boot order is migrated to the precision boot order. During this process, previous boot order configuration is erased and all device types configured before updating to 2.0 version are converted to corresponding precision boot device types and some dummy devices are created for the same device types. you can view these devices in the

Configured Boot Order area in the web UI. To view these devices in the CLI, enter show boot-device command. During this the server's actual boot order is retained and it can be viewed under actual boot order option in web UI and CLI.

When you downgrade Cisco IMC prior to 2.0(x) verison the server's last legacy boot order is retained, and the same can be viewed under Actual Boot Order area. For example:

• If you configured the server in a legacy boot order in 2.0(x) version, upon downgrade a legacy boot order configuration is retained.

• If you configured the server in a precision boot order in 2.0(x), upon downgrade the last configured legacy boot order is retained.

Important

• Boot order configuration prior to 2.0(x) is referred as legacy boot order. If your running version is

2.0(x), then you cannot configure legacy boot order through web UI, but you can configure through

CLI and XML API. In the CLI, you can configure it by using set boot-order HDD,PXE command.

Even though, you can configure legacy boot order through CLI or XML API, in the web UI this configured boot order is not displayed.

• Legacy and precision boot order features are mutually exclusive. You can configure either legacy or precision boot order. If you configure legacy boot order, it disables all the precision boot devices configured. If you configure precision boot order, then it erases legacy boot order configuration.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Configuring the Precision Boot Order

Configuring the Precision Boot Order

Before You Begin

You must log in as a user with admin privileges to configure server the boot order.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Compute menu.

Step 2

In the BIOS tab, click the Configure Boot Order tab.

Step 3

In the BIOS Properties area, click Configure Boot Order.

A dialog box with boot order instructions appears.

Step 4

In the Configure Boot Order dialog box, update the following properties:

Name Description

Add Boot Device table The server boot options. You can add one or more of the following boot device and set parameters of the selected device:

• Add Local HDD

• Add PXE Boot

• Add SAN Boot

• Add iSCSI Boot

• Add SD Card

Note

This option is available only on some UCS C-Series servers.

• Add USB

• Add Virtual Media

• Add PCH Storage

• Add UEFI SHELL

• Add NVME

• Add Local CDD

Enable/Disable button

Modify button

The visibility of a device by BIOS. The state can be one of the following:

• Enabled— The device is visible to BIOS in a boot order configuration.

• Disabled— The device is not visible to BIOS in a boot order configuration.

Modifies the attributes of the selected devices.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Managing a Boot Device

Name

Delete button

Clone button

Re-Apply button

Move Up button

Move Down button

Boot Order table

Save Changes button

Reset Values button

Close button

Description

Deletes the selected bootable device from the Boot Order table.

Copies an existing device setting to a new device.

Reapplies the boot order configuration to BIOS when the last configured boot order source displays as BIOS.

Moves the selected device type to a higher priority in the Boot Order table.

Moves the selected device type to a lower priority in the Boot Order table.

Displays the device types from which this server can boot, in the order in which the boot is attempted.

Saves the changes to the configured boot order or reapplies a previously configured boot order.

Cisco IMC sends the configured boot order to BIOS the next time that server is rebooted.

Resets the values of the configured boot order.

Closes the dialog box without saving any changes or reapplying the existing configuration.

If you choose this option, the actual boot order does not change the next time that server is rebooted.

Step 5

Click Save Changes.

Additional device types might be appended to the actual boot order, depending on what devices you have connected to your server.

What to Do Next

Reboot the server to boot with your new boot order.

Managing a Boot Device

Before You Begin

You must log in as a user with admin privileges to add device type to the server boot order.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Managing a Boot Device

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Compute menu.

Step 2

In the BIOS tab, click the Configure Boot Order tab.

Step 3

In the BIOS Properties area, click Configure Boot Order.

A dialog box with boot order instructions appears.

Step 4

In the Configure Boot Order dialog box, from the Add Boot Device table, choose the device that you want add to the boot order.

To add the local HDD device, click Add Local HDD, and update the following parameters:

Name

Name field

State drop-down list

Description

The name of the device.

Note

Once created, you cannot rename the device.

The visibility of the device by BIOS. This can be one of the following:

• Enabled—The device is visible to BIOS in a boot order configuration.

• Disabled—The device is not visible to BIOS in a boot configuration.

Order field

Slot field

Add Device button

Cancel button

The order of the device in the available list of devices.

Enter between 1 and n, where n is the number of devices.

The slot in which the device is installed. Enter the slot number from the available range.

Adds the device to the Boot Order table.

Closes the dialog box without saving any changes made while the dialog box was open.

To add the PXE device, click Add PXE, and update the following parameters:

Name

Name field

Description

The name of the device.

This name cannot be changed after the device has been created.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Managing a Boot Device

Name

State drop-down list

Order field

MAC Address

Slot field

Port field

Description

The visibility of the device by BIOS. The state can be one of the following:

• Enabled—The device is visible to BIOS in a boot order configuration.

• Disabled—The device is not visible to BIOS in a boot order configuration.

The order of the device in the available list of devices.

Enter between 1 and n, where n is the number of devices.

MAC address of the server.

Note

This option is available only on some C-Series servers.

The slot in which the device is installed. Enter the slot number from the available range.

The port of the slot in which the device is present.

Enter a number between 0 and 255.

To add the SAN boot device, click Add SAN Boot, and update the following parameters:

Name

Name field

Description

The name of the device.

This name cannot be changed after the device has been created.

State drop-down list

The visibility of the device by BIOS. The state can be one of the following:

• Enabled—The device is visible to BIOS in a boot order configuration.

• Disabled—The device is not visible to BIOS in a boot order configuration.

Order field

Slot field

LUN field

The order of the device in the available list of devices.

Enter between 1 and n, where n is the number of devices.

The slot in which the device is installed. Enter the slot number from the available range.

Logical unit in a slot where the device is present.

Enter a number between 0 and 255.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Managing a Boot Device

Name

Save Changes button

Cancel button

Description

Adds the device to the Boot Order table, and saves the changes.

Closes the dialog box without saving any changes made while the dialog box was open.

To add the iSCSI boot device, click Add iSCSI Boot, and update the following parameters:

Name

Name field

Description

The name of the device.

This name cannot be changed after the device has been created.

State drop-down list The visibility of the device by BIOS. The state can be one of the following:

• Enabled—The device is visible to BIOS in a boot order configuration.

• Disabled—The device is not visible to BIOS in a boot order configuration.

Order field

Slot field

Port field

Save Changes button

Cancel button

The order of the device in the available list of devices.

Enter between 1 and n, where n is the number of devices.

The slot in which the device is installed. Enter the slot number from the available range.

The port of the slot in which the device is present.

Enter a number between 0 and 255.

Note

In case of a VIC card, use a vNIC instance instead of the port number.

Adds the device to the Boot Order table, and saves the changes.

Closes the dialog box without saving any changes made while the dialog box was open.

To add the SD card, click Add SD Card, and update the following parameters:

Note

Name

This option is available only on some UCS C-Series servers.

Description

Name field The name of the device.

This name cannot be changed after the device has been created.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Managing a Boot Device

Name

State drop-down list

Order field

Save Changes button

Cancel button

Description

The visibility of the device by BIOS. This can be one of the following:

• Enabled—The device is visible to BIOS in a boot order configuration.

• Disabled—The device is not visible to BIOS in a boot configuration.

The order of the device in the available list of devices.

Enter between 1 and n, where n is the number of devices.

Adds the device to the Boot Order table.

Closes the dialog box without saving any changes made while the dialog box was open.

To add the USB device, click Add USB, and update the following parameters:

Name

Name field

Description

The name of the device.

This name cannot be changed after the device has been created.

Sub Type drop-down list The subdevice type under a certain device type. This can be one of the following:

• CD

• FDD

• HDD

State drop-down list The visibility of the device by BIOS. This can be one of the following:

• Enabled—The device is visible to BIOS in a boot order configuration.

• Disabled—The device is not visible to BIOS in a boot order configuration.

Order field

Save Changes button

Cancel button

The order of the device in the available list of devices.

Enter between 1 and n, where n is the number of devices.

Adds the device to the Boot Order table.

Closes the dialog box without saving any changes made while the dialog box was open.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Managing a Boot Device

To add the virtual media, click Virtual Media, and update the following parameters:

Name

Name field

Description

The name of the device.

This name cannot be changed after the device has been created.

Sub Type drop-down list The subdevice type under a certain device type. This could be any one of the following:

• KVM Mapped DVD

• Cisco IMC Mapped DVD

• KVM Mapped HDD

• Cisco IMC Mapped HDD

• KVM Mapped FDD

State drop-down list

The visibility of the device by BIOS. The state can be one of the following:

• Enabled—The device is visible to BIOS in a boot order configuration.

• Disabled—The device is not visible to BIOS in a boot order configuration.

Order field

Save Changes button

Cancel button

The order of the device in the available list of devices.

Enter between 1 and n, where n is the number of devices.

Adds the device to the Boot Order table.

Closes the dialog box without saving any changes made while the dialog box was open.

To add the PCH storage device, click PCH Storage, and update the following parameters:

Name

Name field

Description

The name of the device.

This name cannot be changed after the device has been created.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Managing a Boot Device

Name

State drop-down list

Order field

LUN field

Save Changes button

Cancel button

Description

The visibility of the device by BIOS. This can be one of the following:

• Enabled—The device is visible to BIOS in a boot order configuration.

• Disabled—The device is not visible to BIOS in a boot order configuration.

The order of the device in the available list of devices.

Enter between 1 and n, where n is the number of devices.

Logical unit in a slot where the device is present.

• Enter a number between 0 and 255

• SATA in AHCI mode—Enter a value between 1 and 10

• SATA in SWRAID mode—Enter 0 for SATA , and enter 1 for

SATA

Note

SATA mode is available only on some UCS C-Series servers.

Adds the device to the Boot Order table.

Closes the dialog box without saving any changes made while the dialog box was open.

To add the UEFI shell device, click Add UEFI Shell, and update the following parameters:

Name

Name field

Description

The name of the device.

This name cannot be changed after the device has been created.

State drop-down list The visibility of the device by BIOS. The state can be one of the following:

• Enabled—The device is visible to BIOS in a boot order configuration.

• Disabled—The device is not visible to BIOS in a boot order configuration.

Order field

Add Device button

The order of the device in the available list of devices.

Enter between 1 and n, where n is the number of devices.

Adds the device to the Boot Order table.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Name

Cancel button

Overview to UEFI Secure Boot

Description

Closes the dialog box without saving any changes made while the dialog box was open.

Overview to UEFI Secure Boot

You can use Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) secure boot to ensure that all the EFI drivers, EFI applications, option ROM or operating systems prior to loading and execution are signed and verified for authenticity and integrity, before you load and execute the operating system. You can enable this option using either web UI or CLI. When you enable UEFI secure boot mode, the boot mode is set to UEFI mode and you cannot modify the configured boot mode until the UEFI boot mode is disabled.

Note

If you enable UEFI secure boot on a nonsupported OS, on the next reboot, you cannot boot from that particular OS. If you try to boot from the previous OS, an error is reported and recorded the under system software event in the web UI. You must disable the UEFI secure boot option using Cisco IMC to boot from your previous OS.

Important

Also, if you use an unsupported adapter, an error log event in Cisco IMC SEL is recorded. The error messages is displayed that says:

System Software event: Post sensor, System Firmware error. EFI Load Image Security Violation. [0x5302] was asserted .

UEFI secure boot is supported on the following components:

Components Types

Supported OS

• Windows Server 2012

• Windows Server 2012 R2

Broadcom PCI adapters

• 5709 dual and quad port adapters

• 57712 10GBASE-T adapter

• 57810 CNA

• 57712 SFP port

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Enabling UEFI Secure Boot

Components

Intel PCI adapters

QLogic PCI adapters

Fusion-io

LSI

Types

• i350 quad port adapter

• X520 adapter

• X540 adapter

• LOM

• 8362 dual port adapter

• 2672 dual port adapter

• LSI MegaRAID SAS 9240-8i

• LSI MegaRAID SAS 9220-8i

• LSI MegaRAID SAS 9265CV-8i

• LSI MegaRAID SAS 9285CV-8e

• LSI MegaRAID SAS 9266-8i

• LSI SAS2008-8i mezz

• LSI Nytro card

• RAID controller for UCS Storage

(SLOT-MEZZ)

• Host Bus Adapter (HBA)

Enabling UEFI Secure Boot

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Compute menu.

Step 2

In the work pane, click the BIOS tab.

Step 3

In the BIOS Properties area of the Configure Boot Order tab, check UEFI Secure Boot checkbox.

Note

If checked, the boot mode is set to UEFI secure boot. You cannot modify the Configure Boot Mode until UEFI secure boot option is disabled.

If you enable UEFI secure boot on a nonsupported OS, on the next reboot, you cannot boot from that particular

OS. If you try to boot from the previous OS, an error is reported and recorded under the system software event

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Disabling UEFI Secure Boot

in the web UI. You must disable the UEFI secure boot option by using Cisco IMC to boot from your previous

OS.

Step 4

Click Save Changes.

What to Do Next

Reboot the server to have your configuration boot mode settings take place.

Disabling UEFI Secure Boot

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Compute menu.

Step 2

In the work pane, click the BIOS tab.

Step 3

In the BIOS Properties area, uncheck the UEFI Secure Boot check box.

Step 4

Click Save Changes.

What to Do Next

Reboot the server to have your configuration boot mode settings take place.

Viewing the Actual Server Boot Order

The actual server boot order is the boot order actually used by BIOS when the server last booted. The actual boot order can differ from the boot order configured in Cisco IMC.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Compute menu.

Step 2

In the BIOS tab, click the Configure Boot Order tab.

Step 3

In the BIOS Properties area, click Configure Boot Order.

This area displays the boot order devices configured through Cisco IMC as well as the actual boot order used by the server BIOS.

The Configured Boot Devices section displays the boot order (Basic or Advanced) configured through Cisco

IMC. If this configuration changes, Cisco IMC sends this boot order to BIOS the next time that server boots.

The Basic configuration allows you to specify only the device type. The Advanced configuration allows you to configure the device with specific parameters such as slot, port and LUN.

To change the configured boot order, or to restore the previously configured boot order, administrators can click the Configure Boot Order button. To have these changes take effect immediately, reboot the server.

You can verify the new boot order by refreshing the BIOS tab.

Note

This information is only sent to BIOS the next time the server boots. Cisco IMC does not send the boot order information to BIOS again until the configuration changes.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Configuring a Server to Boot With a One-Time Boot Device

The Actual Boot Devices section displays the boot order actually used by BIOS when the server last booted.

The actual boot order will differ from the configured boot order if either of the following conditions occur:

• The BIOS encounters issues while trying to boot using the configured boot order.

• A user changes the boot order directly through the BIOS. To override any manual changes, you can change the configured boot order through Cisco IMC and reboot the server.

Note

When you create a new policy using the configured boot order, BIOS tries to map this new policy to the device or devices present in the system. It displays the actual device name and the policy name to which it is mapped under the Actual Boot Order area. If BIOS cannot map any device found to a particular policy in Cisco IMC, then the actual device name is stated as NonPolicyTarget under the Actual Boot Order area.

Configuring a Server to Boot With a One-Time Boot Device

You can configure a server to boot from a particular device only for the next server boot, without disrupting the currently configured boot order. Once the server boots from the one time boot device, all its future reboots occur from the previously configured boot order.

Before You Begin

You must log in as a user with admin privileges to configure server the boot order.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Compute menu.

Step 2

In the BIOS tab, click the Configure Boot Order tab.

Step 3

In the BIOS Properties area, select an option from the Configured One Time Boot Device drop-down.

Note

The host boots to the one time boot device even when configured with a disabled advanced boot device.

Creating a Server Asset Tag

Before You Begin

You must log in with user or admin privileges to perform this task.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Configuring Power Policies

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Summary.

Step 3

In the Server Properties area, update the Asset Tag field.

Step 4

Click Save Changes.

Configuring Power Policies

Power Capping

Important

This section is valid only for some UCS C-Series servers.

Power capping determines how server power consumption is actively managed. When you enable power capping option, the system monitors power consumption and maintains the power below the allocated power limit. If the server cannot maintain the power limit or cannot bring the platform power back to the specified power limit within the correction time, power capping performs actions that you specify in the Action field under the Power Profile area.

Once power capping is enabled, you can configure multiple power profiles to either have standard or advanced power profiles with defined attributes. If you choose a standard power profile, you can set the power limit, correction time, corrective-action, suspend period, hard capping, and policy state (if enabled). If you choose an advanced power profile, in addition to the attributes of the standard power profile, you can also set the domain specific power limits, safe throttle level, and ambient temperature based power capping attributes.

Note

The following changes are applicable for Cisco UCS C-Series release 2.0(13) and later:

• After upgrading to the 2.0(13) release, power characterization automatically runs during the first host power on. Subsequent characterization runs only if initiated as described in section Run Power

Characterization section.

• Also, when a server is power cycled and there is a change to the CPU or DIMM configurations, power characterization automatically runs on first host boot. For any other hardware change like

PCIe adapters, GPU or HDDs, power characterization does not run. The characterized power range is modified depending on the components present after the host power cycle.

The Run Power Characterization option in the Power Cap Configuration Tab of the Web UI power cycles the host and starts power characterization.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Setting Power Redundancy Policy

Setting Power Redundancy Policy

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Sensors.

Step 3

In the Sensors working area, click the Power Supply tab.

Step 4

Review the following sensor properties for power supply:

Properties Area

Name Description

Redundancy Status field The power supply redundancy status.

Redundancy Policy field The power supply redundancy policy. This can be one of the following:

• Non-Redundant - N, the available PSU output capacity, equals the number of PSUs installed, where PSU failure or grid failure is not supported.

• N+1 - N, the available PSU output capacity, equals the number of PSUs installed minus 1 (N-1), where the single PSU failure is supported, but grid failure is not supported.

• Grid - N, the available PSU output capacity, equals half the number of PSUs installed (N/2), where N PSU failure or grid failure is supported. This policy implies that the you have connected N number of PSUs to one feed and the other N number of PSUs to another feed.

Enabling Power Characterization

You can enable power characterization only on some Cisco UCS C-Series servers.

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Power Management.

Step 3

In the Power Cap Configuration tab, click the Run Power Characterization link.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Enabling Power Capping

A confirmation box appears that says the host is going to be either powered on or rebooted depending on the current power state. Review the message and click OK to close the dialog box.

You can verify the progress of the power characterization in the Status field. The status can be one of the following:

• Not Run—When power characterization has not been run at all since the factory reset.

• Running—When a power characterization process is in progress.

• Completed Successfully—When a power characterization has run successfully.

• Using Defaults—After running the power characterization, if the system fails to obtain the valid values, it uses default value as the recommended maximum and minimum power for power capping.

After power characterization action is performed, the platform power limit range is populated under the

Recommended Power Cap area as a minimum and maximum power in watts.

Three values for power capping limits are displayed: Minimum (Allow Throttling), Minimum

(Efficient) and Maximum:

• Minimum (Allow Throttling) - This is the lower power limit for the chassis, when the CPU throttling is enabled.

Note

You can use this minimum power limit value only when the Allow Throttle checkbox is enabled.

• Minimum (Efficient) - This is the lower power limit for the chassis, when the CPU throttling is disabled.

• Maximum - This is the upper power limit for the chassis.

Enabling Power Capping

This option is available only on some Cisco UCS C-Series servers.

Before You Begin

• You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

• Run power characterization.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Power Management.

Step 3

Check the Power Capping check box.

Note

This is the global option to enable or disable power capping. You must enable this option if you want to configure power profile settings.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Power Profiles

Step 4

Click Save Changes.

Power Profiles

You can configure multiple profiles and set the attributes. These profiles are configured by using either the web UI or CLI. In the web UI, the profiles are listed under the Power Capping area. In the CLI, the profiles are configured when you enter the power-cap-config command. You can configure the following power profiles for power capping feature:

• Standard—Enables you to set a power limit for the platform domain.

• Advanced—Enables you to set various attributes such as the power limiting policy, fail-safe power limiting policy, and the ambient temperature-based power limiting policy.

Configuring Standard Power Profiles Settings

This option is available only on some Cisco UCS C-Series servers.

Before You Begin

• You must enable power capping.

• You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Power Management.

Step 3

In the Power Profiles area, complete the following fields:

Name Description

Name field The name of the profile selected to set the attributes for power capping.

Enable Profile check box

Allow Throttle check box

Enables the power profile for editing.

If checked, it forces the processor to use more aggressive power management mechanisms such as,

CPU the throttling states (T-states) and memory bandwidth throttling to maintain the power limit, in addition to the regular internal mechanisms.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Power Profiles

Name

Correction Time field

Action drop-down list

Power Limit check box

Set Hard Cap check box

Description

The time in seconds in which the platform power should be brought back to the specified power limit before taking the action specified in the Action field.

The range is from 1 and 600.

This range varies depending on the server PSU value.

Note

The supported minimum correction time for all PSU models is 1 second, except for

DPST-1400AB and DPST-1200DB PSU models for which the supported minimum correction time is 3 seconds.

The action to be performed if the specified power limit is not maintained within the correction time.

• Alert—Logs the event to the Cisco IMC SEL.

• Alert and Shutdown—Logs the event to the

Cisco IMC SEL, and gracefully shuts down the host.

The power limit for the server.

Enter power in watts within the range specified.

If checked, ensure that no platform consumption occurs beyond the set power capping value. The platform power consumption is maintained at a safe offset margin below the configured power cap value.

Step 4

Click Save Changes.

Configuring Advanced Power Profile Settings

This option is available only on some Cisco UCS C-Series servers

Before You Begin

• You must enable power capping.

• You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Power Profiles

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Power Management.

Step 3

From the Power Profiles table in the Power Cap Configuration tab, choose the Advanced profile.

In addition to the standard profile settings, the Domain Specific Power Limit, Safe Throttle Level, and

Ambient Temperature Based Power Capping areas are displayed.

Step 4

In the Domain Specific Power Limit area, complete the following fields:

Name Description

CPU field The power limit for the CPU.

Enter power in watts within the range specified.

Memory field

Platform field

The power limit for the memory.

Enter power in watts within the range specified.

The power limit for the platform.

Enter power in watts within the range specified.

Step 5

In the Suspend Period area, click Configure to configure a suspend period for a specific time period and day.

Step 6

In the Safe Throttle Level area, complete the following fields:

Name Description

Failsafe Timeout field

The safe throttle policy that is applied when power capping is impacted due to internal faults such as missing power readings for platforms or CPUs.

Enter value in seconds

Platform field The throttling level for the platform.

The range is from 0 to 100 percentage.

Step 7

In the Ambient Temperature Based Power Capping area, complete the following fields:

Name Description

Platform Temp Trigger field The inlet (front panel) temperature sensor value in

Celsius.

Note

When the inlet temperature on the platform exceeds the specified limit, the system uses the thermal power value as the power capping limit.

Thermal Power Limit field

The power limit to be maintained in watts.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Power Monitoring

Step 8

Click Save Changes.

Resetting Power Profiles to Default

This option is available only on some Cisco UCS C-Series servers.

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Power Management.

Step 3

In the Power Profiles area, click the Reset Profiles to Default button.

Note

This action resets all the power profile settings to factory default values and disables power capping.

Step 4

Click Save Changes.

Power Monitoring

Power monitoring is initiated from the time the host is either powered on or booted. This feature collects the power consumption statistics for a platform, CPU, and memory domains and provides a minimum, maximum, and averaged reading for the duration that is being collected. These readings can be used to calculate the power consumption trends of the domains. Cisco IMC collects and stores these power consumption statistic values to plot graphs for various time periods (such as an hour, a day, and a week).

Note

You cannot create additional statistics collection policies or delete the existing monitoring policies. You can only modify the default policies.

Viewing Power Monitoring Summary

This option is available only on some Cisco UCS C-Series servers.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Power Monitoring

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Power Management.

Step 3

On the Work pane, click the Power Monitoring tab.

Step 4

In the Power Monitoring Summary area, review the following information:

The following tables display the power consumed by the system and its components since the last time it was rebooted.

Name

Monitoring Period

Description

The time of monitoring the power consumed by the system since the last time it was rebooted.

The monitoring period is displayed in Day HH:MM:SS format.

Step 5

In the Platform area, review the following information:

Name Description

Current

The power currently being used by the server, CPU, and memory in watts.

Minimum

Maximum

The minimum number of watts consumed by the server, CPU, and memory since the last time it was rebooted.

The maximum number of watts consumed by the server, CPU, and memory since the last time it was rebooted.

Average

The average amount of power consumed by the server, CPU, and memory in watts over the defined period of time.

Step 6

In the CPU area, review the following information:

Name Description

Current

The power currently being used by the CPU in watts.

Minimum

Maximum

The minimum number of watts consumed by the CPU since the last time it was rebooted.

The maximum number of watts consumed by the CPU since the last time it was rebooted.

Average

The average amount of power consumed by the server, CPU, and memory in watts over the defined period of time.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Power Monitoring

Step 7

In the Memory area, review the following information:

Name Description

Current

The power currently being used by the memory, in watts.

Minimum

Maximum

The minimum number of watts consumed by the memory since the last time it was rebooted.

The maximum number of watts consumed by the memory since the last time it was rebooted.

Average

The average amount of power consumed by the memory in watts over the defined period of time.

Step 8

In the Chart Properties area, review and update the chart, component, and view the power consumption details.

Name Description

Chart Settings

Enables you to configure the chart properties and the way data is displayed in the chart.

Download Power Statistics and

Server Utilization Data

Enables you to download the power statistics and host server utilization information. The files are downloaded to your local download folder.

Note

If the file size of the already downloaded statistics file is less than 256 KB, then when you download, another set of files is downloaded, one for the power statistics and the other for host server utilization. If the size of the existing files exceeds 256

KB, then the next set of files overwrites the existing ones.

Name

Chart drop-down list

Description

Allows you to collect the trends of power consumption from every server for the selected duration. This can be one of the following:

• Last One Hour— Plots the chart for every five minutes

• Last One Day—Plots the chart for every hour from the current time.

• Last One Week—Plots the chart for each day.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Power Monitoring

Name

Component drop-down list

Plot button

Chart/Table View (Appears on mouse-over)

Chart Type (Appears on mouse-over)

Current check box

Average check box

Maximum check box

Minimum check box

Description

The component for which you want to view the power consumption over the selected duration. This can be one of the following:

• Platform

• CPU

• Memory

• All

Displays the power consumed by the selected component for the specified duration.

Select to view power monitoring summary in either

Chart or Table view.

Select the type of chart you wish to view. This could be one of the following:

• Column Chart— Power monitoring data appears as a column.

• Line Chart— Power monitoring data appears in lines.

If checked, the chart displays the current power consumed by the selected component for the selected duration.

If checked, the plot displays the average amount of power consumed by the selected component for the selected duration.

If checked, the plot displays the maximum number of watts consumed by the selected component for the selected duration.

If checked, the plot displays the minimum number of watts consumed by the selected component for the selected duration.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Power Monitoring

Viewing the Power Statistics in a Chart

This option is available only on some Cisco UCS C-Series servers.

Before You Begin

• You must enabled power capping.

• You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Power Management.

Step 3

In the work pane, click the Power Monitoring tab.

Step 4

On the Power Monitoring tab, review and update the chart, component, to view the power consumption details.

Name Description

Chart drop-down list Allows you to collect the trends of power consumption from every server for the selected duration. This can be one of the following:

• Last One Hour— Plots the chart for every five minutes

• Last One Day—Plots the chart for every hour from the current time.

• Last One Week—Plots the chart for each day.

Component drop-down list

Maximum check box

Minimum check box

The component for which you want to view the power consumption over the selected duration. This can be one of the following:

• Platform

• CPU

• Memory

• All

If checked, the plot displays the maximum number of watts consumed by the selected component for the selected duration.

If checked, the plot displays the minimum number of watts consumed by the selected component for the selected duration.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Power Monitoring

Name

Average check box

Current check box

Plot button

Description

If checked, the plot displays the average amount of power consumed by the selected component for the selected duration.

If checked, the chart displays the current power consumed by the selected component for the selected duration.

Displays the power consumed by the selected component for the specified duration.

The power reading chart plots power consumption values of different components for the selected duration.

These power consumption values are captured from the time that the host is powered on. When a power profile is enabled, the power limit is plotted in the chart as a red line. This plot can be used to determine the power consumption trend of the system. To view the configured power limit values of a particular domain, move the mouse over these trend lines.

If choose the Standard profile, the trend line represent the power limit. If you choose the Advance profile, it represents the power limit for CPU, memory, and platform depending on your power profile configuration.

Note

These trend lines are not displayed if the profile is disabled on the Power Cap Configuration tab.

Step 5

Click Save Changes.

Downloading Power Statistics and Server Utilization Data

This option is available only on some Cisco UCS C-Series servers.

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Power Management.

Step 3

In the Work pane, click the Power Monitoring tab.

Step 4

In the Power Monitoring tab, click Download Power Statistics and Server Utilization Data

The files are downloaded to your local download folder.

Note

If the size of the existing files exceeds 256 KB, then the next set of files overwrites the existing ones.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Configuring the Power Restore Policy

Configuring the Power Restore Policy

The power restore policy determines how power is restored to the server after a chassis power loss.

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Compute menu.

Step 2

In the work pane, click the Power Policies tab.

Step 3

In the Power Restore Policy area, update the following fields:

Name Description

Power Restore Policy drop-down list

The action to be taken when chassis power is restored after an unexpected power loss. This can be one of the following:

• Power Off—The server remains off until it is manually restarted.

• Power On—The server is allowed to boot up normally when power is restored. The server can restart immediately or, optionally, after a fixed or random delay.

• Restore Last State—The server restarts and the system attempts to restore any processes that were running before power was lost.

Step 4

Click Save Changes.

Configuring the Fan Policy

You can determine the right fan policy based on the server configuration and server components.

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Compute menu.

Step 2

In the work pane, click the Power Policies tab.

Step 3

In the Configured Fan Policy area, select a fan policy from the drop-down list. It can be one of the following:

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Configuring the Fan Policy

Name

Fan Policy drop-down list

Applied Fan Policy field

Managing the Server

Description

This can be one of the following:

• Balanced—This setting can cool almost any server configuration, but may not be suitable for servers with PCIe cards as these cards overheat easily.

• Performance—This setting can be used for server configurations where maximum fan speed is required for high performance. With this setting, the fan speeds run at the same speed or higher speed than that of the fan speed set with the Balanced fan policy.

Note

This option is available only on some

C-Series servers.

• Low Power—This is the default policy. This setting is ideal for minimal configuration servers that do not contain any PCIe cards.

• High Power—This setting can be used for server configurations that require fan speeds ranging from 60% to 85%. This policy is ideal for servers that contain PCIe cards that overheat easily and have high temperatures. The minimum fan speed set with this policy varies for each server, but it is approximately in the range of 50 to 85%.

• Maximum Power—This setting can be used for server configurations that required extremely high fan speeds ranging from 70% to 100%.

This policy is ideal for servers that contain PCIe cards that overheat easily and have very high temperatures. The minimum fan speed set with this policy varies for each server, but it is approximately in the range of 70 to 100%.

The actual speed of the fan that runs on the server.

When the configured fan policy is not in effect, it displays N/A. The configured fan policy takes effect when the server is powered on and the POST is complete.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Configuring DIMM Blacklisting

Name

Configuration Status field

Description

The configuration status of the fan policy. This can be one of the following:

• SUCCESS —The fan speed set by you matches the actual fan speed that runs on the server.

• PENDING —The configured fan policy is not in effect yet. This can be due to one of the following:

• The server is powered off

• The BIOS POST is not complete

• FAN POLICY OVERRIDE—Overrides the specified fan speed with the actual speed determined by the configuration requirements of the server.

Step 4

Click Save Changes.

Configuring DIMM Blacklisting

DIMM Black Listing

In Cisco IMC, the state of the Dual In-line Memory Module (DIMM) is based on SEL event records. A DIMM is marked bad if the BIOS encounters a non-correctable memory error or correctable memory error with 16000 error counts during memory test execution during BIOS post. If a DIMM is marked bad, it is considered a non-functional device.

If you enable DIMM blacklisting, Cisco IMC monitors the memory test execution messages and blacklists any DIMM that encounters memory errors at any given point of time in the DIMM SPD data. This allows the host to map out those DIMMs.

DIMMs are mapped out or blacklisted only when Uncorrectable errors occur. When a DIMM gets blacklisted, other DIMMs in the same channel are ignored or disabled, which means that the DIMM is no longer considered bad.

Note

DIMMs do not get mapped out or blacklisted for 16000 Correctable errors.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Enabling DIMM Black Listing

Enabling DIMM Black Listing

Before You Begin

• You must be logged in as an administrator.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Inventory.

Step 3

In the Inventory pane, click the Memory tab.

Step 4

In the Memory pane's DIMM Black Listing area, click the Enable DIMM Black List check box.

Configuring BIOS Settings

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Compute menu.

Step 2

In the Compute menu, click the BIOS tab.

Step 3

In the BIOS tab, click the Configure BIOS tab.

Step 4

Update the following tabs:

Table 1: BIOS Parameters in I/O Tab

Name

Reboot Host Immediately

checkbox

Description

Upon checking, reboots the host server immediately. You must check the checkbox after saving changes.

Legacy USB Support drop-down list

Whether the system supports legacy USB devices. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—USB devices are only available to EFI applications.

• Enabled—Legacy USB support is always available.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Configuring BIOS Settings

Name

Intel VT for directed IO

drop-down list

Intel VTD coherency support

drop-down list

Description

Whether the processor uses Intel Virtualization Technology (VT), which allows a platform to run multiple operating systems and applications in independent partitions. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The processor does not permit virtualization.

• Enabled—The processor allows multiple operating systems in independent partitions.

Note

If you change this option, you must power cycle the server before the setting takes effect.

Whether the processor supports Intel VT-d Coherency. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The processor does not support coherency.

• Enabled—The processor uses VT-d Coherency as required.

Intel VTD ATS support

drop-down list

Whether the processor supports Intel VT-d Address Translation Services

(ATS). This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The processor does not support ATS.

• Enabled—The processor uses VT-d ATS as required.

All Onboard LOM Oprom

drop-down list

Whether Option ROM is available on all LOM ports. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—Option ROM is disabled on all the ports.

• Enabled—Option ROM is enabled on all the ports.

Onboard LOM Port0 Oprom

drop-down list

Whether Option ROM is available on the LOM port 0. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—Option ROM is not available on LOM port 0.

• Enabled—Option ROM is available on LOM port 0.

Onboard LOM Port1 Oprom

drop-down list

Whether Option ROM is available on the LOM port 1. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—Option ROM is not available on LOM port 1.

• Enabled—Option ROM is available on LOM port 1.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Configuring BIOS Settings

Name Description

Pcie Slotn Oprom drop-down list

Whether the server can use the Option ROMs present in the PCIe card slot designated by n. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—Option ROM for slot n is not available.

• Enabled—Option ROM for slot n is available.

MLOM Oprom drop-down list

This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the

PCIe adapter connected to the MLOM slot. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—Does not execute Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the MLOM slot.

• Enabled—Executes Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the MLOM slot.

HBA Oprom drop-down list This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the

PCIe adapter connected to the HBA slot. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—Does not execute Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the HBA slot.

• Enabled—Executes Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the HBA slot.

Front NVME1 Oprom drop-down list

This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the

PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe1 slot. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—Does not execute Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe1 slot.

• Enabled—Executes Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe1 slot

Front NVME2 Oprom drop-down list

This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the

PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe2 slot. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—Does not execute Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe2 slot.

• Enabled—Executes Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe2 slot

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Configuring BIOS Settings

Name

HBA Link Speed drop-down list

Description

This option allows you to restrict the maximum speed of an adapter card installed in PCIe HBA slot. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The maximum speed is not restricted.

• Auto—System selects the maximum speed allowed.

• GEN1—2.5GT/s (gigatransfers per second) is the maximum speed allowed.

• GEN2—5GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

• GEN3—8GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

MLOM Link Speed drop-down list

This option allows you to restrict the maximum speed of an adapter card installed in PCIe MLOM slot. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The maximum speed is not restricted.

• Auto—System selects the maximum speed allowed.

• GEN1—2.5GT/s (gigatransfers per second) is the maximum speed allowed.

• GEN2—5GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

• GEN3—8GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

PCIe Slotn Link Speed

drop-down list

Front NVME1 Link Speed

drop-down list

System IO Controller n (SIOCn) add-on slot (designated by n) link speed. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

• Auto— The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

• GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

• GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

• GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

Link speed for NVMe front slot 1. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

• Auto—The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

• GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

• GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

• GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Configuring BIOS Settings

Name

Front NVME2 Link Speed

drop-down list

Rear NVME1 Link Speed

drop-down list

Rear NVME2 Link Speed

drop-down list

VGA Priority drop-down list

Description

Link speed for NVMe front slot 2. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

• Auto—The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

• GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

• GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

• GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

Link speed for NVMe rear slot 1. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

• Auto—The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

• GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

• GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

• GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

Link speed for NVMe rear slot 2. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

• Auto—The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

• GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

• GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

• GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

Allows you to set the priority for VGA graphics devices if multiple

VGA devices are found in the system. This can be one of the following:

• OnBoard—Priority is given to the onboard VGA device. BIOS post screen and OS boot are driven through the onboard VGA port.

• OffBoard—Priority is given to the PCIE Graphics adapter. BIOS post screen and OS boot are driven through the external graphics adapter port.

• OnBoardDisabled—Priority is given to the PCIe Graphics adapter, and the onboard VGA device is disabled. The vKVM does not function when the onboard VGA is disabled.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Configuring BIOS Settings

Name Description

P-SATA OptionROM drop-down list

Allows you to select the PCH SATA optionROM mode. This can be one of the following:

• LSI SW Raid— Sets both SATA and sSATA controllers to raid mode for LSI SW Raid.

• Disabled— Disables both SATA and sSATA controllers.

M2.SATA OptionROM

drop-down list

Mode of operation of Serial Advanced Technology Attachment (SATA)

Solid State Drives (SSD). This can be one of the following:

• AHCI—

Sets both SATA and sSATA controllers to AHCI mode.

• LSI SW Raid— Sets both SATA and sSATA controllers to raid mode for LSI SW Raid.

• Disabled— Disables both SATA and sSATA controllers.

USB Port Rear drop-down list

Whether the rear panel USB devices are enabled or disabled. This can be one of the following

• Disabled— Disables the rear panel USB ports. Devices connected to these ports are not detected by the BIOS and operating system.

• Enabled— Enables the rear panel USB ports. Devices connected to these ports are detected by the BIOS and operating system.

USB Port Front drop-down list Whether the front panel USB devices are enabled or disabled. This can be one of the following

• Disabled— Disables the front panel USB ports. Devices connected to these ports are not detected by the BIOS and operating system.

• Enabled— Enables the front panel USB ports. Devices connected to these ports are detected by the BIOS and operating system.

USB Port Internal drop-down list Whether the internal USB devices are enabled or disabled. This can be one of the following

• Disabled— Disables the internal USB ports. Devices connected to these ports are not detected by the BIOS and operating system.

• Enabled— Enables the internal USB ports. Devices connected to these ports are detected by the BIOS and operating system.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Configuring BIOS Settings

Name

USB Port KVM drop-down list

Description

Whether the KVM ports are enabled or disabled. This can be one of the following

• Disabled— Disables the KVM keyboard and/or mouse devices.

Keyboard and/or mouse will not work in the KVM window.

• Enabled— Enables the KVM keyboard and/or mouse devices.

USB Port SD Card drop-down list

Whether the SD card is enabled or disabled. This can be one of the following

• Disabled— Disables the SD card ports. Devices connected to these ports are not detected by the BIOS and operating system.

• Enabled— Enables the SD card ports. Devices connected to these ports are detected by the BIOS and operating system.

IPV6 PXE Support drop-down list

Enables or disables IPV6 support for PXE. This can be one of the following

• Disabled—IPV6 PXE support is not available.

• Enabled—IPV6 PXE support is always available.

Table 2: BIOS Parameters in Server Management Tab

Name

Reboot Host Immediately checkbox

OS Boot Watchdog Timer Policy drop-down list

Description

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

What action the system takes if the watchdog timer expires. This can be one of the following:

• Power Off—The server is powered off if the watchdog timer expires during OS boot.

• Reset—The server is reset if the watchdog timer expires during OS boot.

Note

This option is only applicable if you enable the OS Boot Watchdog Timer.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Configuring BIOS Settings

Name

OS Watchdog Timer drop-down list

OS Watchdog Timer Timeout drop-down list

Baud Rate drop-down list

Description

Whether the BIOS programs the watchdog timer with a specified timeout value. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The watchdog timer is not used to track how long the server takes to boot.

• Enabled—The watchdog timer tracks how long the server takes to boot. If the server does not boot within the length of time specified in the

OS Boot Watchdog Timer Timeout field, the

Cisco IMC logs an error and takes the action specified in the OS Boot Watchdog Policy field.

If OS does not boot within the specified time, OS watchdog timer expires and system takes action according to timer policy. This can be one of the following:

• 5 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 5 minutes after it begins to boot.

• 10 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires

10 minutes after it begins to boot.

• 15 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires

15 minutes after it begins to boot.

• 20 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires

20 minutes after it begins to boot.

Note

This option is only applicable if you enable the OS Boot Watchdog Timer.

What Baud rate is used for the serial port transmission speed. If you disable Console Redirection, this option is not available. This can be one of the following:

• 9.6k—A 9,600 Baud rate is used.

• 19.2k—A 19,200 Baud rate is used.

• 38.4k—A 38,400 Baud rate is used.

• 57.6k—A 57,600 Baud rate is used.

• 115.2k—A 115,200 Baud rate is used.

This setting must match the setting on the remote terminal application.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Configuring BIOS Settings

Name

Console Redirection drop-down list

CDN Control drop-down list

FRB 2 Timer drop-down list

Flow Control drop-down list

Description

Allows a serial port to be used for console redirection during POST and BIOS booting. After the OS has booted, console redirection is irrelevant. This can be one of the following:

• Serial Port A—Enables console redirection on serial port A during POST.

• Serial Port B—Enables console redirection on serial port B during POST.

• Disabled—No console redirection occurs during

POST.

Whether the Ethernet Network naming convention is according to Consistent Device Naming (CDN) or the traditional way of naming conventions. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled— CDN support for VIC cards is disabled

• Enabled— CDN support is enabled for VIC cards.

Whether the FRB2 timer is used by Cisco IMC to recover the system if it hangs during POST. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The FRB2 timer is not used.

• Enabled—The FRB2 timer is started during

POST and used to recover the system if necessary.

Whether a handshake protocol is used for flow control. Request to Send / Clear to Send (RTS/CTS) helps to reduce frame collisions that can be introduced by a hidden terminal problem. This can be one of the following:

• None—No flow control is used.

• RTS/CTS—RTS/CTS is used for flow control.

Note

This setting must match the setting on the remote terminal application.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Configuring BIOS Settings

Name

Terminal type drop-down list

Description

What type of character formatting is used for console redirection. This can be one of the following:

• PC-ANSI—The PC-ANSI terminal font is used.

• VT100—A supported VT100 video terminal and its character set are used.

• VT100-PLUS—A supported VT100-plus video terminal and its character set are used.

• VT-UTF8—A video terminal with the UTF-8 character set is used.

Table 3: BIOS Parameters in Security Tab

Name Description

Reboot Host Immediately checkbox If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

Trusted Platform Module Support drop-down list Trusted Platform Module (TPM ) is a microchip designed to provide basic security-related functions primarily involving encryption keys. This option allows you to control the TPM Security Device support for the system. It can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The server does not use the TPM.

• Enabled—The server uses the TPM.

Power on Password drop-down list

Note

Contact your operating system vendor to make sure the operating system supports this feature.

This token requires that you set a BIOS password before using the F2 BIOS configuration. If enabled, password needs to be validated before you access

BIOS functions such as IO configuration, BIOS set up, and booting to an operating system using BIOS.

It can be one of the following:

• Disabled—Support is disabled.

• Enabled—Support is enabled.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Configuring BIOS Settings

Table 4: BIOS Parameters in Processor Tab

Name

Intel Virtualization Technology drop-down list

Extended Apic drop-down list

Description

Whether the processor uses Intel Virtualization

Technology (VT), which allows a platform to run multiple operating systems and applications in independent partitions. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The processor does not permit virtualization.

• Enabled—The processor allows multiple operating systems in independent partitions.

Allows you to enable or disable extended APIC support. This can be one of the following:

• Enabled—Enables APIC support

• Disabled—Disables APIC support.

Processor C1E drop-down list Whether the CPU transitions to its minimum frequency when entering the C1 state. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The CPU continues to run at its maximum frequency in C1 state.

• Enabled—The CPU transitions to its minimum frequency. This option saves the maximum amount of power in C1 state.

Note

This option is available only on some

C-Series servers.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Name

Processor C6 Report drop-down list

Execute Disable Bit drop-down list

Configuring BIOS Settings

Description

Whether the BIOS sends the C6 report to the operating system. When the OS receives the report, it can transition the processor into the lower C6 power state to decrease energy usage while maintaining optimal processor performance. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The BIOS does not send the C6 report.

• Enabled—The BIOS sends the C6 report, allowing the OS to transition the processor to the C6 low power state.

Note

CPUPowerManagement must be set to

Custom or the server ignores the setting for this parameter.

This option is available only on some

C-Series servers.

Classifies memory areas on the server to specify where application code can execute. As a result of this classification, the processor disables code execution if a malicious worm attempts to insert code in the buffer. This setting helps to prevent damage, worm propagation, and certain classes of malicious buffer overflow attacks. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The processor does not classify memory areas.

• Enabled—The processor classifies memory areas.

Note

Contact your operating system vendor to make sure the operating system supports this feature.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Configuring BIOS Settings

Name

Intel Turbo Boost Tech drop-down list

Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Tech drop-down list

Intel HyperThreading Tech drop-down list

Description

Whether the processor uses Intel Turbo Boost

Technology, which allows the processor to automatically increase its frequency if it is running below power, temperature, or voltage specifications.

This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The processor does not increase its frequency automatically.

• Enabled—The processor utilizes Turbo Boost

Technology if required.

Note

CPUPowerManagement must be set to

Custom or the server ignores the setting for this parameter.

Whether the processor uses Enhanced Intel SpeedStep

Technology, which allows the system to dynamically adjust processor voltage and core frequency. This technology can result in decreased average power consumption and decreased average heat production.

This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The processor never dynamically adjusts its voltage or frequency.

• Enabled—The processor utilizes Enhanced

Intel SpeedStep Technology and enables all supported processor sleep states to further conserve power.

We recommend that you contact your operating system vendor to make sure the operating system supports this feature.

Note

CPUPowerManagement must be set to

Custom or the server ignores the setting for this parameter.

Whether the processor uses Intel Hyper-Threading

Technology, which allows multithreaded software applications to execute threads in parallel within each processor. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The processor does not permit hyperthreading.

• Enabled—The processor allows for the parallel execution of multiple threads.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Configuring BIOS Settings

Name

Workload Configuration drop-down list

Core MultiProcessing drop-down list

Sub NUMA Clustering drop-down list

IMC Interleave drop-down list

Description

This feature allows for workload optimization. The options are Balanced and I/O Sensitive:

• NUMA

• UMA

Allows you to disable one or more of the physical cores on the server. This can be one of the following:

• All—Enables all physical cores. This also enables Hyper Threading on the associated logical processor cores.

• 1 through 28—Specifies the number of physical processor cores that can run on the server. Each physical core has an associated logical core.

Note

Contact your operating system vendor to make sure the operating system supports this feature.

Whether the CPU supports sub NUMA clustering, in which the tag directory and the memory channel are always in the same region. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled— Sub NUMA clustering does not occur.

• Enabled— Sub NUMA clustering occurs.

• Auto — The BIOS determines what Sub

NUMA clustering is done.

This BIOS option controls the interleaving between the Integrated Memory Controllers (IMCs).

• 1-way Interleave—There is no interleaving.

• 2-way Interleave—Addresses are interleaved between the two IMCs.

• Auto —CPU determines the IMC Interleaving mode.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Configuring BIOS Settings

Name

XPT Prefetch drop-down list

Description

Whether XPT prefetch is used to enable a read request sent to the last level cache to issue a copy of that request to the memory controller prefetcher. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The CPU does not use the XPT

Prefetch option.

• Enabled—The CPU enanbles the XPT prefetcher option.

UPI Prefetch drop-down list

UPI prefetch is a mechanism to get the memory read started early on a DDR bus. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The processor does not preload any cache data.

• Enabled—The UPI prefetcher preloads the L1 cache with the data it determines to be the most relevant.

Energy Performance BIOS Config drop-down list Allows you to determine whether system performance or energy efficiency is more important on this server.

This can be one of the following:

• Performance — The server provides all server components with full power at all times. This option maintains the highest level of performance and requires the greatest amount of power.

• Balanced Performance — The server provides all server components with enough power to keep a balance between performance and power.

• Balanced Power — The server provides all server components with enough power to keep a balance between performance and power.

• Power — The server provides all server components with maximum power to keep reduce power consumption.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Configuring BIOS Settings

Name

Power Performance Tuning drop-down list

LLC Prefetch drop-down list

Description

Determines if the BIOS or Operating System can turn on the energy performance bias tuning. The options are BIOS and OS.

• BIOS—

Chooses BIOS for energy performance tuning.

• OS—

Chooses OS for energy performance tuning.

Whether the processor uses the LLC Prefetch mechanism to fetch the date into the LLC. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The processor does not preload any cache data.

• Enabled—The LLC prefetcher preloads the L1 cache with the data it determines to be the most relevant.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Configuring BIOS Settings

Name

Package C State

Hardware P-States drop-down list

Managing the Server

Description

The amount of power available to the server components when they are idle. This can be one of the following:

• No Limit—The server may enter any available

C state.

• Auto —The CPU determines the physical elevation.

• C0 C1 State—The server provides all server components with full power at all times. This option maintains the highest level of performance and requires the greatest amount of power.

• C2—When the CPU is idle, the system reduces the power consumption further than with the C1 option. This requires less power than C1 or C0, but it takes the server slightly longer to return to high performance mode.

• C6 Non Retention—When the CPU is idle, the system reduces the power consumption further than with the C3 option. This option saves more power than C0, C1, or C3, but there may be performance issues until the server returns to full power.

• C6 Retention—When the CPU is idle, the system reduces the power consumption further than with the C3 option. This option saves more power than C0, C1, or C3, but there may be performance issues until the server returns to full power.

Enables processor Hardware P-State. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—HWPM is disabled.

• HWPM Native Mode—HWPM native mode is enabled.

• HWPM OOB Mode—HWPM Out-Of-Box mode is enabled.

• Native Mode with no Legacy (only GUI)

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Configuring BIOS Settings

Table 5: BIOS Parameters in Memory Tab

Name

Reboot Host Immediately checkbox

NUMA drop-down list

Description

Upon checking, reboots the host server immediately.

You must check the checkbox after saving changes.

Whether the BIOS supports Non-Uniform Memory

Access (NUMA). This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—Support is disabled.

• Enabled—Support is enabled.

Select Memory RAS configuration drop-down list Determines how the memory reliability, availability, and serviceability (RAS) is configured for the server.

This can be one of the following:

• Maximum Performance—System performance is optimized.

• Mirror Mode 1LM—System reliability is optimized by using half the system memory as backup.

Above 4G Decoding drop-down list Enables or disables MMIO above 4GB or not. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The server does not map I/O of

64-bit PCI devices to 4GB or greater address space.

• Enabled—The server maps I/O of 64-bit PCI devices to 4GB or greater address space.

Note

PCI devices that are 64-bit compliant but use a legacy option ROM may not function correctly with this setting enabled.

Table 6: BIOS Parameters in Power/Performance Tab

Name

Reboot Host Immediately

checkbox

Description

Upon checking, reboots the host server immediately. You must check the checkbox after saving changes.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Configuring BIOS Settings

Name Description

Hardware Prefetcher drop-down list

Whether the processor allows the Intel hardware prefetcher to fetch streams of data and instruction from memory into the unified second-level cache when necessary. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The hardware prefetcher is not used.

• Enabled—The processor uses the hardware prefetcher when cache issues are detected.

Adjacent Cache Line Prefetcher

drop-down list

Whether the processor fetches cache lines in even or odd pairs instead of fetching just the required line. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The processor only fetches the required line.

• Enabled—The processor fetches both the required line and its paired line.

DCU Streamer Prefetch

drop-down list

Whether the processor uses the DCU IP Prefetch mechanism to analyze historical cache access patterns and preload the most relevant lines in the L1 cache. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The processor does not try to anticipate cache read requirements and only fetches explicitly requested lines.

• Enabled—The DCU prefetcher analyzes the cache read pattern and prefetches the next line in the cache if it determines that it may be needed.

DCU IP Prefetcher drop-down list Whether the processor uses the DCU IP Prefetch mechanism to analyze historical cache access patterns and preload the most relevant lines in the L1 cache. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The processor does not preload any cache data.

• Enabled—The DCU IP prefetcher preloads the L1 cache with the data it determines to be the most relevant.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

BIOS Profiles

Name Description

CPU Performance drop-down list

Sets the CPU performance profile for the options listed above. This can be one of the following:

• Enterprise—All options are enabled.

• HPC—All options are enabled. This setting is also known as high performance computing.

• Hight Throughput—Only the DCU IP Prefetcher is enabled. The rest of the options are disabled.

• Custom—All performance profile options can be configured from the BIOS setup on the server. In addition, the Hardware Prefetcher and Adjacent Cache-Line Prefetch options can be configured as well.

BIOS Profiles

On the Cisco UCS server, default token files are available for every server platform, and you can configure the value of these tokens using the Graphic User Interface (GUI), CLI interface, and the XML API interface.

To optimize server performance, these token values must be configured in a specific combination.

Configuring a BIOS profile helps you to utilize pre-configured token files with the right combination of the token values. Some of the pre-configured profiles that are available are virtualization, high-performance, low power, and so on. You can download the various options of these pre-configured token files from the Cisco website and apply it on the servers through the BMC.

You can edit the downloaded profile to change the value of the tokens or add new tokens. This allows you to customize the profile to your requirements without having to wait for turnaround time.

Uploading a BIOS Profile

You can upload a BIOS profile either from a remote server location or through a browser client.

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Uploading a BIOS Profile

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Compute menu.

Step 2

In the work pane, click the BIOS tab.

Step 3

Click the Configure BIOS Profile tab.

Step 4

To upload the BIOS profile using a remote server location, in the BIOS Profile area, click the Upload button.

Step 5

In the Upload BIOS Profile dialog box, update the following fields:

Name Description

Upload BIOS Profile from drop-down list

The remote server type. This can be one of the following:

• TFTP

• FTP

• SFTP

• SCP

• HTTP

Server IP/Hostname field

Path and Filename field

Username field

Password field

Upload button

Cancel button

The IP address or hostname of the server on which the BIOS profile information is available. Depending on the setting in the Upload BIOS Profile from drop-down list, the name of the field may vary.

The path and filename of the BIOS profile on the remote server.

Username of the remote server.

Password of the remote server.

Uploads the selected BIOS profile.

Note

If you chose SCP or SFTP as the remote server type while performing this action, a pop-up window is displayed with the message Server (RSA) key fingerprint is

<server_finger_print _ID> Do you wish to

continue?. Click Yes or No depending on the authenticity of the server fingerprint.

The fingerprint is based on the host's public key and helps you to identify or verify the host you are connecting to.

Closes the wizard without making any changes to the firmware versions stored on the server.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Activating a BIOS Profile

Step 6

To upload the BIOS profile using a browser client, in the BIOS Profile area, click the Upload button.

Step 7

In the Upload BIOS Profile dialog box, update the following fields:

Name Description

File field The BIOS profile that you want to upload.

Browse button

Opens a dialog box that allows you to navigate to the appropriate file.

What to Do Next

Activate a BIOS profile.

Activating a BIOS Profile

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Compute menu.

Step 2

In the work pane, click the BIOS tab.

Step 3

Click the Configure BIOS Profile tab.

Step 4

Select a BIOS profile from the BIOS Profile area and click Activate.

Step 5

At the prompt, click Yes to activate the BIOS profile.

Deleting a BIOS Profile

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Backing up a BIOS Profile

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Compute menu.

Step 2

In the Compute menu, select a server.

Step 3

In the work pane, click the BIOS tab.

Step 4

Select a BIOS profile from the BIOS Profile area and click Delete.

Step 5

At the prompt, click OK to delete the BIOS profile.

Backing up a BIOS Profile

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Compute menu.

Step 2

In the Compute menu, select a server.

Step 3

In the work pane, click the BIOS tab.

Step 4

Select a BIOS profile from the BIOS Profile area and click Take Backup.

Step 5

At the prompt, click OK to take a backup of the BIOS profile.

What to Do Next

Activate a BIOS profile.

Viewing BIOS Profile Details

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Compute menu.

Step 2

In the Compute menu, select a server.

Step 3

In the work pane, click the BIOS tab.

Step 4

Select a BIOS profile from the BIOS Profile area and click Details.

Step 5

Review the following information in the BIOS Profile Details window:

Managing the Server

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing the Server

Setting Dynamic Front Panel Temperature Threshold

Name

Token Name column

Display Name column

Profile Value column

Actual Value column

Description

Displays the token name of the BIOS profile.

Displays the user name of the BIOS profile.

Displays the value that was provided in the uploaded file.

Displays the value of the active BIOS configuration.

Setting Dynamic Front Panel Temperature Threshold

The Dynamic Front Panel Temperature Threshold option allows you to set the upper critical threshold for the front panel temperature sensor.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Sensors.

Step 3

In the Sensors pane, click the Temperature tab.

Step 4

Expand the Dynamic Front Panel Temperature Threshold area, and enter an upper critical threshold for the front panel temperature sensor in the Critical field. You can enter a value between 8 and 50.

Step 5

Click Save Changes.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Setting Dynamic Front Panel Temperature Threshold

Managing the Server

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

C H A P T E R

Viewing Server Properties

This chapter includes the following sections:

•

Viewing CPU Properties, page 77

•

Viewing Memory Properties, page 78

•

Viewing PCI Adapter Properties, page 80

•

Viewing Storage Properties, page 81

•

Viewing TPM Properties, page 82

•

Viewing a PID Catalog , page 84

Viewing CPU Properties

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Inventory.

Step 3

In the Inventory pane, click the CPUs tab.

Step 4

Review the following information for each CPU:

Name Description

Socket Name field The socket in which the CPU is installed.

Vendor field

Status field

The vendor for the CPU.

The status of the CPU.

Family field

Speed field

The family to which this CPU belongs.

The CPU speed, in megahertz.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Viewing Server Properties

Viewing Memory Properties

Name

Number of Cores field

Signature field

Number of Threads field

Description

The number of cores in the CPU.

The signature information for the CPU.

The maximum number of threads that the CPU can process concurrently.

Viewing Memory Properties

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Inventory.

Step 3

In the Inventory pane, click the Memory tab.

Step 4

In the Memory Summary area, review the following summary information about memory:

Name Description

Memory Speed field The memory speed, in megahertz.

Failed Memory field The amount of memory that is currently failing, in megabytes.

Total Memory field

Ignored Memory field

The total amount of memory available on the server if all DIMMs are fully functional.

The amount of memory currently not available for use, in megabytes.

The actual amount of memory currently available to the server.

Effective Memory field

Number of Ignored DIMMs field The number of DIMMs that the server cannot access.

Redundant Memory field

The amount of memory used for redundant storage.

Number of Failed DIMMs field The number of DIMMs that have failed and cannot be used.

Memory RAS Possible field Details about the RAS memory configuration that the server supports.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Viewing Server Properties

Viewing Memory Properties

Name

Memory Configuration field

DIMM location diagram

Description

The current memory configuration. This can be one of the following:

• Maximum Performance—The system automatically optimizes the memory performance.

• Mirroring—The server maintains two identical copies of the data in memory. This option effectively halves the available memory on the server, as one half is automatically reserved for mirrored copy.

• Lockstep—If the DIMM pairs in the server have an identical type, size, and organization and are populated across the SMI channels, you can enable lockstep mode to minimize memory access latency and provide better performance.

Displays the DIMM or memory layout for the current server.

Step 5

In the DIMM Black Listing area, view the overall status of a DIMM and also enable DIMM black listing.

Name Description

Overall DIMM Status field The overall status of a DIMM. This can be one of the following:

• Good—The DIMM status is available.

• Severe Fault— The DIMM status when uncorrectable ECC errors are present.

Enable DIMM Black List

checkbox

Check this option to enable DIMM black listing.

Step 6

In the Memory Details table, review the following detailed information about each DIMM:

Tip

Click a column header to sort the table rows, according to the entries in that column.

Name

Name column

Description

The name of the DIMM slot in which the memory module is installed.

Capacity column

Channel Speed column

The size of the DIMM.

The clock speed of the memory channel, in megahertz.

Channel Type column

Memory Type Detail column

Bank Locator column

The type of memory channel.

The type of memory used in the device.

The location of the DIMM within the memory bank.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Viewing Server Properties

Viewing PCI Adapter Properties

Name

Manufacturer column

Serial Number column

Asset Tag column

Part Number column

Visibility column

Operability column

Data Width column

Description

The vendor ID of the manufacturer. This can be one of the following:

• 0x2C00—Micron Technology, Inc.

• 0x5105—Qimonda AG i. In.

• 0x802C—Micron Technology, Inc.

• 0x80AD—Hynix Semiconductor Inc.

• 0x80CE—Samsung Electronics, Inc.

• 0x8551—Qimonda AG i. In.

• 0xAD00—Hynix Semiconductor Inc.

• 0xCE00—Samsung Electronics, Inc.

The serial number of the DIMM.

The asset tag associated with the DIMM, if any.

The part number for the DIMM assigned by the vendor.

Whether the DIMM is available to the server.

Whether the DIMM is currently operating correctly.

The amount of data the DIMM supports, in bits.

Viewing PCI Adapter Properties

Before You Begin

The server must be powered on, or the properties will not display.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Inventory.

Step 3

In the Inventory pane, click the PCI Adapters tab.

Step 4

In the PCI Adapters area, review the following information for the installed PCI adapters:

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Viewing Server Properties

Viewing Storage Properties

Name

Slot ID column

Product Name column

Option ROM Status column

Firmware Version column

Vendor ID column

Sub Vendor ID column

Device ID column

Sub Device ID column

Description

The slot in which the adapter resides.

The name of the adapter.

Indicates the Option ROM status. This can be one of the following:

• Loaded—Data is available in the card.

• Unloaded—Data is not available in the card.

• Load Error—Card is present and Option ROM is enabled. But

Option ROM failed to load due to an error in the card.

The firmware versions of the adapters.

Note

The firmware versions are displayed only for adapters that provide versions through the standard UEFI interface. For example, Intel LOM and Emulex Adapters.

The adapter ID assigned by the vendor.

The secondary adapter ID assigned by the vendor.

The device ID assigned by the vendor.

The secondary device ID assigned by the vendor.

Viewing Storage Properties

Before You Begin

The server must be powered on, or the properties will not display.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Compute menu.

Step 2

In the Compute menu, select a server.

Step 3

In the work pane, click the Inventory tab.

Step 4

In the Storage tab's Storage area, review the following information:

Name Description

Controller field

PCIe slot in which the controller drive is located.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Viewing Server Properties

Viewing TPM Properties

Name

PCI Slot field

Product Name field

Serial Number field

Firmware Package Build field

Product ID field

Battery Status field

Cache Memory Size field

Health field

Details field

Description

The name of the PCIe slot in which the controller drive is located.

Name of the controller.

The serial number of the storage controller.

The active firmware package version number.

Product ID of the controller.

Status of the battery.

The size of the cache memory, in megabytes.

The health of the controller.

Link to the details of the controller.

Viewing TPM Properties

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Inventory.

Step 3

In the Inventory pane, click the TPM tab

Step 4

Review the following information:

Name Description

Version column The TPM version. This field displays NA if the TPM version details are not available.

Presence column Presence of the TPM module on the host server.

• Equipped—The TPM is present on the host server.

• Empty—The TPM does not exist on the host server.

Model column The model number of the TPM. This field displays NA if the TPM does not exist on the host server.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Viewing Server Properties

Viewing TPM Properties

Name

Enabled Status column

Vendor column

Active Status column

Serial column

Ownership column

Revision column

Description

Whether or not the TPM is enabled.

• Enabled—The TPM is enabled.

• Disabled—The TPM is disabled.

• Unknown—The TPM does not exist on the host server.

The name of the TPM vendor. This field displays NA if the TPM does not exist on the host server.

Activation status of the TPM.

• Activated—The TPM is activated.

• Deactivated—The TPM is deactivated.

• Unknown—The TPM does not exist on the host server.

Note

In some C-series servers that have installed TPM version 2.0,

Active Status is displayed as NA.

The serial number of the TPM. This field displays NA if the TPM does not exist on the host server.

The ownership status of TPM.

• Owned—The TPM is owned.

• Unowned—The TPM is unowned.

• Unknown—The TPM does not exist on the host server.

Note

In some C-series servers that have installed TPM version 2.0,

Ownership status is displayed as NA.

Revision number of the TPM. This field displays NA if the TPM does not exist on the host server.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Viewing Server Properties

Viewing a PID Catalog

Viewing a PID Catalog

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Compute tab.

Step 2

In the Compute working area, click the PID Catalog tab.

Step 3

In the Summary area, review the following summary information about the PID catalog:

Name Description

Upload Status field The download status of the PID catalog. It can be any of the following:

• Download in Progress

• Download Successful

• Download Error - TFTP File Not Found

• Download Error - Connection Failed

• Download Error - Access Denied

• Download Error - File Not Found

• Download Error - Download Failed

• Activation Successful

• Error - Unknown

• N/A

Activation Status field The activation status of the PID catalog.

Current Activated version field

The activated version of the PID catalog.

Step 4

In the CPU table, review the following information about CPU:

Name Description

Socket field

The socket in which the CPU is installed.

Product ID field

Model field

The product ID for the CPU.

The model number of the CPU

Step 5

In the Memory table, review the following information about memory:

Name Description

Name field

The name of the memory slot.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Viewing Server Properties

Viewing a PID Catalog

Name

Product ID field

Vendor ID field

Capacity field

Speed (MHz) field

Description

The product ID for the memory slot assigned by the vendor.

The ID assigned by the vendor.

The size of the memory.

The memory speed, in megahertz.

Step 6

In the PCI Adapters table, review the following information about PCI adapter:

Name Description

Slot column The slot in which the adapter resides.

Product ID column

Vendor ID column

The product ID for the adapter.

The adapter ID assigned by the vendor.

Sub Vendor ID column

Device ID column

Sub Device ID column

The secondary adapter ID assigned by the vendor.

The device ID assigned by the vendor.

The secondary device ID assigned by the vendor.

Step 7

In the HDD table, review the following information about HDD:

Name Description

Disk field The disk of the hard drive.

Product ID field

The product ID for the hard drive.

Controller field

Vendor field

Model field

The system-defined name of the selected Cisco Flexible Flash controller.

This name cannot be changed.

The vendor for the hard drive.

The model of the hard drive.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Viewing a PID Catalog

Viewing Server Properties

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

C H A P T E R

Viewing Sensors

This chapter includes the following sections:

•

Viewing Chassis Sensors, page 87

Viewing Chassis Sensors

Viewing Power Supply Sensors

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Sensors.

Step 3

In the Sensors working area, click the Power Supply tab.

Step 4

Review the following sensor properties for power supply:

Properties Area

Name Description

Redundancy Status field The power supply redundancy status.

Threshold Sensors Area

Name

Sensor Name column

Description

The name of the sensor

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Viewing Sensors

Viewing Power Supply Sensors

Name

Sensor Status column

Description

The status of the sensor. This can be one of the following:

• Unknown

• Informational

• Normal

• Warning

• Critical

• Non-Recoverable

Reading column

The current power usage, in watts.

Critical Threshold Min column The minimum critical threshold.

Critical Threshold Max column

The maximum critical threshold.

Non-Recoverable Threshold Min

column

The minimum non-recoverable threshold.

Non-Recoverable Threshold Max

column

The maximum non-recoverable threshold.

Discrete Sensors Area

Name

Sensor Name column

Sensor Status column

Reading column

Description

The name of the sensor.

The status of the sensor. This can be one of the following:

• Unknown

• Informational

• Normal

• Warning

• Critical

• Non-Recoverable

The basic state of the sensor.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Viewing Sensors

Viewing Fan Sensors

Viewing Fan Sensors

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Sensors.

Step 3

In the Sensors working area, click the Fan tab.

Step 4

Review the following fan sensor properties:

Name Description

Sensor Name column The name of the sensor

Sensor Status column The status of the sensor. This can be one of the following:

• Unknown

• Informational

• Normal

• Warning

• Critical

• Non-Recoverable

Speed (RPMS) column The fan speed in RPM.

Critical Threshold Min column The minimum critical threshold.

Critical Threshold Max column The maximum critical threshold.

Non-Recoverable Threshold Min

column

The minimum non-recoverable threshold.

Non-Recoverable Threshold Max

column

The maximum non-recoverable threshold.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Viewing Sensors

Viewing Temperature Sensors

Viewing Temperature Sensors

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Sensors.

Step 3

In the Sensors working area, click the Temperature tab.

Step 4

Review the following temperature sensor properties:

Name Description

Sensor Name column The name of the sensor

Sensor Status column The status of the sensor. This can be one of the following:

• Unknown

• Informational

• Normal

• Warning

• Critical

• Non-Recoverable

Temperature column The current temperature, in Celsius.

Critical Threshold Min column The minimum critical threshold.

Critical Threshold Max column The maximum critical threshold.

Non-Recoverable Threshold Min

column

The minimum non-recoverable threshold.

Non-Recoverable Threshold Max

column

The maximum non-recoverable threshold.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Viewing Sensors

Viewing Voltage Sensors

Viewing Voltage Sensors

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Sensors.

Step 3

In the Sensors working area, click the Voltage tab.

Step 4

Review the following voltage sensor properties:

Name Description

Sensor Name column The name of the sensor

Sensor Status column The status of the sensor. This can be one of the following:

• Unknown

• Informational

• Normal

• Warning

• Critical

• Non-Recoverable

Voltage (V) column The current voltage, in Volts.

Critical Threshold Min column The minimum critical threshold.

Critical Threshold Max column The maximum critical threshold.

Non-Recoverable Threshold Min

column

The minimum non-recoverable threshold.

Non-Recoverable Threshold Max

column

The maximum non-recoverable threshold.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Viewing Sensors

Viewing Current Sensors

Viewing Current Sensors

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Sensors.

Step 3

In the Sensors working area, click the Current tab.

Step 4

Review the following current sensor properties:

Name Description

Sensor Name column The name of the sensor

Sensor Status column The status of the sensor. This can be one of the following:

• Unknown

• Informational

• Normal

• Warning

• Critical

• Non-Recoverable

Temperature (C) column The current temperature, in Celsius.

Critical Threshold Min column The minimum critical threshold.

Critical Threshold Max column The maximum critical threshold.

Non-Recoverable Threshold Min

column

The minimum non-recoverable threshold.

Non-Recoverable Threshold Max

column

The maximum non-recoverable threshold.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Viewing Sensors

Viewing LED Sensors

Viewing LED Sensors

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Sensors.

Step 3

In the Sensors working area, click the LEDs tab.

Step 4

Review the following LED sensor properties:

Name Description

Sensor Name column The name of the sensor

LED Status column

LED Color column

Whether the LED is on, blinking, or off.

The current color of the LED.

For details about what the colors mean, see the hardware installation guide for the type of server you are using.

Viewing Storage Sensors

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Compute menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Sensors.

Step 3

In the Storage tab's Storage Sensors area, view the following storage-related statistics for the server:

Name Description

Name column The name of the storage device.

Status column A brief description of the storage device status.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Viewing Storage Sensors

Viewing Sensors

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

C H A P T E R

Managing Remote Presence

This chapter includes the following sections:

•

Configuring Serial Over LAN, page 95

•

Configuring Virtual Media, page 97

•

KVM Console, page 103

•

Launching KVM Console, page 104

•

Virtual KVM Console (HTML Based), page 104

•

Comparison Between Java Based KVM and HTML5 Based KVM, page 108

•

Configuring the Virtual KVM, page 109

Configuring Serial Over LAN

Serial over LAN enables the input and output of the serial port of a managed system to be redirected over IP.

Configure and use serial over LAN on your server when you want to reach the host console with Cisco IMC.

Before You Begin

You must log in as a user with admin privileges to configure serial over LAN.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Compute menu.

Step 2

In the Compute menu, select a server.

Step 3

In the work pane, click the Remote Management tab.

Step 4

In the Remote Presence pane, click the Serial over LAN tab.

Step 5

In the Serial over LAN Properties area, update the following properties:

Name Description

Enabled check box If checked, Serial over LAN (SoL) is enabled on this server.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Remote Presence

Configuring Serial Over LAN

Name

Baud Rate drop-down list

Com Port drop-down list

SSH Port filed

Description

The baud rate the system uses for SoL communication. This can be one of the following:

• 9600 bps

• 19.2 kbps

• 38.4 kbps

• 57.6 kbps

• 115.2 kbps

The serial port through which the system routes SoL communication.

Note

This field is only available on some C-Series servers. If it is not available, the server always uses COM port 0 for SoL communication.

You can select one of the following:

• com0—SoL communication is routed through COM port 0, an externally accessible serial port that supports either a physical

RJ45 connection to an external device or a virtual SoL connection to a network device.

If you select this option, the system enables SoL and disables the

RJ45 connection, which means that the server can no longer support an external serial device.

• com1—SoL communication is routed through COM port 1, an internal port accessible only through SoL.

If you select this option, you can use SoL on COM port 1 and the physical RJ45 connection on COM port 0.

Note

Changing the Com Port setting disconnects any existing SoL sessions.

This option is available only on some C-Series servers.

The port through which you can access Serial over LAN directly. The port enables you to by-pass the Cisco IMC shell to provide direct access to SoL.

The valid range is 1024 to 65535. The default value is 2400.

Note

Changing the SSH Port setting disconnects any existing SSH sessions.

Step 6

Click Save Changes.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Remote Presence

Configuring Virtual Media

Configuring Virtual Media

Before You Begin

You must log in as a user with admin privileges to configure virtual media.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Compute tab.

Step 2

In the Compute tab, click the Remote Management tab.

Step 3

In the Remote Management tab, click the Virtual Media tab.

Step 4

In the Virtual Media Properties area, update the following properties:

Name Description

Enabled check box

Active Sessions field

If checked, virtual media is enabled.

Note

If you clear this check box, all virtual media devices are automatically detached from the host.

The number of virtual media sessions that are currently running.

Enable Virtual Media

Encryption check box

If checked, all virtual media communications are encrypted.

Low Power USB enabled check box

If checked, low power USB is enabled.

If the low power USB is enabled, after mapping the ISO and rebooting the host, the virtual drives appear on the boot selection menu.

But, while mapping an ISO to a server that has a UCS VIC P81E card and the NIC is in Cisco Card mode, this option must be disabled for the virtual drives to appear on the boot selection menu.

Step 5

Click Save Changes.

Creating a Cisco IMC Mapped vMedia Volume

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Remote Presence

Creating a Cisco IMC Mapped vMedia Volume

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Compute menu.

Step 2

In the Compute menu, select a server.

Step 3

In the work pane, click the Remote Management tab.

Step 4

In the Remote Management tab, click the Virtual Media tab

Step 5

In the Current Mappings area, click Add New Mapping.

Step 6

In the Add New Mapping dialog box, update the following fields:

Name Description

Volume field The identity of the image mounted for mapping.

Mount Type drop-down list The type of mapping. This can be one of the following:

Note

Ensure that the communication port of the mount type that you choose is enabled on the switch. For example, when you are using CIFS as your mount type, ensure port 445 (which is its communication port) is enabled on the switch. Similarly, enable ports 80 for HTTP, 443 for HTTPS and 2049 for NFS when you use them.

• NFS—Network File System.

• CIFS—Common Internet File System.

• WWW(HTTP/HTTPS)—HTTP-based or HTTPS-based system.

Note

Before mounting the virtual media, Cisco IMC tries to verify reachability to the end server by pinging the server.

Remote Share field

Remote File field

The URL of the image to be mapped. The format depends on the selected

Mount Type:

• NFS—Use serverip:/share.

• CIFS—Use //serverip/share.

• WWW(HTTP/HTTPS)—Use http[s]://serverip/share.

The name and location of the .iso or .img file in the remote share.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Remote Presence

Name

Mount Options field

Description

Creating a Cisco IMC Mapped vMedia Volume

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Remote Presence

Creating a Cisco IMC Mapped vMedia Volume

Name Description

Industry-standard mount options entered in a comma separated list. The options vary depending on the selected Mount Type.

If you are using NFS, leave the field blank or enter one or more of the following:

• ro

• rw

• nolock

• noexec

• soft

• port=VALUE

• timeo=VALUE

• retry=VALUE

If you are using CIFS, leave the field blank or enter one or more of the following:

• soft

• nounix

• noserverino

• guest

• username=VALUE—ignored if guest is entered.

• password=VALUE—ignored if guest is entered.

• sec=VALUE

The protocol to use for authentication when communicating with the remote server. Depending on the configuration of CIFS share,

VALUE could be one of the following:

◦None—No authentication is used

◦Ntlm—NT LAN Manager (NTLM) security protocol. Use this option only with Windows 2008 R2 and Windows 2012

R2.

◦Ntlmi—NTLMi security protocol. Use this option only when you enable Digital Signing in the CIFS Windows server.

◦Ntlmssp—NT LAN Manager Security Support Provider

(NTLMSSP) protocol. Use this option only with Windows

2008 R2 and Windows 2012 R2.

◦Ntlmsspi—NTLMSSPi protocol. Use this option only when you enable Digital Signing in the CIFS Windows server.

100

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Remote Presence

Viewing Cisco IMC-Mapped vMedia Volume Properties

Name Description

◦

Ntlmv2—NTLMv2 security protocol. Use this option only with Samba Linux.

◦Ntlmv2i—NTLMv2i security protocol. Use this option only with Samba Linux.

If you are using WWW(HTTP/HTTPS), leave the field blank or enter the following:

• noauto

Note

Before mounting the virtual media, Cisco IMC tries to verify reachability to the end server by pinging the server.

• username=VALUE

• password=VALUE

The username for the specified Mount Type, if required.

The password for the selected username, if required.

User Name field

Password field

Step 7

Click Save.

Viewing Cisco IMC-Mapped vMedia Volume Properties

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Compute menu.

Step 2

In the Compute menu, select a server.

Step 3

In the work pane, click the Remote Management tab.

Step 4

In the Remote Management tab, click the Virtual Media tab

Step 5

Select a row from the Current Mappings table.

Step 6

Click Properties and review the following information:

Name Description

Add New Mapping button Opens a dialog box that allows you to add a new image.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

101

Managing Remote Presence

Removing a Cisco IMC-Mapped vMedia Volume

Name

Properties button

Unmap button

Last Mapping Status

Volume column

Mount Type drop-down list

Remote Share field

Remote File field

Status field

Description

Opens a dialog box that allows you to view or change the properties for the selected image.

Unmaps the mounted vMedia.

The status of the last mapping attempted.

The identity of the image.

The type of mapping.

The URL of the image.

The exact file location of the image.

The current status of the map. This can be one of the following:

• OK—The mapping is successful.

• In Progress—The mapping is in progress.

• Stale—Cisco IMC displays a text string with the reason why the mapping is stale.

• Error—Cisco IMC displays a text string with the reason for the error.

Removing a Cisco IMC-Mapped vMedia Volume

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Compute menu.

Step 2

In the Compute menu, select a server.

Step 3

In the work pane, click the Remote Management tab.

Step 4

In the Remote Management tab, click the Virtual Media tab

Step 5

Select a row from the Current Mappings table.

Step 6

Click Unmap.

102

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Remote Presence

Remapping an Existing Cisco IMC vMedia Image

Remapping an Existing Cisco IMC vMedia Image

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Compute menu.

Step 2

In the Compute menu, select a server.

Step 3

In the work pane, click the Remote Management tab.

Step 4

In the Remote Management tab, click the Virtual Media tab

Step 5

Select a row from the Current Mappings table.

Step 6

Click Remap.

Deleting a Cisco IMC vMedia Image

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Compute menu.

Step 2

In the Compute menu, select a server.

Step 3

In the work pane, click the Remote Management tab.

Step 4

In the Remote Management tab, click the Virtual Media tab

Step 5

Select a row from the Current Mappings table.

Step 6

Click Delete.

KVM Console

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

103

Managing Remote Presence

Launching KVM Console

You can map any of the following to a virtual drive:

• CD/DVD or floppy drive on your computer

• Disk image files (ISO or IMG files) on your computer

• USB flash drive on your computer

• CD/DVD or floppy drive on the network

• Disk image files (ISO or IMG files) on the network

• USB flash drive on the network

You can use the KVM console to install an OS on the server.

Note

Internet Options. Click the Advanced tab and, in the Security section, uncheck the checkbox for "Do not save encrypted pages to disk." Launch the KVM Console again.

Launching KVM Console

You can launch the KVM console from either the Home page or from the Remote Management area.

Procedure

Step 1

To launch the console from Home page, in the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Summary.

Step 3

From the tool bar, click Launch KVM and select Java based KVM or HTML based KVM.

Step 4

Alternatively, in the Navigation pane, click the Compute menu.

Step 5

In the Compute menu, select a server.

Step 6

In the work pane, click the Remote Management tab.

Step 7

In the Remote Management pane, click the Virtual KVM tab.

Step 8

In the Virtual KVM tab, click Launch Java based KVM console or Launch HTML based KVM console.

Step 9

Click the URL link displayed in the pop-up window (HTML based KVM console only) to load the client application. You need to click the link every time you launch the KVM console.

Virtual KVM Console (HTML Based)

The KVM console is an interface accessible from Cisco IMC that emulates a direct keyboard, video, and mouse (KVM) connection to the server. It allows you to connect to and control the server from a remote

104

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Remote Presence

Virtual KVM Console (HTML Based)

location and to map physical locations to virtual drives that can by accessed by the server during this KVM session.

File Menu

Menu Item

Capture to File button

Exit button

Description

Opens the Save dialog box that allows you to save the current screen as a JPG image.

Closes the KVM console.

View Menu

Menu Item

Keyboard

Refresh

Full Screen

Description

Displays the virtual keyboard for the KVM console, which you can use to input data.

Updates the console display with the server's current video output.

Expands the KVM console so that it fills the entire screen.

Macros Menu

Choose the keyboard shortcut you want to execute on the remote system.

Menu Item

Server Macros menu

Description

Displays the server side macros downloaded from the Cisco IMC, if any. If no server side macros have been downloaded, then the menu item is disabled.

Static Macros menu

User Defined Macros menu

Manage button

Displays a predefined set of macros.

Displays the user-defined macros that have been created.

Opens the Configure User Defined Macros dialog box, which allows you to create and manage macros.

System-defined macros cannot be deleted.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

105

Managing Remote Presence

Virtual KVM Console (HTML Based)

Tools Menu

Menu Item

Session Options

Session User List

Chat

Power Menu

Menu Item

Power On System button

Description

Opens the Session Options dialog box that lets you specify:

• Scaling—Specify whether or not you want to maintain the aspect ratio of the screen. Check or uncheck the Maintain Aspect Ratio checkbox (checked by default).

• The mouse acceleration to use on the target system. The default is Absolute positioning (Windows, Newer Linux & MAC OS

X). Other options are:

• Relative Positioning, no acceleration

• Relative Positioning (RHEL, Older Linux)

Opens the Session User List dialog box that shows all the user IDs that have an active KVM session.

Opens the Chat box to communicate with other users.

Power Off System button

Reset System (warm boot)button

Power Cycle System (cold boot) button

Description

Powers on the system.

This option is disabled when the system is powered on and it is enabled when the system is not powered.

Powers off the system from the virtual console session.

This option is enabled when the system is powered on and disabled when the system is not powered on.

Reboots the system without powering it off.

This option is enabled when the system is powered on and disabled when the system is not powered on.

Turns off system and then back on.

This option is enabled when the system is powered on and disabled when the system is not powered on.

106

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Remote Presence

Virtual KVM Console (HTML Based)

Boot Device Menu

Name

No Override

Boot Device list

Description

Clicking this option enables the host to boot to the first device configured.

A list of boot devices that the server uses to boot from only for the next server boot, without disrupting the currently configured boot order. Once the server boots from the one time boot device, all its future reboots occur from the previously configured boot order. A maximum of 15 devices are displayed on the KVM console.

Virtual Media Menu

Name

Activate Virtual Devices

Description

Activates a vMedia session that allows you to attach a drive or image file from your local computer or network.

Create Image

Note

This option is available only if you use the

Google Chrome web browser.

Allows you to create an ISO image. Drag and drop files or folders in the Create Image dialog box; these files or folders are converted to an ISO image. You can use the Download ISO Image button to save the

ISO image to your local machine.

Map CD/DVD

Map Removable Disk

Map Floppy Disk

You can map a CD or a DVD image from your local machine and map the drive to the image.

Note

This option is available when you click

Activate Virtual Devices.

You can map a removable disk image from your local machine and map the drive to the image.

Note

This option is available when you click

Activate Virtual Devices.

You can map a floppy disk image from your local machine and map the drive to the image.

Note

This option is available when you click

Activate Virtual Devices.

Help Menu

Name

Help Topics

Description

Clicking this option brings you back to this window.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

107

Managing Remote Presence

Comparison Between Java Based KVM and HTML5 Based KVM

Name

About KVM Viewer

Description

Displays the version number of the KVM viewer.

Settings

The Settings icon is located on the top right hand corner of the HTML KVM viewer window.

Name

Logged in as:

Description

Displays your user role ID.

Host Name

Displays the host name.

Log Out

Allows you to log out of the KVM viewer.

Comparison Between Java Based KVM and HTML5 Based KVM

The following table lists the differences between Java based KVM and HTML5 based KVM.

Menu Option Action Available in HTML5 Based KVM

File

Open

Available in Java Based

KVM

Yes Yes

Capture to file

Paste Text from Clipboard

Paste Text from File

Exit

Yes

View

Macros

Refresh

Fit

Video-Scaling

Full-Screen

Mini-Mod

Server Macros

Static Macros

Yes

108

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Remote Presence

Configuring the Virtual KVM

Menu Option

Tool

Action

User Defined Macros

Manage

Session Option

Single Cursor

Stats

Session User List

Chat

Yes

Recorder/Playback Controls Yes

Export Video Yes

Yes

Available in Java Based

KVM

Yes

Available in HTML5 Based KVM

Yes

Yes Yes

Yes

Power

Power On

Power OFF

Reset System

Power Cycle system

Mini-Mod

Virtual Media

Create Image

Activate Virtual Devices

Physical Device Mapping

Yes

Configuring the Virtual KVM

Before You Begin

You must log in as a user with admin privileges to configure the virtual KVM.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

109

Managing Remote Presence

Enabling the Virtual KVM

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Compute menu.

Step 2

In the Compute menu, select a server.

Step 3

In the work pane, click the Remote Management tab.

Step 4

In the Remote Management pane, click the Virtual KVM tab.

Step 5

On the Virtual KVM tab, complete the following fields:

Name Description

Enabled check box

Max Sessions drop-down list

If checked, the virtual KVM is enabled.

Note

The virtual media viewer is accessed through the KVM. If you disable the KVM console, Cisco IMC also disables access to all virtual media devices attached to the host.

The maximum number of concurrent KVM sessions allowed. You can select any number between 1 and 4.

Active Sessions field

The number of KVM sessions running on the server.

Remote Port field The port used for KVM communication.

Enable Video Encryption check box

If checked, the server encrypts all video information sent through the

KVM.

Enable Local Server Video check box

If checked, the KVM session is also displayed on any monitor attached to the server.

Step 6

Click Save Changes.

Enabling the Virtual KVM

Before You Begin

You must log in as a user with admin privileges to enable the virtual KVM.

110

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Remote Presence

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Compute menu.

Step 2

In the Compute menu, select a server.

Step 3

In the work pane, click the Remote Management tab.

Step 4

In the Remote Management pane, click the Virtual KVM tab.

Step 5

On the Virtual KVM tab, check the Enabled check box.

Step 6

Click Save Changes.

Disabling the Virtual KVM

Before You Begin

You must log in as a user with admin privileges to disable the virtual KVM.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Compute menu.

Step 2

In the Compute menu, select a server.

Step 3

In the work pane, click the Remote Management tab.

Step 4

In the Remote Management pane, click the Virtual KVM tab.

Step 5

On the Virtual KVM tab, uncheck the Enabled check box.

Step 6

Click Save Changes.

Disabling the Virtual KVM

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

111

Disabling the Virtual KVM

Managing Remote Presence

112

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

C H A P T E R

Managing User Accounts

This chapter includes the following sections:

•

Configuring Local Users, page 113

•

Password Expiry, page 115

•

Configuring Password Expiry Duration, page 116

•

Enabling Password Expiry, page 117

•

LDAP Servers, page 117

•

Viewing User Sessions, page 130

Configuring Local Users

The Cisco IMC now implements a strong password policy wherein you are required to follow guidelines and set a strong password when you first log on to the server for the first time. The Local User tab displays a

Disable Strong Password button which allows you to disable the strong password policy and set a password of your choice by ignoring the guidelines. Once you disable the strong password, an Enable Strong Password button is displayed. By default, the strong password policy is enabled.

Before You Begin

You must log in as a user with admin privileges to configure or modify local user accounts.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click User Management.

Step 3

In the User Management pane, click the Local User Management tab.

Step 4

To configure or modify a local user account, click a row in the Local User Management pane and click

Modify User.

Step 5

In the Modify User Details dialog box, update the following properties:

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

113

Managing User Accounts

Configuring Local Users

Name

ID field

Enabled check box

Username field

Role field

Change Password check box

Description

The unique identifier for the user.

If checked, the user is enabled on the Cisco IMC.

The username for the user.

Enter between 1 and 16 characters.

The role assigned to the user. This can be one of the following:

• read-only—A user with this role can view information but cannot make any changes.

• user—A user with this role can perform the following tasks:

◦View all information

◦Manage the power control options such as power on, power cycle, and power off

◦Launch the KVM console and virtual media

◦Clear all logs

◦Toggle the locator LED

◦Set time zone

◦Ping

• admin—A user with this role can perform all actions available through the GUI, CLI, and IPMI.

If checked, when you save the changes the password for this user will be changed. You must check this box if this is a new user name.

114

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing User Accounts

Password Expiry

Name

New Password field

Description

The password for this user name. When you move the mouse over the help icon beside the field, the following guidelines to set the password are displayed:

• The password must have a minimum of 8 and a maximum of 14 characters.

• The password must not contain the User's Name.

• The password must contain characters from three of the following four categories:

◦English uppercase characters (A through Z).

◦English lowercase characters (a through z).

◦Base 10 digits (0 through 9).

◦Non-alphabetic characters (!, @, #, $, %, ^, &, *, -, _, , =,

'').

Confirm New Password field

These rules are meant to define a strong password for the user, for security reasons. However, if you want to set a password of your choice ignoring these guidelines, click the Disable Strong Password button on the Local Users tab. While setting a password when the strong password option is disabled, you can use between 1- 20 characters.

The password repeated for confirmation purposes.

Step 6

Enter password information.

Step 7

Click Save Changes.

Password Expiry

You can set a shelf life for a password, after which it expires. As an administrator, you can set this time in days. This configuration would be common to all users. Upon password expiry, the user is notified on login and would not be allowed to login unless the password is reset.

Note

When you downgrade to an older database, existing users are deleted. The database returns to default settings. Previously configured users are cleared and the database is empty, that is, the database has the default username - 'admin' and password - 'password'. Since the server is left with the default user database, the change default credential feature is enabled. This means that when the 'admin' user logs on to the database for the first time after a downgrade, the user must mandatorily change the default credential.

Password Set Time

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

115

Managing User Accounts

Configuring Password Expiry Duration

A 'Password set time' is configured for every existing user, to the time when the migration or upgrade occurred.

For new users (users created after an upgrade), the Password Set time is configured to the time when the user was created, and the password is set. For users in general (new and existing), the Password Set Time is updated whenever the password is changed.

Configuring Password Expiry Duration

Before You Begin

• You must enable password expiry.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click User Management.

Step 3

In the Local User Management pane (opens by default), click Password Expiration Details.

Step 4

In the Password Expiration Details dialog box, update the following fields:

Name Description

Enable Password Expiry check box

Checking this box allows you to configure the Password Expiry

Duration. Uncheck the check box to disable it.

Password Expiry Duration field The time period that you can set for the existing password to expire

(from the time you set a new password or modify an existing one). The range is between 1 to 3650 days.

Password History field The number of occurrences when a password was entered. When this is enabled, you cannot repeat a password. Enter a value between 0 to

5. Entering 0 disables this field.

Notification Period field

Grace Period field

Notifies the time by when the password expires. Enter a value between

0 to 15 days. Entering 0 disables this field.

Time period till when the existing password can still be used, after it expires. Enter a value between 0 to 5 days. Entering 0 disables this field.

Step 5

Click Save Changes.

Step 6

Optionally, click Reset Values to clear the text fields and reset the values you entered. Click Restore Defaults to revert to the default settings.

116

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing User Accounts

Enabling Password Expiry

Enabling Password Expiry

Before You Begin

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click User Management.

Step 3

In the Local User Management pane (opens by default), click Password Expiration Details.

Step 4

In the Password Expiration Details dialog box, check the Enable Password Expiry check box.

The Password Expiry Duration text field becomes editable and you can configure the duration by entering a number in days.

What to Do Next

Configure password expiry duration.

LDAP Servers

Cisco IMC supports directory services that organize information in a directory, and manage access to this information. Cisco IMC supports Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP), which stores and maintains directory information in a network. In addition, Cisco IMC supports Microsoft Active Directory (AD). Active

Directory is a technology that provides a variety of network services including LDAP-like directory services,

Kerberos-based authentication, and DNS-based naming. The Cisco IMC utilizes the Kerberos-based authentication service of LDAP.

When LDAP is enabled in the Cisco IMC, user authentication and role authorization is performed by the

LDAP server for user accounts not found in the local user database. The LDAP user authentication format is [email protected].

By checking the Enable Encryption check box in the LDAP Settings area, you can require the server to encrypt data sent to the LDAP server.

Configuring the LDAP Server

The Cisco IMC can be configured to use LDAP for user authentication and authorization. To use LDAP, configure users with an attribute that holds the user role and locale information for the Cisco IMC. You can use an existing LDAP attribute that is mapped to the Cisco IMC user roles and locales or you can modify the

LDAP schema to add a new custom attribute, such as the CiscoAVPair attribute, which has an attribute ID of 1.3.6.1.4.1.9.287247.1.

Important

For more information about altering the schema, see the article at http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/ library/bb727064.aspx

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

117

Managing User Accounts

Configuring the LDAP Server

Note

This example creates a custom attribute named CiscoAVPair, but you can also use an existing LDAP attribute that is mapped to the Cisco IMC user roles and locales.

If you are using Group Authorization on the Cisco IMC LDAP configuration, then you can skip Steps 1-4 and perform the steps listed in the Configuring LDAP Settings and Group Authorization in Cisco IMC section.

The following steps must be performed on the LDAP server.

Procedure

Step 1

Ensure that the LDAP schema snap-in is installed.

Step 2

Using the schema snap-in, add a new attribute with the following properties:

Properties Value

Common Name CiscoAVPair

LDAP Display Name CiscoAVPair

Unique X500 Object ID

Description

Syntax

1.3.6.1.4.1.9.287247.1

CiscoAVPair

Case Sensitive String

Step 3

Add the CiscoAVPair attribute to the user class using the snap-in: a) Expand the Classes node in the left pane and type U to select the user class.

b) Click the Attributes tab and click Add.

c) Type C to select the CiscoAVPair attribute.

d) Click OK.

Step 4

Add the following user role values to the CiscoAVPair attribute, for the users that you want to have access to Cisco IMC:

Role CiscoAVPair Attribute Value

admin shell:roles="admin" user shell:roles="user" read-only shell:roles="read-only"

Note

For more information about adding values to attributes, see the article at http://technet.microsoft.com/ en-us/library/bb727064.aspx

118

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing User Accounts

Configuring LDAP Settings and Group Authorization in Cisco IMC

What to Do Next

Use the Cisco IMC to configure the LDAP server.

Configuring LDAP Settings and Group Authorization in Cisco IMC

Before You Begin

You must log in as a user with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click User Management.

Step 3

In the User Management pane, click LDAP.

Step 4

In the LDAP Settings area, update the following properties:

Name Description

Enable LDAP check box If checked, user authentication and role authorization is performed first by the LDAP server, followed by user accounts that are not found in the local user database.

Base DN field Base Distinguished Name. This field describes where to load users and groups from.

It must be in the dc=domain,dc=com format for

Active Directory servers.

Domain field

Enable Encryption check box

Enable Binding CA Certificate check box

Timeout (0 - 180) seconds

The IPv4 domain that all users must be in.

This field is required unless you specify at least one

Global Catalog server address.

If checked, the server encrypts all information it sends to the LDAP server.

If checked, allows you to bind the LDAP CA certificate.

The number of seconds the Cisco IMC waits until the

LDAP search operation times out.

If the search operation times out, Cisco IMC tries to connect to the next server listed on this tab, if one is available.

Note

The value you specify for this field could impact the overall time.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

119

Managing User Accounts

Configuring LDAP Settings and Group Authorization in Cisco IMC

Name

User Search Precedence

Description

Allows you to specify the order of search between the local user database and LDAP user database. This can be one of the following:

• Local User Database (Default setting)

• LDAP User Database

Note

If you checked the Enable Encryption and the Enable Binding CA Certificate check boxes, enter the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the LDAP server in the LDAP Server field. To resolve the FQDN of the LDAP server, configure the preferred DNS of Cisco IMC network with the appropriate DNS IP address.

Step 5

In the Configure LDAP Servers area, update the following properties:

Name Description

Pre-Configure LDAP Servers radio button

If checked, the Active Directory uses the pre-configured LDAP servers.

LDAP Servers fields

Server

Port

The IP address of the 6 LDAP servers.

If you are using Active Directory for LDAP, then servers 1, 2 and 3 are domain controllers, while servers 4, 5 and 6 are Global Catalogs. If you are not

Active Directory for LDAP, then you can configure a maximum of 6 LDAP servers.

Note

You can provide the IP address of the host name as well.

The port numbers for the servers.

If you are using Active Directory for LDAP, then for servers 1, 2 and 3, which are domain controllers, the default port number is 389. For servers 4, 5 and 6, which are Global Catalogs, the default port number is 3268.

LDAPS communication occurs over the TCP 636 port. LDAPS communication to a global catalog server occurs over TCP 3269 port.

Use DNS to Configure LDAP Servers radio button If checked, you can use DNS to configure access to the LDAP servers.

DNS Parameters fields

120

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing User Accounts

Configuring LDAP Settings and Group Authorization in Cisco IMC

Name

Source

Domain to Search

Forest to Search

Description

Specifies how to obtain the domain name used for the DNS SRV request. It can be one of the following:

• Extracted—specifies using domain name extracted-domain from the login ID

• Configured—specifies using the configured-search domain.

• Configured-Extracted—specifies using the domain name extracted from the login ID than the configured-search domain.

A configured domain name that acts as a source for a DNS query.

This field is disabled if the source is specified as

Extracted.

A configured forest name that acts as a source for a

DNS query.

This field is disabled if the source is specified as

Extracted.

Step 6

In the Binding Parameters area, update the following properties:

Name Description

Method

It can be one of the following:

• Anonymous—requires NULL username and password. If this option is selected and the

LDAP server is configured for Anonymous logins, then the user can gain access.

• Configured Credentials—requires a known set of credentials to be specified for the initial bind process. If the initial bind process succeeds, then the distinguished name (DN) of the user name is queried and re-used for the re-binding process. If the re-binding process fails, then the user is denied access.

• Login Credentials—requires the user credentials. If the bind process fails, the user is denied access.

By default, the Login Credentials option is selected.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

121

Managing User Accounts

Configuring LDAP Settings and Group Authorization in Cisco IMC

Name

Binding DN

Password

Description

The distinguished name (DN) of the user. This field is editable only if you have selected Configured

Credentials option as the binding method.

The password of the user. This field is editable only if you have selected Configured Credentials option as the binding method.

Step 7

In the Search Parameters area, update the following fields:

Name Description

Filter Attribute

This field must match the configured attribute in the schema on the LDAP server.

By default, this field displays sAMAccountName.

Group Attribute

Attribute

Nested Group Search Depth (1-128)

This field must match the configured attribute in the schema on the LDAP server.

By default, this field displays memberOf.

An LDAP attribute that contains the role and locale information for the user. This property is always a name-value pair. The system queries the user record for the value that matches this attribute name.

The LDAP attribute can use an existing LDAP attribute that is mapped to the Cisco IMC user roles and locales, or can modify the schema such that a new LDAP attribute can be created. For example,

CiscoAvPair.

Note

If you do not specify this property, the user cannot login. Although the object is located on the LDAP server, it should be an exact match of the attribute that is specified in this field.

Parameter to search for an LDAP group nested within another defined group in an LDAP group map. The parameter defines the depth of a nested group search.

Step 8

(Optional) In the Group Authorization area, update the following properties:

122

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing User Accounts

Configuring LDAP Settings and Group Authorization in Cisco IMC

Name

LDAP Group Authorization

check box

Nested Group Search Depth

(1-128)

Group Name column

Group Domain column

Role column

Configure button

Delete button

Description

If checked, user authentication is also done on the group level for LDAP users that are not found in the local user database.

If you check this box, Cisco IMC enables the Configure Group button.

Parameter to search for an LDAP group nested within another defined group in an LDAP group map. The parameter defines the depth of a nested group search.

The name of the group in the LDAP server database that is authorized to access the server.

The LDAP server domain the group must reside in.

The role assigned to all users in this LDAP server group. This can be one of the following:

• read-only—A user with this role can view information but cannot make any changes.

• user—A user with this role can perform the following tasks:

◦View all information

◦Manage the power control options such as power on, power cycle, and power off

◦Launch the KVM console and virtual media

◦Clear all logs

◦Toggle the locator LED

◦Set time zone

◦Ping

• admin—A user with this role can perform all actions available through the GUI, CLI, and IPMI.

Configures an active directory group.

Deletes an existing LDAP group.

Step 9

Click Save Changes.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

123

Managing User Accounts

Setting User Search Precedence

Setting User Search Precedence

Before You Begin

You must log in as a user with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin tab.

Step 2

On the Admin tab, click User Management.

Step 3

In the User Management pane, click the LDAP tab.

Step 4

In the LDAP Settings area's User Search Precedence field, select Local User Database or LDAP User

Database.

This field allows you to specify the order of search between the above options. Local User Database is the default option.

What to Do Next

LDAP Certificates Overview

Cisco C-series servers allow an LDAP client to validate a directory server certificate against an installed CA certificate or chained CA certificate during an LDAP binding step. This feature is introduced in the event where anyone can duplicate a directory server for user authentication and cause a security breach due to the inability to enter a trusted point or chained certificate into the Cisco IMC for remote user authentication.

An LDAP client needs a new configuration option to validate the directory server certificate during the encrypted TLS/SSL communication.

Viewing LDAP CA Certificate Status

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin tab.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click User Management.

Step 3

In the User Management pane, click the LDAP tab.

Step 4

In the Certificate Status area, view the following fields:

Name Description

Download Status

This field displays the status of the LDAP CA certificate download.

Export Status

This field displays the status of the LDAP CA certificate export.

124

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing User Accounts

LDAP Certificates Overview

Exporting an LDAP CA Certificate

Before You Begin

You must log in as a user with admin privileges to perform this action.

You should have downloaded a signed LDAP CA Certificate before you can export it.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin tab.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click User Management.

Step 3

In the User Management pane, click the LDAP tab.

Step 4

Click the Export LDAP CA Certificate link.

The Export LDAP CA Certificate dialog box appears.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

125

Managing User Accounts

LDAP Certificates Overview

Name

Export to Remote Location

Export to Local Desktop

Description

Selecting this option allows you to choose the certificate from a remote location and export it. Enter the following details:

• ◦TFTP Server

◦FTP Server

◦SFTP Server

◦SCP Server

◦HTTP Server

Note

If you chose SCP or SFTP as the remote server type while performing this action, a pop-up window is displayed with the message Server

(RSA) key fingerprint is

<server_finger_print _ID> Do you

wish to continue?. Click Yes or No depending on the authenticity of the server fingerprint.

The fingerprint is based on the host's public key and helps you to identify or verify the host you are connecting to.

• Server IP/Hostname field — The IP address or hostname of the server on which the LDAP

CA certificate file should be exported.

Depending on the setting in the Download

Certificate from drop-down list, the name of the field may vary.

• Path and Filename field — The path and filename Cisco IMC should use when downloading the certificate from the remote server.

• Username field — The username the system should use to log in to the remote server. This field does not apply if the protocol is TFTP or

HTTP.

• Password field — The password for the remote server username. This field does not apply if the protocol is TFTP or HTTP.

Selecting this option allows you to choose the certificate stored on a drive that is local to the computer and export it.

126

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing User Accounts

LDAP Certificates Overview

Step 5

Click Export Certificate.

Downloading an LDAP CA Certificate

Before You Begin

• You must log in as a user with admin privileges to perform this action.

• You must enable Binding CA Certificate to perform this action.

Note

Only CA certificates or chained CA certificates must be used in Cisco IMC. By default, CA certificate is in .cer format. If it is a chained CA certificate, then it needs to be converted to .cer format before downloading it to Cisco IMC.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin tab.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click User Management.

Step 3

In the User Management pane, click the LDAP tab.

Step 4

Click the Download LDAP CA Certificate link.

The Download LDAP CA Certificate dialog box appears.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

127

Managing User Accounts

LDAP Certificates Overview

Name Description

Download from remote location

radio button

Selecting this option allows you to choose the certificate from a remote location and download it. Enter the following details:

• ◦TFTP Server

◦FTP Server

◦SFTP Server

◦SCP Server

◦HTTP Server

Note

If you chose SCP or SFTP as the remote server type while performing this action, a pop-up window is displayed with the message Server (RSA) key fingerprint is

<server_finger_print _ID> Do you wish to continue?.

Click Yes or No depending on the authenticity of the server fingerprint.

The fingerprint is based on the host's public key and helps you to identify or verify the host you are connecting to.

• Server IP/Hostname field — The IP address or hostname of the server on which the LDAP CA certificate file should be stored.

Depending on the setting in the Download Certificate from drop-down list, the name of the field may vary.

• Path and Filename field — The path and filename Cisco IMC should use when downloading the file to the remote server.

• Username field — The username the system should use to log in to the remote server. This field does not apply if the protocol is

TFTP or HTTP.

• Password field — The password for the remote server username.

This field does not apply if the protocol is TFTP or HTTP.

Download through browser client

radio button

Selecting this option allows you to navigate to the certificate stored on a drive that is local to the computer running the Cisco IMC GUI.

When you select this option, Cisco IMC GUI displays a Browse button that lets you navigate to the file you want to import.

Paste Certificate content radio button

Download Certificate button

Selecting this option allows you to copy the entire content of the signed certificate and paste it in the Paste certificate content text field.

Note

Ensure the certificate is signed before uploading.

Allows you to download the certificate to the server.

128

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing User Accounts

LDAP Certificates Overview

Testing LDAP Binding

Before You Begin

You must log in as a user with admin privileges to perform this action.

Note

If you checked the Enable Encryption and the Enable Binding CA Certificate check boxes, enter the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the LDAP server in the LDAP Server field. To resolve the FQDN of the LDAP server, configure the preferred DNS of Cisco IMC network with the appropriate DNS IP address.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin tab.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click User Management.

Step 3

In the User Management pane, click the LDAP tab.

Step 4

Click the Test LDAP Binding link.

The Test LDAP CA Certificate Binding dialog box appears.

Name

Username field

Description

Enter the user name.

Password field Enter the corresponding password.

Step 5

Click Test.

Deleting an LDAP CA Certificate

Before You Begin

You must log in as a user with admin privileges to perform this action.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

129

Managing User Accounts

Viewing User Sessions

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin tab.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click User Management.

Step 3

In the User Management pane, click the LDAP tab.

Step 4

Click the Delete LDAP CA Certificate link and click OK to confirm.

Viewing User Sessions

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click User Management.

Step 3

In the User Management pane, click Session Management.

Step 4

In the Sessions pane, view the following information about current user sessions:

Name Description

Terminate Session button

Session ID column

If your user account is assigned the admin user role, this option enables you to force the associated user session to end.

Note

You cannot terminate your current session from this tab.

The unique identifier for the session.

User name column

IP Address column

The username for the user.

The IP address from which the user accessed the server. If this is a serial connection, it displays N/A.

Type column The type of session the user chose to access the server. This can be one of the following:

• webgui— indicates the user is connected to the server using the web UI.

• CLI— indicates the user is connected to the server using CLI.

• serial— indicates the user is connected to the server using the serial port.

Action column This column displays N/A when the SOL is enabled and Terminate when the SOL is disabled. You can terminate a session by clicking

Terminate on the web UI.

130

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing User Accounts

Viewing User Sessions

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

131

Viewing User Sessions

Managing User Accounts

132

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

C H A P T E R

Configuring Chassis Related Settings

This chapter includes the following sections:

•

Managing Server Power, page 133

•

Pinging a Hostname/IP Address from the Web UI, page 134

•

Toggling the Locator LEDs, page 135

•

Selecting a Time Zone, page 135

Managing Server Power

Before You Begin

You must log in with user or admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Summary.

Step 3

In the toolbar above the work pane, click the Host Power link.

Step 4

From the drop-down list, select one of the following options:

Actions Description

Power ON

Powers on the chosen server.

Power Off

Power Cycle

Powers off the chosen server, even if tasks are running on that server.

Important

If any firmware or BIOS updates are in progress, do not power off or reset the server until those tasks are complete.

Powers off and powers on chosen server.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

133

Pinging a Hostname/IP Address from the Web UI

Actions

Hard Reset

Shut Down

Configuring Chassis Related Settings

Description

Reboots the chosen server.

Shuts down the chosen server if the operating system supports that feature.

Pinging a Hostname/IP Address from the Web UI

Before You Begin

You must log in with user or admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the toolbar above the work pane, click the Ping icon.

Step 2

In the Ping Details dialog box, update the following fields:

Actions Description

*Hostname/IP Address field

Hostname or IP address you want to reach out to.

*Number of Retries field

*Timeout field

The maximum number of retries allowed to ping the

IP address. The default value is 3. The valid range is from 1 to 10.

The maximum response time for a pinging activity.

The default value is 10 seconds. The valid range is from 1 to 20 seconds.

Ping Status field

Details button

Ping button

Cancel button

Displays results of the pinging activity.

Displays details of the pinging activity.

Pings the IP address.

Closes the dialog box without pinging.

Step 3

Click Ping.

134

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Configuring Chassis Related Settings

Toggling the Locator LEDs

Toggling the Locator LEDs

Before You Begin

You must log in with user or admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Summary.

Step 3

In the toolbar above the work pane, click the Locator LED link.

Step 4

Select Turn On Locator LED or Turn Off Locator LED.

Selecting a Time Zone

Before You Begin

You must log in with user or admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Summary.

Step 3

In the Cisco Integrated Management Controller (Cisco IMC) Information area, click Select Timezone.

Select Timezone screen appears.

Step 4

In the Select Timezone pop-up screen, mouse over the map and click on the location to select your time zone or choose your time zone from the Timezone drop-down menu.

Step 5

Click Save.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

135

Selecting a Time Zone

Configuring Chassis Related Settings

136

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

C H A P T E R

Configuring Network-Related Settings

This chapter includes the following sections:

•

Server NIC Configuration, page 137

•

Common Properties Configuration, page 141

•

Configuring IPv4, page 143

•

Configuring IPv6, page 143

•

Connecting to a VLAN, page 144

•

Connecting to a Port Profile, page 145

•

Configuring Individual Settings, page 147

•

Network Security Configuration, page 148

•

Network Time Protocol Settings, page 149

Server NIC Configuration

Server NICs

NIC Mode

The NIC mode setting determines which ports can reach the Cisco IMC. The following network mode options are available, depending on your platform:

• Dedicated—The management port that is used to access the Cisco IMC.

• Cisco Card—Any port on the adapter card that can be used to access the Cisco IMC. The Cisco adapter card has to be installed in a slot with Network the Communications Services Interface protocol support

(NCSI).

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

137

Configuring Network-Related Settings

Configuring Server NICs

NIC Redundancy

The following NIC redundancy options are available, depending on the selected NIC mode and your platform:

• active-active—If supported, all ports that are associated with the configured NIC mode operate simultaneously. This feature increases throughput and provides multiple paths to the Cisco IMC.

• active-standby—If a port that is associated with the configured NIC mode fails, traffic fails over to one of the other ports associated with the NIC mode.

Note

If you choose this option, make sure that all ports associated with the configured NIC mode are connected to the same subnet to ensure that traffic is secure regardless of which port is used.

The available redundancy modes vary depending on the selected network mode and your platform. For the available modes, see the Hardware Installation Guide (HIG) for the type of server you are using. The C-Series

HIGs are available at the following URL: http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps10493/prod_installation_ guides_list.html

Configuring Server NICs

Configure a server NIC when you want to set the NIC mode and NIC redundancy.

Before You Begin

You must log in as a user with admin privileges to configure the NIC.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Networking.

Step 3

In the NIC Properties area, update the following properties:

Name Description Cisco IMC

NIC Mode drop-down list The ports that can be used to access Cisco IMC. This can be one of the following:

• Dedicated—The management port that is used to access the Cisco

IMC.

• Cisco Card—Any port on the adapter card that can be used to access Cisco IMC. The Cisco adapter card has to be installed in a slot with Network the Communications Services Interface protocol support (NCSI).

138

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Configuring Network-Related Settings

Configuring Server NICs

Name

VIC Slot drop-down list

Description Cisco IMC

The VIC slot that can be used for management functions in Cisco card mode. This can be one of the following:

For C220 M4 servers, VIC slot options are as follows:

• Riser 1—Slot 1 is selected.

• Riser 2— Slot 2 is selected.

• FLEX LOM—Slot 3 (MLOM) is selected.

For C240 M4 servers, VIC slot options are as follows:

• Riser 1—Slot 2 is the primary slot, but you can also use slot 1.

• Riser 2— Slot 5 is the primary slot, but you can also use slot 4.

• FLEX LOM—Slot 7 (MLOM) is selected.

The following options are available only on some UCS C-Series servers:

• 4

• 5

• 9

• 10

Note

This option is available only on some UCS C-Series servers.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

139

Configuring Network-Related Settings

Configuring Server NICs

Name

VIC Slot drop-down list

SIOC Slot

Description Cisco IMC

The VIC slot that can be used for management functions in Cisco card mode. This can be one of the following:

For C220 M5 servers, VIC slot options are as follows:

• Riser 1—Slot 1 is selected.

• Riser 2— Slot 2 is selected.

• FLEX LOM—Slot 3 (MLOM) is selected.

For C240 M5 servers, VIC slot options are as follows:

• Riser 1—Slot 2 is the primary slot, but you can also use slot 1.

• Riser 2— Slot 5 is the primary slot, but you can also use slot 4.

• FLEX LOM—Slot 7 (MLOM) is selected.

The following options are available only on some UCS C-Series servers:

• 4

• 5

• 9

• 10

Note

This option is available only on some UCS C-Series servers.

Displays the Cisco IMC network mode. Based on the card present in the System IO Controller (SIOC1), network mode could be either 1 or

Note

This option is available only on some UCS C-Series servers.

140

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Configuring Network-Related Settings

Common Properties Configuration

Name Description Cisco IMC

NIC Redundancy drop-down list

The available NIC redundancy options depend on the selected NIC mode and the model of the server that you are using. If you do not see a particular option, it is not available for the selected mode or server model.

This can be one of the following:

• active-active—If supported, all ports that are associated with the configured NIC mode operate simultaneously. This feature increases throughput and provides multiple paths to Cisco IMC.

• active-standby—If a port that is associated with the configured

NIC mode fails, traffic fails over to one of the other ports associated with the NIC mode.

Note

If you choose this option, make sure that all ports associated with the configured NIC mode are connected to the same subnet to ensure that traffic is secure regardless of which port is used.

MAC Address field

The MAC address of the Cisco IMC network interface that is selected in the NIC Mode field.

Step 4

Click Save Changes.

Common Properties Configuration

Overview to Common Properties Configuration

Hostname

The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) enhancement is available with the addition of the hostname to the DHCP packet, which can either be interpreted or displayed at the DHCP server side. The hostname, which is now added to the options field of the DHCP packet, sent in the DHCP DISCOVER packet that was initially sent to the DHCP server.

The default hostname of the server is changed from ucs-c2XX to CXXX-YYYYYY, where XXX is the model number and YYYYYY is the serial number of the server. This unique string acts as a client identifier, allows you to track and map the IP addresses that are leased out to Cisco IMC from the DHCP server. The default serial number is provided by the manufacturer as a sticker or label on the server to help you identify the server.

Dynamic DNS

Dynamic DNS (DDNS) is used to add or update the resource records on the DNS server from Cisco IMC.

You can enable Dynamic DNS by using either the web UI or CLI. When you enable the DDNS option, the

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

141

Configuring Network-Related Settings

Configuring Common Properties

DDNS service records the current hostname, domain name, and the management IP address and updates the resource records in the DNS server from Cisco IMC.

Note

The DDNS server deletes the prior resource records (if any) and adds the new resource records to the DNS server if any one of the following DNS configuration is changed:

• Hostname

• Domain name in the LDAP settings

• When DDNS and DHCP are enabled, if the DHCP gets a new IP address or DNS IP or domain name due to a change in a network or a subnet.

• When DHCP is disabled and if you set the static IP address by using CLI or web UI.

• When you enter the dns-use-dhcp command.

Dynamic DNS Update Domain— You can specify the domain. The domain could be either main domain or any sub-domain. This domain name is appended to the hostname of the Cisco IMC for the DDNS update.

Configuring Common Properties

Use common properties to describe your server.

Before You Begin

You must log in as a user with admin privileges to configure common properties.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Networking.

Step 3

In the Common Properties area, update the following properties: a) In the Management Hostname field, enter the name of the host.

By default, the hostname appears in CXXX-YYYYYY format, where XXX is the model number and

YYYYYY is the serial number of the server.

Note

If DHCP is enabled, the DHCP DISCOVER packet sent out will also carry the Cisco IMC hostname in it.

b) Check the Dynamic DNS check box.

c) In the Dynamic DNS Update Domain field, enter the domain name.

Step 4

Click Save Changes.

142

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Configuring Network-Related Settings

Configuring IPv4

Configuring IPv4

Before You Begin

You must log in as a user with admin privileges to configure IPv4.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Networking.

Step 3

In the IPv4 Properties area, update the following properties:

Name Description

Enable IPv4 check box If checked, IPv4 is enabled.

Use DHCP check box

Management IP Address field

If checked, Cisco IMC uses DHCP.

The management IP address. An external virtual IP address that helps manage the CMCs and BMCs.

The subnet mask for the IP address.

Subnet Mask field

Gateway field

Obtain DNS Server Addresses

from DHCP check box

The gateway for the IP address.

If checked, Cisco IMC retrieves the DNS server addresses from DHCP.

Preferred DNS Server field

Alternate DNS Server field

The IP address of the primary DNS server.

The IP address of the secondary DNS server.

Step 4

Click Save Changes.

Configuring IPv6

Before You Begin

You must log in as a user with admin privileges to configure IPv6.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

143

Configuring Network-Related Settings

Connecting to a VLAN

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Networking.

Step 3

In the IPv6 Properties area, update the following properties:

Name Description

Enable IPv6 check box

If checked, IPv6 is enabled.

Use DHCP check box

Management IP Address field

Prefix Length field

Gateway field

Obtain DNS Server Addresses

from DHCP check box

Preferred DNS Server field

If checked, the Cisco IMC uses DHCP.

Note

Only stateful DHCP is supported.

Management IPv6 address.

Note

Only global unicast addresses are supported.

The prefix length for the IPv6 address. Enter a value within the range

1 to 127. The default value is 64.

The gateway for the IPv6 address.

Note

Only global unicast addresses are supported.

If checked, the Cisco IMC retrieves the DNS server addresses from

DHCP.

Note

You can use this option only when the Use DHCP option is enabled.

The IPv6 address of the primary DNS server.

The IPv6 address of the secondary DNS server.

Alternate DNS Server field

Link Local Address field The link local address for the IPv6 address.

Step 4

Click Save Changes.

Connecting to a VLAN

Before You Begin

You must be logged in as admin to connect to a VLAN.

144

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Configuring Network-Related Settings

Connecting to a Port Profile

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Networking.

Step 3

In the VLAN Properties area, update the following properties:

Name Description

Enable VLAN check box

VLAN ID field

If checked, the Cisco IMC is connected to a virtual LAN.

Note

You can configure a VLAN or a port profile, but you cannot use both. If you want to use a port profile, make sure that this check box is not checked.

The VLAN ID.

Priority field

The priority of this system on the VLAN.

Step 4

Click Save Changes.

Connecting to a Port Profile

Before You Begin

You must be logged in as admin to connect to a port profile.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Networking.

Step 3

In the Port Properties area, update the following properties:

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

145

Connecting to a Port Profile

Name

Auto Negotiation check box

Admin Mode Area

Configuring Network-Related Settings

Description

Using this option, you can either set the network port speed and duplex values for the switch, or allow the system to automatically derive the values from the switch. This option is available for dedicated mode only.

• If checked, the network port speed and duplex settings are ignored by the system and Cisco

IMC retains the speed at which the switch is configured.

• If unchecked, you can configure the network port speed and duplex values.

Network Port Speed field

The network speed of the port. This can be one of the following:

• 10 Mbps

• 100 Mbps

• 1 Gbps

The default value is 100 Mbps. In the Dedicated mode, if you disable Auto Negotiation, you can configure the network speed and duplex values.

Note

• Before changing the port speed, ensure that the switch you connected to has the same port speed.

• Network port speed of 1 Gbps is unavailable on the C220 and C240 M3, and C22 and C24 M3 servers.

Duplex drop-down list

The duplex mode for the Cisco IMC management port.

This can be one of the following:

• Half

• Full

By default, the duplex mode is set to Full.

146

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Configuring Network-Related Settings

Configuring Individual Settings

Name

Operation Mode Area

Description

Displays the operation network port speed and duplex values.

If you checked the Auto Negotiation check box, the network port speed and duplex details of the switch are displayed. If unchecked, the network port speed and duplex values that you set at the Admin Mode are displayed.

Step 4

Click Save Changes.

Configuring Individual Settings

Before You Begin

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Networking.

Step 3

In the Individual Settings area, review and update the following fields for CMC 1, CMC 2, BMC 1 and BMC

2 in their respective areas:

Name Description

Hostname field The user-defined hostname. By default, the hostname appears in

CXXX-YYYYYY format, where XXX is the model number and

YYYYYY is the serial number of the server.

MAC Address field

IPv4 Address field

IPv6 Address field

Link Local Address field

The MAC address of the component.

The IPv4 address of the component.

The IPv6 address of the component.

The link local address for the component's IPv6 address.

Step 4

Click Save Changes.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

147

Configuring Network-Related Settings

Network Security Configuration

What to Do Next

Network Security Configuration

Network Security

The Cisco IMC uses IP blocking as network security. IP blocking prevents the connection between a server or website and certain IP addresses or ranges of addresses. IP blocking effectively bans undesired connections from those computers to a website, mail server, or other Internet servers.

IP banning is commonly used to protect against denial of service (DoS) attacks. Cisco IMC bans IP addresses by setting up an IP blocking fail count.

Configuring Network Security

Configure network security if you want to set up an IP blocking fail count.

Before You Begin

You must log in as a user with admin privileges to configure network security.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Networking pane, click Network Security.

Step 3

In the IP Blocking Properties area, update the following properties:

Name Description

Enable IP Blocking check box Check this box to enable IP blocking.

IP Blocking Fail Count field

The number of times a user can attempt to log in unsuccessfully before the system locks that user out for a specified length of time.

The number of unsuccessful login attempts must occur within the time frame specified in the IP Blocking Fail Window field.

Enter an integer between 3 and 10.

IP Blocking Fail Window field The length of time, in seconds, in which the unsuccessful login attempts must occur in order for the user to be locked out.

Enter an integer between 60 and 120.

IP Blocking Penalty Time field The number of seconds the user remains locked out if they exceed the maximum number of login attempts within the specified time window.

Enter an integer between 300 and 900.

148

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Configuring Network-Related Settings

Network Time Protocol Settings

Step 4

In the IP Filtering area, update the following properties:

Name Description

Enable IP Filtering check box

Check this box to enable IP filtering.

IP Filter fields To provide secure access to the server, you can now set a filter to allow only a selected set of IPs to access it. This option provides four slots for storing IP addresses (IP Filter 1, 2, 3, and 4). You can either assign a single IP address or a range of IP addresses while setting the IP filters.

Once you set the IP filter, you would be unable to access the server using any other IP address.

Step 5

Click Save Changes.

Network Time Protocol Settings

Network Time Protocol Service Setting

By default, when Cisco IMC is reset, it synchronizes the time with the host. With the introduction of the NTP service, you can configure Cisco IMC to synchronize the time with an NTP server. The NTP server does not run in Cisco IMC by default. You must enable and configure the NTP service by specifying the IP/DNS address of at least one server or a maximum of four servers that function as NTP servers or time source servers.

When you enable the NTP service, Cisco IMC synchronizes the time with the configured NTP server. The

NTP service can be modified only through Cisco IMC.

Note

To enable the NTP service, it is preferable to specify the IP address of a server rather than the DNS address.

Configuring Network Time Protocol Settings

Configuring NTP disables the IPMI Set SEL time command.

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

149

Configuring Network-Related Settings

Configuring Network Time Protocol Settings

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Networking.

Step 3

In the Networking pane, click NTP Setting.

Step 4

In the NTP Settings area, update the following properties:

Name Description

Enable NTP

Check this box to enable the NTP service.

Server 1

Server 2

Server 3

The IP/DNS address of one of the four servers that act as an NTP server or the time source server.

Server 4

Status message

The IP/DNS address of one of the four servers that act as an NTP server or the time source server.

Indicates whether or not the server is able to synchronize its time with the remote NTP server. This can be one of the following:

• synchronized to NTP server (RefID) at stratum 7— When the NTP service is enabled and multiple or individual IPv4 or

IPv6 based NTP servers are added.

• unsynchronized — When the NTP service is enabled and an unknown or unreachable server is added.

• NTP service disabled — When the NTP service is disabled.

Note

If you move the mouse over the help icon, a pop-up is displayed that explains what Stratum stands for.

Step 5

Click Save Changes.

150

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

C H A P T E R

Managing Network Adapters

This chapter includes the following sections:

•

Viewing Network Adapter Properties, page 151

•

Viewing Storage Adapter Properties, page 157

•

Managing vHBAs, page 164

•

Managing vNICs, page 177

•

Backing Up and Restoring the Adapter Configuration, page 200

•

Resetting the Adapter, page 203

Viewing Network Adapter Properties

Before You Begin

• The server must be powered on, or the properties will not display.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Networking menu.

Step 2

In the Networking menu, click Adapter Card 1 or Adapter Card 2.

Step 3

In the Adapter Card Properties area, review the following information:

Name Description

PCI Slot field The PCI slot in which the adapter is installed.

Vendor field

The vendor for the adapter.

Product Name field

Product ID field

The product name for the adapter.

The product ID for the adapter.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

151

Managing Network Adapters

Viewing Network Adapter Properties

Name

Serial Number field

Version ID field

Hardware Revision field

Description

The serial number for the adapter.

The version ID for the adapter.

The hardware revision for the adapter.

Cisco IMC Management Enabled

field

If this field displays yes, then the adapter is functioning in Cisco Card

Mode and passing Cisco IMC management traffic through to the server

Cisco IMC.

Configuration Pending field If this field displays yes, the adapter configuration has changed in Cisco

IMC but these changes have not been communicated to the host operating system.

To activate the changes, an administrator must reboot the adapter.

ISCSI Boot Capable field

CDN Capable field

Whether iSCSI boot is supported on the adapter.

Whether CDN is supported on the adapter.

usNIC Capable field

Description field

Whether the adapter and the firmware running on the adapter support the usNIC.

A user-defined description for the adapter.

You can enter between 1 and 63 characters.

Enable FIP Mode check box

Enable LLDP check box

If checked, then FCoE Initialization Protocol (FIP) mode is enabled.

FIP mode ensures that the adapter is compatible with current FCoE standards.

Note

We recommend that you use this option only when explicitly directed to do so by a technical support representative.

If checked, then Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) enables all the

Data Center Bridging Capability Exchange protocol (DCBX) functionality, which includes FCoE, priority based flow control.

By default, LLDP option is enabled.

Note

We recommend that you do not disable LLDP option, as it disables all the DCBX functionality.

This option is available only on some UCS C-Series servers.

Enable VNTAG Mode check box

If VNTAG mode is enabled:

• vNICs and vHBAs can be assigned to a specific channel.

• vNICs and vHBAs can be associated to a port profile.

• vNICs can fail over to another vNIC if there are communication problems.

152

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Network Adapters

Viewing Network Adapter Properties

Name

Port-0 drop-down list

Port-1 drop-down list

Training Link - 0 check box

Training Link - 1 check box

Description

This can be one of the following:

• 10 Gbps

• 40 Gbps

• 4 x 10 Gbps

• Auto

• 40 Gbps

• 4 x 10 Gbps

• Auto— For Cisco UCS VIC 13xx (or later generation) adapter series, the Auto value allows the adapter to determine the speed of the port based on the transceiver module inserted into the port.

Note

On adapters that support 40 Gbps speed, Auto is the default option.

Note

You need to choose 40 Gbps as the port speed if you are using a 40 Gbps switch.

This can be one of the following:

• 10 Gbps

• 40 Gbps

• 4 x 10 Gbps

• Auto

• 40 Gbps

• 4 x 10 Gbps

Note

On adapters that support 40 Gbps speed, Auto is the default option.

Note

You need to choose 40 Gbps as the port speed if you are using a 40 Gbps switch.

If checked, link training for port-0 is enabled.

Note

Is supported only if port speed of 40 Gbps on port-0 is selected.

If checked, link training for port-1 is enabled.

Note

Is supported only if port speed of 40 Gbps on port-1 is selected.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

153

Managing Network Adapters

Viewing Network Adapter Properties

Name

PCI Link field

Description

In a single server dual SIOC setup, depending on the information in the

PCI slot field, this indicates the vNICs and vHBA of that adapter associated with the server. For example, if the PCI Slot displays 2, and the PCI Link field displays Server-1 as the field value, it indicates that vNICs and vHBA of adapter-2 are PCI linked to the server 1 host.

Step 4

In the Firmware area, review the following information:

Name Description

Running Version field The firmware version that is currently active.

Backup Version field

Startup Version field

The alternate firmware version installed on the adapter, if any. The backup version is not currently running. To activate it, administrators can click Activate Firmware in the Actions area.

Note

When you install new firmware on the adapter, any existing backup version is deleted and the new firmware becomes the backup version. You must manually activate the new firmware if you want the adapter to run the new version.

The firmware version that will become active the next time the adapter is rebooted.

Bootloader Version field

Status field

The bootloader version associated with the adapter card.

The status of the last firmware activation that was performed on this adapter.

Note

The status is reset each time the adapter is rebooted.

Step 5

In the External Ethernet Interfaces area, review the following information:

Note

You may not see all the fields listed in the table on your screen. Click the icon on the right top corner and choose columns that you want to view.

Name Description

Port column

The uplink port ID.

154

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Network Adapters

Viewing Network Adapter Properties

Name

Admin Speed column

Link Training column

MAC Address column

Link State column

Encap column

Description

The data transfer rate for the port. This can be one of the following:

• 1 Gbps

• 10 Gbps

• 40 Gbps

• 4 x 10 Gbps

• Auto

• 40 Gbps

• 4 x 10 Gbps

Note

You can edit the Admin Speed column. Select the port for which you want to edit the Admin Speed and click on the icon above the Port column. Click on save to save your changes.

You need to choose 40 Gbps as the port speed if you are using a 40 Gbps switch.

Indicates if link training is enabled on the port.

The MAC address of the uplink port.

The current operational state of the uplink port. This can be one of the following:

• Fault

• Link Up

• Link Down

• SFP ID Error

• SFP Not Installed

• SFP Security Check Failed

• Unsupported SFP

The mode in which adapter operates. This can be one of the following:

• CE—Classical Ethernet mode.

• VNTAG—VNTAG mode.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

155

Managing Network Adapters

Viewing Network Adapter Properties

Name

Operating Speed column

Connector Present column

Connector Supported column

Description

The operating rate for the port. This can be one of the following:

• 1 Gbps

• 10 Gbps

• 40 Gbps

• 4 x 10 Gbps

• Auto

• 40 Gbps

• 4 x 10 Gbps

Note

You need to choose 40 Gbps as the port speed if you are using a 40 Gbps switch.

Indicated whether or not the connector is present. This can be one of the following:

• Yes—Connector is present.

• No—Connector not present.

Note

This option is only available for some adapter cards.

Indicates whether or not the connector is supported by Cisco. This can be one of the following:

• Yes—The connector is supported by Cisco.

• No—The connector is not supported by Cisco.

If the connector is not supported then the link will not be up.

Note

This option is only available for some adapter cards.

Connector Type column

Connector Vendor column

The type of the connector.

Note

This option is only available for some adapter cards.

The vendor for the connector.

Note

This option is only available for some adapter cards.

Connector Part Number column The part number of the connector.

Note

This option is only available for some adapter cards.

156

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Network Adapters

Viewing Storage Adapter Properties

Name Description

Connector Part Revision column

The part revision number of the connector.

Note

This option is only available for some adapter cards.

Viewing Storage Adapter Properties

Before You Begin

• The server must be powered on.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

In the Storage menu, click the appropriate LSI MegaRAID or HBA controller.

Step 3

In the Controller area, the Controller Info tab displays by default.

Step 4

In the Work pane's Health/Status area, review the following information:

Name Description

Composite Health field The combined health of the controller, the attached drives, and the battery backup unit. This can be one of the following:

• Good

• Moderate Fault

• Severe Fault

• N/A

Controller Status field

RAID Chip Temperature field

The current status of the controller. This can be one of the following:

• Optimal — The controller is functioning properly.

• Failed — The controller is not functioning.

• Unresponsive — The controller is down.

Temperature of the controller in degree centigrade.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

157

Managing Network Adapters

Viewing Storage Adapter Properties

Name

TTY Log Status field

Description

The current status of the TTY log download. This can be one of the following:

• Not Downloaded

• In Progress

• Complete

Step 5

In the Firmware Versions area, review the following information:

Name Description

Product Name field The name of the MegaRAID controller.

Serial Number field

The serial number of the MegaRAID controller.

Firmware Package Build field The active firmware package version number.

For the firmware component version numbers, see the Running Firmware Images area.

Step 6

In the PCI Info area, review the following information:

Name Description

PCI Slot field

The name of the PCIe slot in which the controller is located.

Vendor ID field The PCI vendor ID, in hexadecimal.

The PCI device ID, in hexadecimal.

Device ID field

SubVendor ID field

SubDevice ID field

The PCI subvendor ID, in hexadecimal.

The PCI subdevice ID, in hexadecimal.

Step 7

In the Manufacturing Data area, review the following information:

Name Description

Manufactured Date field

The date the MegaRAID card was manufactured, in the format yyy-mm-dd.

Revision No field The board revision number, if any.

158

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Network Adapters

Viewing Storage Adapter Properties

Step 8

In the Boot Drive area, review the following information:

Name Description

Boot Drive field

The number of the boot drive.

Boot Drive is PD field If this field displays true, the boot drive is a physical drive.

Step 9

In the Running Firmware Images area, review the following information:

Name Description

BIOS Version field The BIOS option PROM version number.

Firmware Version field

The active firmware version number.

Preboot CLI Version field

WebBIOS Version field

NVDATA Version field

Boot Block Version field

Boot Version field

The pre-boot CLI version number.

The Web BIOS version number.

The non-volatile data (NVDATA) version number.

The boot block version number.

The firmware boot loader version number on the LSI controller.

Step 10 In the Startup Firmware Images area, review the following information:

Name Description

Startup BIOS Version field The BIOS option PROM version that will become active when the host server reboots, if different from the current version.

Startup Firmware Version field The firmware version that will become active when the host server reboots, if different from the current version.

Startup Preboot CLI Version field

Startup WebBIOS Version field

The pre-boot CLI version that will become active when the host server reboots, if different from the current version.

The Web BIOS version that will become active when the host server reboots, if different from the current version.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

159

Managing Network Adapters

Viewing Storage Adapter Properties

Name

Startup NVDATA Version field

Startup Boot Block Version field

Startup Boot Version field

Description

The non-volatile data version that will become active when the host server reboots, if different from the current version.

The boot block version that will become active when the host server reboots, if different from the current version.

The firmware boot loader version that will become active when the host server reboots, if different from the current version.

Step 11 In the Virtual Drive Count area, review the following information:

Name Description

Virtual Drive Count field The number of virtual drives configured on the controller.

Degraded Drive Count field

Offline Drive Count field

The number of virtual drives in a degraded state on the controller.

The number of virtual drives that have failed on the controller.

Step 12 In the Physical Drive Count area, review the following information:

Name Description

Disk Present Count field The number of physical drives present on the controller.

Degraded Disk Count field

Failed Disk Count field

The number of physical drives in a degraded state on the controller.

The number of physical drives that have failed on the controller.

Step 13 In the Settings area, review the following information:

160

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Network Adapters

Viewing Storage Adapter Properties

Name

Predictive Fail Poll Interval field

Rebuild Rate field

Patrol Read Rate field

Consistency Check Rate field

Reconstruction Rate field

Cache Flush Interval field

Max Drives To Spin Up At Once field

Delay Among Spinup Groups field

Description

The number of seconds between predictive failure polls.

During each poll, the controller examines the

Self-Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology

(SMART) data on all physical drives to determine if any is about to fail.

The rate at which the controller rebuilds degraded

RAID volumes.

This rate is shown as a percentage of the total bandwidth available.

The rate at which the controller performs a background read of the physical drives looking for inconsistent data.

This rate is shown as a percentage of the total bandwidth available.

The rate at which the controller scans the virtual drives looking for redundant data inconsistencies and fixing them.

This rate is shown as a percentage of the total bandwidth available.

The rate at which virtual drives are reconstructed when the capacity or RAID level needs to be changed.

This rate is shown as a percentage of the total bandwidth available.

The number of seconds waits before flushing the cache memory to the physical drives.

The number of drives that can be spun up simultaneously after the server is powered on.

The number of seconds to wait before the controller spins up the next set of drives.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

161

Managing Network Adapters

Viewing Storage Adapter Properties

Name

Physical Drive Coercion Mode field

Description

Whether the controller rounds the size of physical drives down to a round number. This can be one of the following:

• None—The controller does not do any rounding.

• 128 MB—Drive sizes are rounded down to the closest multiple of 128 MB.

• 1GB—Drive sizes are rounded down to the closest multiple of 1GB.

Cluster Mode field

Battery Warning field

ECC Bucket Leak Rate field

Expose Enclosure Devices field

Maintain PD Fail History field

If this field displays true, the drives on this controller are shared with controllers on other servers.

If this field displays true, missing battery warnings are disabled.

The error correcting code (ECC) single-bit error bucket leak rate, in minutes.

With ECC, the controller increments an error counter when it encounters a single bit error while reading from a physical drive. The controller decrements the error counter each time the number of minutes defined in this field passes.

If the error counter reaches a system-defined maximum, the controller sends an event message to the system.

If this field displays true, enclosure devices are visible to the host drivers.

If this field displays true, the controller remembers which physical drives were determined to be bad across server reboots.

Enable Copyback on SMART field If this field displays true, the controller copies the contents of the drive to a spare drive if

Self-Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology

(SMART) reports an error.

Enable Copyback to SSD on SMART Error field

If this field displays true, the controller copies the contents of an SSD card to a spare card if SMART reports an error.

Native Command Queuing field If this field displays true, Native Command Queuing

(NCQ) is disabled.

162

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Network Adapters

Viewing Storage Adapter Properties

Name

JBOD field

Description

If this field displays true, JBOD is enabled.

Enable Spin Down of Unconfigured Drives field If this field displays true, the controller spins down unconfigured drives.

Enable SSD Patrol Read field If this field displays true, the controller performs patrol reads on SSD cards.

Auto Enhanced Import field If this field displays true, foreign configurations are automatically imported when the controller boots.

Step 14 In the Capabilities area, review the following information:

Name Description

RAID Levels Supported field The RAID levels supported by the controller. This can be one or more of the following:

• Raid 0—Simple striping.

• Raid 1—Simple mirroring.

• Raid 5—Striping with parity.

• Raid 1E—Integrated offset strip mirroring

• Raid 6—Striping with two parity drives.

• Raid 10—Spanned mirroring.

• Raid 50—Spanned striping with parity.

• Raid 60—Spanned striping with two parity drives.

• Raid srl-03—Spanned secondary RAID level

• Raid 00—Spanned striping.

• Raid 1e-rlq0—Integrated adjacent strip mirroring with no span.

• Raid 1e0-rlq0—Integrated adjacent strip mirroring with span.

Step 15 In the HW Configuration area, review the following information:

Name Description

SAS Address field A MegaRAID controller can have up to 16 serial-attached SCSI (SAS) addresses. This field displays the first 8 SAS addresses, if they are in use.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

163

Managing Network Adapters

Managing vHBAs

Name

BBU Present field

NVRAM Present field

NVRAM Size field

Serial Debugger Present field

Memory Present field

Flash Present field

Flash Size field

Memory Size field

Cache Memory Size field

Number of Backend Ports field

Description

If this field displays true, the battery backup unit is present.

If this field displays true, the NVRAM is present.

The size of the NVRAM, in kilobytes.

If this field displays true, a serial debugger is attached to the RAID card.

If this field displays true, memory is present.

If this field displays true, flash memory is present.

The size of the flash memory, in megabytes.

The size of the memory, in megabytes.

The size of the cache memory, in megabytes.

The number of SATA or SAS ports on the controller.

Step 16 In the Error Counters area, review the following information:

Name Description

Memory Correctable Errors field The number of correctable errors in the controller memory.

Memory Uncorrectable Errors field The number of uncorrectable errors in the controller memory.

Managing vHBAs

Guidelines for Managing vHBAs

When managing vHBAs, consider the following guidelines and restrictions:

• The Cisco UCS P81E Virtual Interface Card and Cisco UCS VIC 1225 Virtual Interface Card provide two vHBAs (fc0 and fc1). You can create up to 16 additional vHBAs on these adapter cards.

164

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Network Adapters

Viewing vHBA Properties

Note

If Network Interface Virtualization (NIV) mode is enabled for the adapter, you must assign a channel number to a vHBA when you create it.

• When using the Cisco UCS P81E Virtual Interface Card or Cisco UCS VIC 1225 Virtual Interface Card in an FCoE application, you must associate the vHBA with the FCoE VLAN. Follow the instructions in the Modifying vHBA Properties section to assign the VLAN.

• After making configuration changes, you must reboot the host for settings to take effect.

Viewing vHBA Properties

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Networking menu.

Step 2

In the Adapter Card pane, click the vHBAs tab.

Step 3

In the vHBAs pane, click fc0 or fc1.

Step 4

In the General area of vHBA Properties, review the information in the following fields:

Name Description

Name field The name of the virtual HBA.

This name cannot be changed after the vHBA has been created.

Target WWNN field

Target WWPN field

FC SAN Boot check box

The WWNN associated with the vHBA.

To let the system generate the WWNN, select AUTO. To specify a

WWNN, click the second radio button and enter the WWNN in the corresponding field.

The WWPN associated with the vHBA.

To let the system generate the WWPN, select AUTO. To specify a

WWPN, click the second radio button and enter the WWPN in the corresponding field.

If checked, the vHBA can be used to perform a SAN boot.

Enable Persistent LUN Binding

check box

If checked, any LUN ID associations are retained in memory until they are manually cleared.

Uplink Port field The uplink port associated with the vHBA.

Note

This value cannot be changed for the system-defined vHBAs fc0 and fc1.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

165

Managing Network Adapters

Viewing vHBA Properties

Name

MAC Address field

Default VLAN field

Class of Service drop-down list

Rate Limit field

PCIe Device Order field

EDTOV field

RATOV field

Max Data Field Size field

Description

The MAC address associated with the vHBA.

To let the system generate the MAC address, select AUTO. To specify an address, click the second radio button and enter the MAC address in the corresponding field.

If there is no default VLAN for this vHBA, click NONE. Otherwise, click the second radio button and enter a VLAN ID between 1 and 4094 in the field.

The CoS for the vHBA.

Select an integer between 0 and 6, with 0 being lowest priority and 6 being the highest priority.

Note

This option cannot be used in VNTAG mode.

The data rate limit for traffic on this vHBA, in Mbps.

If you want this vHBA to have an unlimited data rate, select OFF.

Otherwise, click the second radio button and enter an integer between

1 and 10,000.

Note

This option cannot be used in VNTAG mode.

The order in which this vHBA will be used.

To let the system set the order, select ANY. To specify an order, select the second radio button and enter an integer between 0 and 17.

The error detect timeout value (EDTOV), which is the number of milliseconds to wait before the system assumes that an error has occurred.

Enter an integer between 1,000 and 100,000. The default is 2,000 milliseconds.

The resource allocation timeout value (RATOV), which is the number of milliseconds to wait before the system assumes that a resource cannot be properly allocated.

Enter an integer between 5,000 and 100,000. The default is 10,000 milliseconds.

The maximum size of the Fibre Channel frame payload bytes that the vHBA supports.

Enter an integer between 256 and 2112.

166

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Network Adapters

Viewing vHBA Properties

Name

Channel Number field

Port Profile drop-down list

Description

The channel number that will be assigned to this vHBA.

Enter an integer between 1 and 1,000.

Note

VNTAG mode is required for this option.

The port profile that should be associated with the vHBA, if any.

This field displays the port profiles defined on the switch to which this server is connected.

Note

VNTAG mode is required for this option.

Step 5

In the Error Recovery area, review the information in the following fields:

Name Description

Enable FCP Error Recovery

check box

If checked, the system uses FCP Sequence Level Error Recovery protocol (FC-TAPE).

Link Down Timeout field

Port Down I/O Retries field

The number of milliseconds the uplink port should be offline before it informs the system that the uplink port is down and fabric connectivity has been lost.

Enter an integer between 0 and 240,000.

The number of times an I/O request to a port is returned because the port is busy before the system decides the port is unavailable.

Enter an integer between 0 and 255.

I/O Timeout Retry field

Port Down Timeout field

The time period till which the system waits for timeout before retrying.

When a disk does not respond for I/O within the defined timeout period, the driver aborts the pending command, and resends the same I/O after the timer expires.

Enter an integer between 1 and 59.

The number of milliseconds a remote Fibre Channel port should be offline before informing the SCSI upper layer that the port is unavailable.

Enter an integer between 0 and 240,000.

Step 6

In the Fibre Channel Interrupt area, review the information in the following fields:

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

167

Managing Network Adapters

Viewing vHBA Properties

Name

Interrupt Mode drop-down list

Description

The preferred driver interrupt mode. This can be one of the following:

• MSIx—Message Signaled Interrupts (MSI) with the optional extension. This is the recommended option.

• MSI—MSI only.

• INTx—PCI INTx interrupts.

Step 7

In the Fibre Channel Port area, review the information in the following fields:

Name Description

I/O Throttle Count field The number of I/O operations that can be pending in the vHBA at one time.

Enter an integer between 1 and 1,024.

LUNs per Target field

LUN Queue Depth field

The maximum number of LUNs that the driver will export. This is usually an operating system platform limitation.

Enter an integer between 1 and 1,024. The recommended value is 1024.

The number of commands that the HBA can send or receive in a single chunk per LUN. This parameter adjusts the initial queue depth for all

LUNs on the adapter.

Default value is 20 for physical miniports and 250 for virtual miniports.

Step 8

In the Fibre Channel Port FLOGI area, review the information in the following fields:

Name Description

FLOGI Retries field The number of times that the system tries to log in to the fabric after the first failure.

To specify an unlimited number of retries, select the INFINITE radio button. Otherwise select the second radio button and enter an integer into the corresponding field.

FLOGI Timeout field The number of milliseconds that the system waits before it tries to log in again.

Enter an integer between 1,000 and 255,000.

Step 9

In the Fibre Channel Port PLOGI area, review the information in the following fields:

168

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Network Adapters

Modifying vHBA Properties

Name

PLOGI Retries field

PLOGI Timeout field

Description

The number of times that the system tries to log in to a port after the first failure.

Enter an integer between 0 and 255.

The number of milliseconds that the system waits before it tries to log in again.

Enter an integer between 1,000 and 255,000.

Step 10 In the SCSI I/O area, review the information in the following fields:

Name Description

CDB Transmit Queue Count

field

The number of SCSI I/O queue resources the system should allocate.

Enter an integer between 1 and 8.

CDB Transmit Queue Ring Size

field

The number of descriptors in each SCSI I/O queue.

Enter an integer between 64 and 512.

Step 11 In the Receive/Transmit Queues area, review the information in the following fields:

Name Description

FC Work Queue Ring Size field The number of descriptors in each transmit queue.

Enter an integer between 64 and 128.

FC Receive Queue Ring Size field

The number of descriptors in each receive queue.

Enter an integer between 64 and 128.

Modifying vHBA Properties

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Networking menu.

Step 2

In the Adapter Card pane, click the vHBAs tab.

Step 3

In the vHBAs pane, click fc0 or fc1.

Step 4

In the General area, update the following fields:

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

169

Managing Network Adapters

Modifying vHBA Properties

Name

Name field

Target WWNN field

Target WWPN field

FC SAN Boot check box

Rate Limit field

Description

The name of the virtual HBA.

This name cannot be changed after the vHBA has been created.

The WWNN associated with the vHBA.

To let the system generate the WWNN, select AUTO. To specify a

WWNN, click the second radio button and enter the WWNN in the corresponding field.

The WWPN associated with the vHBA.

To let the system generate the WWPN, select AUTO. To specify a

WWPN, click the second radio button and enter the WWPN in the corresponding field.

If checked, the vHBA can be used to perform a SAN boot.

Enable Persistent LUN Binding

check box

If checked, any LUN ID associations are retained in memory until they are manually cleared.

Uplink Port field

MAC Address field

The uplink port associated with the vHBA.

Note

This value cannot be changed for the system-defined vHBAs fc0 and fc1.

The MAC address associated with the vHBA.

To let the system generate the MAC address, select AUTO. To specify an address, click the second radio button and enter the MAC address in the corresponding field.

Default VLAN field

If there is no default VLAN for this vHBA, click NONE. Otherwise, click the second radio button and enter a VLAN ID between 1 and 4094 in the field.

Class of Service drop-down list The CoS for the vHBA.

Select an integer between 0 and 6, with 0 being lowest priority and 6 being the highest priority.

Note

This option cannot be used in VNTAG mode.

The data rate limit for traffic on this vHBA, in Mbps.

If you want this vHBA to have an unlimited data rate, select OFF.

Otherwise, click the second radio button and enter an integer between

1 and 10,000.

Note

This option cannot be used in VNTAG mode.

170

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Network Adapters

Modifying vHBA Properties

Name

PCIe Device Order field

EDTOV field

RATOV field

Max Data Field Size field

Channel Number field

Port Profile drop-down list

Description

The order in which this vHBA will be used.

To let the system set the order, select ANY. To specify an order, select the second radio button and enter an integer between 0 and 17.

The error detect timeout value (EDTOV), which is the number of milliseconds to wait before the system assumes that an error has occurred.

Enter an integer between 1,000 and 100,000. The default is 2,000 milliseconds.

The resource allocation timeout value (RATOV), which is the number of milliseconds to wait before the system assumes that a resource cannot be properly allocated.

Enter an integer between 5,000 and 100,000. The default is 10,000 milliseconds.

The maximum size of the Fibre Channel frame payload bytes that the vHBA supports.

Enter an integer between 256 and 2112.

The channel number that will be assigned to this vHBA.

Enter an integer between 1 and 1,000.

Note

VNTAG mode is required for this option.

The port profile that should be associated with the vHBA, if any.

This field displays the port profiles defined on the switch to which this server is connected.

Note

VNTAG mode is required for this option.

Step 5

In the Error Recovery area, update the following fields:

Name Description

Enable FCP Error Recovery

check box

If checked, the system uses FCP Sequence Level Error Recovery protocol (FC-TAPE).

Link Down Timeout field The number of milliseconds the uplink port should be offline before it informs the system that the uplink port is down and fabric connectivity has been lost.

Enter an integer between 0 and 240,000.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

171

Managing Network Adapters

Modifying vHBA Properties

Name

Port Down I/O Retries field

I/O Timeout Retry field

Port Down Timeout field

Description

The number of times an I/O request to a port is returned because the port is busy before the system decides the port is unavailable.

Enter an integer between 0 and 255.

The time period till which the system waits for timeout before retrying.

When a disk does not respond for I/O within the defined timeout period, the driver aborts the pending command, and resends the same I/O after the timer expires.

Enter an integer between 1 and 59.

The number of milliseconds a remote Fibre Channel port should be offline before informing the SCSI upper layer that the port is unavailable.

Enter an integer between 0 and 240,000.

Step 6

In the Fibre Channel Interrupt area, update the following fields:

Name Description

Interrupt Mode drop-down list The preferred driver interrupt mode. This can be one of the following:

• MSIx—Message Signaled Interrupts (MSI) with the optional extension. This is the recommended option.

• MSI—MSI only.

• INTx—PCI INTx interrupts.

Step 7

In the Fibre Channel Port area, update the following fields:

Name Description

I/O Throttle Count field The number of I/O operations that can be pending in the vHBA at one time.

Enter an integer between 1 and 1,024.

LUNs per Target field

LUN Queue Depth field

The maximum number of LUNs that the driver will export. This is usually an operating system platform limitation.

Enter an integer between 1 and 1,024. The recommended value is 1024.

The number of commands that the HBA can send or receive in a single chunk per LUN. This parameter adjusts the initial queue depth for all

LUNs on the adapter.

Default value is 20 for physical miniports and 250 for virtual miniports.

172

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Network Adapters

Modifying vHBA Properties

Step 8

In the Fibre Channel Port FLOGI area, update the following fields:

Name Description

FLOGI Retries field

The number of times that the system tries to log in to the fabric after the first failure.

To specify an unlimited number of retries, select the INFINITE radio button. Otherwise select the second radio button and enter an integer into the corresponding field.

FLOGI Timeout field

The number of milliseconds that the system waits before it tries to log in again.

Enter an integer between 1,000 and 255,000.

Step 9

In the Fibre Channel Port PLOGI area, update the following fields:

Name Description

PLOGI Retries field The number of times that the system tries to log in to a port after the first failure.

Enter an integer between 0 and 255.

PLOGI Timeout field The number of milliseconds that the system waits before it tries to log in again.

Enter an integer between 1,000 and 255,000.

Step 10 In the SCSI I/O area, update the following fields:

Name Description

CDB Transmit Queue Count

field

The number of SCSI I/O queue resources the system should allocate.

Enter an integer between 1 and 8.

CDB Transmit Queue Ring Size

field

The number of descriptors in each SCSI I/O queue.

Enter an integer between 64 and 512.

Step 11 In the Receive/Transmit Queues area, update the following fields:

Name Description

FC Work Queue Ring Size field The number of descriptors in each transmit queue.

Enter an integer between 64 and 128.

FC Receive Queue Ring Size field The number of descriptors in each receive queue.

Enter an integer between 64 and 128.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

173

Managing Network Adapters

Creating a vHBA

Step 12 Click Save Changes.

Creating a vHBA

The adapter provides two permanent vHBAs. If NIV mode is enabled, you can create up to 16 additional vHBAs.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Networking menu.

Step 2

In the Adapter Card pane, click the vHBAs tab.

Step 3

In the Host Fibre Channel Interfaces area, choose one of these actions:

• To create a vHBA using default configuration settings, click Add vHBA.

• To create a vHBA using the same configuration settings as an existing vHBA, select that vHBA and click Clone vHBA.

The Add vHBA dialog box appears.

Step 4

In the Add vHBA dialog box, enter a name for the vHBA in the Name entry box.

Step 5

Click Add vHBA.

What to Do Next

• Reboot the server to create the vHBA.

• If configuration changes are required, configure the new vHBA as described in

Modifying vHBA

Properties, on page 169

Deleting a vHBA

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Networking menu.

Step 2

In the Adapter Card pane, click the vHBAs tab.

Step 3

In the Host Fibre Channel Interfaces area, select a vHBA or vHBAs from the table.

Note

You cannot delete either of the two default vHBAs, fc0 or

fc1.

Step 4

Click Delete vHBAs and click OK to confirm.

174

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Network Adapters vHBA Boot Table

vHBA Boot Table

In the vHBA boot table, you can specify up to four LUNs from which the server can boot.

Creating a Boot Table Entry

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Networking menu.

Step 2

In the Adapter Card pane, click the vHBAs tab.

Step 3

In the Fibre Channel Interfaces area, scroll down to the Boot Table area.

Step 4

Click the Add Boot Entry button to open the Add Boot Entry dialog box.

Step 5

In the Add Boot Entry dialog box, review the following information and perform the actions specified:

Name Description

Target WWPN field The World Wide Port Name (WWPN) that corresponds to the location of the boot image.

Enter the WWPN in the format hh:hh:hh:hh:hh:hh:hh:hh.

LUN ID field The LUN ID that corresponds to the location of the boot image.

Enter an ID between 0 and 255.

Add Boot Entry button

Reset Values button

Cancel button

Adds the specified location to the boot table.

Clears the values currently entered in the fields.

Closes the dialog box without saving any changes made while the dialog box was open.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

175

Managing Network Adapters

Deleting a Boot Table Entry

Deleting a Boot Table Entry

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Networking menu.

Step 2

In the Adapter Card pane, click the vHBAs tab.

Step 3

In the Fibre Channel Interfaces area, scroll down to the Boot Table area.

Step 4

In the Boot Table area, click the entry to be deleted.

Step 5

Click Delete Boot Entry and click OK to confirm.

vHBA Persistent Binding

Persistent binding ensures that the system-assigned mapping of Fibre Channel targets is maintained after a reboot.

Viewing Persistent Bindings

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Networking menu.

Step 2

In the Adapter Card pane, click the vHBAs tab.

Step 3

In the vHBAs pane, click fc0 or fc1.

Step 4

In the Persistent Bindings dialog box, review the following information:

Name Description

Index column The unique identifier for the binding.

Target WWPN column

The target World Wide Port Name with which the binding is associated.

Host WWPN column

Bus ID column

Target ID column

The host World Wide Port Name with which the binding is associated.

The bus ID with which the binding is associated.

The target ID on the host system with which the binding is associated.

Clears all unused bindings and resets the ones that are in use.

Rebuild Persistent Bindings

button

Close button Closes the dialog box and saves your changes.

176

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Network Adapters

Rebuilding Persistent Bindings

Step 5

Click Close.

Rebuilding Persistent Bindings

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Networking menu.

Step 2

In the Adapter Card pane, click the vHBAs tab.

Step 3

In the vHBAs pane, click fc0 or fc1.

Step 4

In the Fibre Channel Interfaces area, scroll down to the Persistent Bindings area.

Step 5

Click the Rebuild Persistent Bindings button.

Step 6

Click OK to confirm.

Managing vNICs

Guidelines for Managing vNICs

When managing vNICs, consider the following guidelines and restrictions:

• The Cisco UCS P81E Virtual Interface Card and Cisco UCS VIC 1225 Virtual Interface Card provide two default vNICs (eth0 and eth1). You can create up to 16 additional vNICs on these adapter cards.

Note

If Network Interface Virtualization (NIV) mode is enabled for the adapter, you must assign a channel number to a vNIC when you create it.

• After making configuration changes, you must reboot the host for settings to take effect.

Cisco C-series servers use Remote Direct Memory Access (RDMA) over Converged Ethernet (RoCE) for packet transfers. RoCE defines the mechanism of performing RDMA over ethernet, based on the similar mechanism of RDMA over Infiniband. However, RoCE, with its performance oriented characteristics, delivers a superior performance compared to traditional network socket implementation because of the lower latency, lower CPU utilization and higher utilization of network bandwidth. RoCE meets the requirement of moving large amount of data across networks very efficiently.

The RoCE firmware requires the following configuration parameters provided by Cisco UCS Manager for better vNIC performance:

• Queue Pairs

• Memory Regions

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

177

Managing Network Adapters

Viewing vNIC Properties

• Resource Groups

Guidelines and Limitations for SMB Direct with RoCE

• Microsoft SMB Direct with RoCE is supported:

◦On Windows 2012 R2.

◦On Windows 2016.

• Cisco UCS C-Series server does not support more than 4 RoCE-enabled vNICs per adapter.

• Cisco UCS C-Series server does not support RoCE with NVGRE, VXLAN, VMQ, or usNIC.

• Maximum number of queue pairs per adapter is 8192.

• Maximum number of memory regions per adapter is 524288.

• RoCE configuration is supported between Cisco adapters. Interoperability between Cisco adapters and third party adapters is not supported.

Important

It is required to configure the no-drop QOS policy settings at the switches in the RDMA traffic path.

Viewing vNIC Properties

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Networking menu.

Step 2

In the Adapter Card pane, click the vNICs tab.

Step 3

In the vNICs pane, click eth0 or eth1.

Step 4

In the Ethernet Interfaces pane's vNIC Properties area, review the information in the following fields:

Name Description

Name field The name for the virtual NIC.

This name cannot be changed after the vNIC has been created.

CDN field

MTU field

The Consistent Device Name (CDN) that you can assign to the ethernet vNICs on the VIC cards. Assigning a specific CDN to a device helps in identifying it on the host OS.

Note

This feature works only when the CDN Support for VIC token is enabled in the BIOS.

The maximum transmission unit, or packet size, that this vNIC accepts.

Enter an integer between 1500 and 9000.

178

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Network Adapters

Viewing vNIC Properties

Name

Uplink Port drop-down list

MAC Address field

Class of Service drop-down list

Trust Host CoS check box

PCI Order field

Default VLAN field

VLAN Mode drop-down list

Rate Limit field

Enable PXE Boot check box

Channel Number field

Description

The uplink port associated with this vNIC. All traffic for this vNIC goes through this uplink port.

The MAC address associated with the vNIC.

To let the adapter select an available MAC address from its internal pool, select Auto. To specify an address, click the second radio button and enter the MAC address in the corresponding field.

The class of service to associate with traffic from this vNIC.

Select an integer between 0 and 6, with 0 being lowest priority and 6 being the highest priority.

Note

This option cannot be used in VNTAG mode.

Check this box if you want the vNIC to use the class of service provided by the host operating system.

The order in which this vNIC will be used.

To specify an order, enter an integer within the displayed range.

If there is no default VLAN for this vNIC, click NONE. Otherwise, click the second radio button and enter a VLAN ID between 1 and 4094 in the field.

Note

This option cannot be used in VNTAG mode.

If you want to use VLAN trunking, select TRUNK. Otherwise, select

ACCESS.

Note

This option cannot be used in VNTAG mode.

If you want this vNIC to have an unlimited data rate, select OFF.

Otherwise, click the second radio button and enter a rate limit in the associated field.

Enter an integer between 1 and 10,000 Mbps.

You can enter an integer between 1 and 40,000 Mbps for VIC 13xx controllers.

Note

This option cannot be used in VNTAG mode.

Check this box if the vNIC can be used to perform a PXE boot.

Select the channel number that will be assigned to this vNIC.

Note

VNTAG mode is required for this option.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

179

Managing Network Adapters

Viewing vNIC Properties

Name

PCI Link field

Description

The link through which vNICs can be connected. These are the following values:

• 0 - The first cross-edged link where the vNIC is placed.

• 1 - The second cross-edged link where the vNIC is placed.

Note

• This option is available only on some Cisco UCS C-Series servers.

Port Profile drop-down list

Select the port profile that should be associated with the vNIC.

This field displays the port profiles defined on the switch to which this server is connected.

Note

VNTAG mode is required for this option.

Enable Uplink Failover check box

Check this box if traffic on this vNIC should fail over to the secondary interface if there are communication problems.

Note

VNTAG mode is required for this option.

Enable VMQ check box Check this box to enable Virtual Machine Queue (VMQ).

Note

Ensure that VMQ is not enabled when SR-IOV or netflow option is enabled on the adapter.

This option is available only on some Cisco UCS C-Series servers.

Enable aRFS check box

Enable NVGRE check box

Check this box to enable Accelerated Receive Flow steering (aRFS).

This option is available only on some Cisco UCS C-Series servers.

Check this box to enable Network Virtualization using Generic Routing

Encapsulation.

• This option is available only on some Cisco UCS C-Series servers.

• This option is available only on C-Series servers with Cisco VIC

1385 cards.

Enable VXLAN check box

Advanced Filter check box

Check this box to enable Virtual Extensible LAN.

• This option is available only on some Cisco UCS C-Series servers.

• This option is available only on C-Series servers with Cisco VIC

1385 cards.

Check this box to enable advanced filter options in vNICs.

180

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Network Adapters

Viewing vNIC Properties

Name

Failback Timeout field

Description

After a vNIC has started using its secondary interface, this setting controls how long the primary interface must be available before the system resumes using the primary interface for the vNIC.

Enter a number of seconds between 0 and 600.

Note

VNTAG mode is required for this option.

Step 5

In the Ethernet Interrupt area, review the information in the following fields:

Name Description

Interrupt Count field The number of interrupt resources to allocate. In general, this value should be equal to the number of completion queue resources.

Enter an integer between 1 and 514.

Coalescing Time field The time to wait between interrupts or the idle period that must be encountered before an interrupt is sent.

Enter an integer between 1 and 65535. To turn off interrupt coalescing, enter 0 (zero) in this field.

Coalescing Type drop-down list This can be one of the following:

• MIN—The system waits for the time specified in the Coalescing

Time field before sending another interrupt event.

• IDLE—The system does not send an interrupt until there is a period of no activity lasting as least as long as the time specified in the Coalescing Time field.

Interrupt Mode drop-down list The preferred driver interrupt mode. This can be one of the following:

• MSI-X—Message Signaled Interrupts (MSI) with the optional extension. This is the recommended option.

• MSI—MSI only.

• INTx—PCI INTx interrupts.

Step 6

In the Ethernet Receive Queue area, review the information in the following fields:

Name Description

Receive Queue Count field The number of receive queue resources to allocate.

Enter an integer between 1 and 256.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

181

Managing Network Adapters

Viewing vNIC Properties

Name

Receive Queue Ring Size field

Description

The number of descriptors in each receive queue.

Enter an integer between 64 and 4096.

Step 7

In the Ethernet Transmit Queue area, review the information in the following fields:

Name Description

Transmit Queue Count field The number of transmit queue resources to allocate.

Enter an integer between 1 and 256.

Transmit Queue Ring Size field The number of descriptors in each transmit queue.

Enter an integer between 64 and 4096.

Step 8

In the Completion Queue area, review the information in the following fields:

Name Description

Completion Queue Count field

The number of completion queue resources to allocate. In general, the number of completion queue resources you should allocate is equal to the number of transmit queue resources plus the number of receive queue resources.

Enter an integer between 1 and 512.

Completion Queue Ring Size

field

The number of descriptors in each completion queue.

This value cannot be changed.

Step 9

In the TCP Offload area, review the information in the following fields:

Name Description

Enable TCP Segmentation

Offload check box

If checked, the CPU sends large TCP packets to the hardware to be segmented. This option may reduce CPU overhead and increase throughput rate.

If cleared, the CPU segments large packets.

Note

This option is also known as Large Send Offload

(LSO).

Enable TCP Rx Offload

Checksum Validation check box

If checked, the CPU sends all packet checksums to the hardware for validation. This option may reduce CPU overhead.

If cleared, the CPU validates all packet checksums.

182

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Network Adapters

Viewing vNIC Properties

Name Description

Enable TCP Tx Offload

Checksum Generation check box

If checked, the CPU sends all packets to the hardware so that the checksum can be calculated. This option may reduce CPU overhead.

If cleared, the CPU calculates all packet checksums.

Enable Large Receive check box If checked, the hardware reassembles all segmented packets before sending them to the CPU. This option may reduce CPU utilization and increase inbound throughput.

If cleared, the CPU processes all large packets.

Step 10 In the Receive Side Scaling area, review the information in the following fields:

Name Description

Enable TCP Receive Side Scaling

check box

Receive Side Scaling (RSS) distributes network receive processing across multiple CPUs in multiprocessor systems.

If checked, network receive processing is shared across processors whenever possible.

If cleared, network receive processing is always handled by a single processor even if additional processors are available.

Enable IPv4 RSS check box If checked, RSS is enabled on IPv4 networks.

Enable TCP-IPv4 RSS check box If checked, RSS is enabled for TCP transmissions across IPv4 networks.

Enable IPv6 RSS check box If checked, RSS is enabled on IPv6 networks.

Enable TCP-IPv6 RSS check box

If checked, RSS is enabled for TCP transmissions across IPv6 networks.

Enable IPv6 Extension RSS

check box

If checked, RSS is enabled for IPv6 extensions.

Enable TCP-IPv6 Extension RSS

check box

If checked, RSS is enabled for TCP transmissions across IPv6 networks.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

183

Managing Network Adapters

Modifying vNIC Properties

Modifying vNIC Properties

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Networking menu.

Step 2

In the Adapter Card pane, click the vNICs tab.

Step 3

In the vNICs pane, click eth0 or eth1.

Step 4

In the Ethernet Interfaces pane's vNIC Properties area, update the following fields:

Name Description

Name field

The name for the virtual NIC.

This name cannot be changed after the vNIC has been created.

CDN field

The Consistent Device Name (CDN) that you can assign to the ethernet vNICs on the VIC cards. Assigning a specific CDN to a device helps in identifying it on the host OS.

Note

This feature works only when the CDN Support for VIC token is enabled in the BIOS.

MTU field The maximum transmission unit, or packet size, that this vNIC accepts.

Enter an integer between 1500 and 9000.

Uplink Port drop-down list

MAC Address field

Class of Service drop-down list

Trust Host CoS check box

The uplink port associated with this vNIC. All traffic for this vNIC goes through this uplink port.

The MAC address associated with the vNIC.

To let the adapter select an available MAC address from its internal pool, select Auto. To specify an address, click the second radio button and enter the MAC address in the corresponding field.

The class of service to associate with traffic from this vNIC.

Select an integer between 0 and 6, with 0 being lowest priority and 6 being the highest priority.

Note

This option cannot be used in VNTAG mode.

Check this box if you want the vNIC to use the class of service provided by the host operating system.

184

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Network Adapters

Modifying vNIC Properties

Name

PCI Link field

PCI Order field

Default VLAN field

VLAN Mode drop-down list

Rate Limit field

Enable PXE Boot check box

Channel Number field

Description

The link through which vNICs can be connected. These are the following values:

• 0 - The first cross-edged link where the vNIC is placed.

• 1 - The second cross-edged link where the vNIC is placed.

Note

• This option is available only on some Cisco UCS C-Series servers.

• This option is available only on C-Series servers with

Cisco VIC 1385 cards.

The order in which this vNIC will be used.

To let the system set the order, select Any. To specify an order, select the second radio button and enter an integer between 0 and 17.

If there is no default VLAN for this vNIC, click NONE. Otherwise, click the second radio button and enter a VLAN ID between 1 and 4094 in the field.

Note

This option cannot be used in VNTAG mode.

If you want to use VLAN trunking, select TRUNK. Otherwise, select

ACCESS. When the VLAN is set to ACCESS mode, any frame received from the specified default VLAN (1-4094) that is received from the switch with a TAG removes that TAG when it is sent to the host OS through the vNIC.

Note

This option cannot be used in VNTAG mode.

If you want this vNIC to have an unlimited data rate, select OFF.

Otherwise, click the second radio button and enter a rate limit in the associated field.

Enter an integer between 1 and 10,000 Mbps or 40,000 Mbps depending on the adapter card you choose.

Note

This option cannot be used in VNTAG mode.

Check this box if the vNIC can be used to perform a PXE boot.

Select the channel number that will be assigned to this vNIC.

Note

VNTAG mode is required for this option.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

185

Managing Network Adapters

Modifying vNIC Properties

Name

Port Profile drop-down list

Description

Select the port profile that should be associated with the vNIC.

This field displays the port profiles defined on the switch to which this server is connected.

Note

VNTAG mode is required for this option.

Enable Uplink Failover check box Check this box if traffic on this vNIC should fail over to the secondary interface if there are communication problems.

Note

VNTAG mode is required for this option.

Enable VMQ check box Check this box to enable Virtual Machine Queue (VMQ).

Note

Ensure that VMQ is not enabled when SR-IOV or netflow option is enabled on the adapter.

This option is available only on some Cisco UCS C-Series servers.

Enable aRFS check box

Enable NVGRE check box

Check this box to enable Accelerated Receive Flow steering (aRFS).

This option is available only on some Cisco UCS C-Series servers.

Check this box to enable Network Virtualization using Generic Routing

Encapsulation.

• This option is available only on some Cisco UCS C-Series servers.

• This option is available only on C-Series servers with Cisco VIC

1385 cards.

Enable VXLAN check box

Failback Timeout field

Check this box to enable Virtual Extensible LAN.

• This option is available only on some Cisco UCS C-Series servers.

• This option is available only on C-Series servers with Cisco VIC

1385 cards.

After a vNIC has started using its secondary interface, this setting controls how long the primary interface must be available before the system resumes using the primary interface for the vNIC.

Enter a number of seconds between 0 and 600.

Note

VNTAG mode is required for this option.

Step 5

In the Ethernet Interrupt area, update the following fields:

186

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Network Adapters

Modifying vNIC Properties

Name

Interrupt Count field

Coalescing Time field

Description

The number of interrupt resources to allocate. In general, this value should be equal to the number of completion queue resources.

Enter an integer between 1 and 514.

The time to wait between interrupts or the idle period that must be encountered before an interrupt is sent.

Enter an integer between 1 and 65535. To turn off interrupt coalescing, enter 0 (zero) in this field.

Coalescing Type drop-down list

This can be one of the following:

• MIN—The system waits for the time specified in the Coalescing

Time field before sending another interrupt event.

• IDLE—The system does not send an interrupt until there is a period of no activity lasting as least as long as the time specified in the Coalescing Time field.

Interrupt Mode drop-down list The preferred driver interrupt mode. This can be one of the following:

• MSI-X—Message Signaled Interrupts (MSI) with the optional extension. This is the recommended option.

• MSI—MSI only.

• INTx—PCI INTx interrupts.

Step 6

In the Ethernet Receive Queue area, update the following fields:

Name Description

Receive Queue Count field The number of receive queue resources to allocate.

Enter an integer between 1 and 256.

Receive Queue Ring Size field The number of descriptors in each receive queue.

Enter an integer between 64 and 4096.

Step 7

In the Ethernet Transmit Queue area, update the following fields:

Name Description

Transmit Queue Count field The number of transmit queue resources to allocate.

Enter an integer between 1 and 256.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

187

Managing Network Adapters

Modifying vNIC Properties

Name

Transmit Queue Ring Size field

Description

The number of descriptors in each transmit queue.

Enter an integer between 64 and 4096.

Step 8

In the Completion Queue area, update the following fields:

Name Description

Completion Queue Count field The number of completion queue resources to allocate. In general, the number of completion queue resources you should allocate is equal to the number of transmit queue resources plus the number of receive queue resources.

Enter an integer between 1 and 512.

Completion Queue Ring Size

field

The number of descriptors in each completion queue.

This value cannot be changed.

Step 9

In the TCP Offload area, update the following fields:

Name Description

Enable TCP Segmentation

Offload check box

If checked, the CPU sends large TCP packets to the hardware to be segmented. This option may reduce CPU overhead and increase throughput rate.

If cleared, the CPU segments large packets.

Note

This option is also known as Large Send Offload

(LSO).

Enable TCP Rx Offload

Checksum Validation check box

If checked, the CPU sends all packet checksums to the hardware for validation. This option may reduce CPU overhead.

If cleared, the CPU validates all packet checksums.

Enable TCP Tx Offload

Checksum Generation check box

If checked, the CPU sends all packets to the hardware so that the checksum can be calculated. This option may reduce CPU overhead.

If cleared, the CPU calculates all packet checksums.

Enable Large Receive check box If checked, the hardware reassembles all segmented packets before sending them to the CPU. This option may reduce CPU utilization and increase inbound throughput.

If cleared, the CPU processes all large packets.

Step 10 In the Receive Side Scaling area, update the following fields:

188

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Network Adapters

Creating a vNIC

Name Description

Enable TCP Receive Side Scaling

check box

Receive Side Scaling (RSS) distributes network receive processing across multiple CPUs in multiprocessor systems.

If checked, network receive processing is shared across processors whenever possible.

If cleared, network receive processing is always handled by a single processor even if additional processors are available.

Enable IPv4 RSS check box If checked, RSS is enabled on IPv4 networks.

Enable TCP-IPv4 RSS check box

If checked, RSS is enabled for TCP transmissions across IPv4 networks.

Enable IPv6 RSS check box If checked, RSS is enabled on IPv6 networks.

Enable TCP-IPv6 RSS check box If checked, RSS is enabled for TCP transmissions across IPv6 networks.

Enable IPv6 Extension RSS

check box

If checked, RSS is enabled for IPv6 extensions.

Enable TCP-IPv6 Extension RSS

check box

If checked, RSS is enabled for TCP transmissions across IPv6 networks.

Step 11 Click Save Changes.

Creating a vNIC

The adapter provides two permanent vNICs. You can create up to 16 additional vNICs.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Networking menu.

Step 2

In the Adapter Card pane, click the vNICs tab.

Step 3

In the Host Ethernet Interfaces area, choose one of these actions:

• To create a vNIC using default configuration settings, click Add vNIC.

• To create a vNIC using the same configuration settings as an existing vNIC, select that vNIC and click

Clone vNIC.

The Add vNIC dialog box appears.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

189

Managing Network Adapters

Deleting a vNIC

Step 4

In the Add vNIC dialog box, enter a name for the vNIC in the Name entry box.

Step 5

(Optional) In the Add vNIC dialog box, enter a channel number for the vNIC in the Channel Number entry box.

Note

If NIV is enabled on the adapter, you must assign a channel number for the vNIC when you create it.

Step 6

Click Add vNIC.

What to Do Next

If configuration changes are required, configure the new vNIC as described in

Modifying vNIC Properties,

on page 184 .

Deleting a vNIC

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Networking menu.

Step 2

In the Adapter Card pane, click the vNICs tab.

Step 3

In the Host Ethernet Interfaces area, select a vNIC from the table.

Note

You cannot delete either of the two default vNICs, eth0 or

eth1.

Step 4

Click Delete vNIC and click OK to confirm.

Managing Cisco usNIC

Overview of Cisco usNIC

The Cisco user-space NIC (Cisco usNIC) feature improves the performance of software applications that run on the Cisco UCS servers in your data center by bypassing the kernel when sending and receiving networking packets. The applications interact directly with a Cisco UCS VIC second generation or later generation adapter, such as the , which improves the networking performance of your high-performance computing cluster. To benefit from Cisco usNIC, your applications must use the Message Passing Interface (MPI) instead of sockets or other communication APIs.

Cisco usNIC offers the following benefits for your MPI applications:

• Provides a low-latency and high-throughput communication transport.

• Employs the standard and application-independent Ethernet protocol.

• Takes advantage of lowlatency forwarding, Unified Fabric, and integrated management support in the following Cisco data center platforms:

• Cisco UCS server

190

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Network Adapters

Managing Cisco usNIC

• Cisco UCS VIC second generation or later generation adapter

• 10 or 40GbE networks

Standard Ethernet applications use user-space socket libraries, which invoke the networking stack in the Linux kernel. The networking stack then uses the Cisco eNIC driver to communicate with the Cisco VIC hardware.

The following figure shows the contrast between a regular software application and an MPI application that uses Cisco usNIC.

Figure 1: Kernel-Based Network Communication versus Cisco usNIC-Based Communication

Viewing and Configuring Cisco usNIC using the Cisco IMC GUI

Before You Begin

You must log in to the Cisco IMC GUI with administrator privileges to perform this task. Click Play on this video to watch how to configure Cisco usNIC in CIMC.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

191

Managing Network Adapters

Managing Cisco usNIC

Procedure

Step 1

Log into the Cisco IMC GUI.

For more information about how to log into Cisco IMC, see Cisco UCS C-Series Servers Integrated Management

Controller GUI Configuration Guide .

Step 2

In the Navigation pane, click the Networking menu.

Step 3

In the Adapter Card pane, click the vNICs tab.

Step 4

In the vNICs pane, click eth0 or eth1.

Step 5

In the Ethernet Interfaces area, select the usNIC area.

Step 6

In the Properties area, review and update the following fields:

Name Description

Name

usNIC field

The name for the vNIC that is the parent of the usNIC.

Note

This field is read-only.

The number of usNICs assigned to the specific vNIC.

Enter an integer between 0 and 225.

To assign additional usNICs to a specified vNIC, enter value higher than the existing value.

To delete usNICs from a specified vNIC, enter value smaller than the existing value.

To delete all the usNICs assigned to a vNIC, enter zero.

Transmit Queue Count field The number of transmit queue resources to allocate.

Enter an integer between 1 and 256.

Receive Queue Count field

Completion Queue Count field

Transmit Queue Ring Size field

Receive Queue Ring Size field

The number of receive queue resources to allocate.

Enter an integer between 1 and 256.

Enter an integer between 1 and 512.

The number of descriptors in each transmit queue.

Enter an integer between 64 and 4096.

The number of descriptors in each receive queue.

Enter an integer between 64 and 4096.

192

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Network Adapters

Managing Cisco usNIC

Name

Interrupt Count field

Interrupt Coalescing Type drop-down list

Interrupt Coalescing Timer Time field

Class of Service field

TCP Segment Offload check box

Large Receive check box

TCP Tx Checksum check box

Description

The number of interrupt resources to allocate. In general, this value should be equal to the number of completion queue resources.

Enter an integer between 1 and 514.

This can be one of the following:

• MIN—The system waits for the time specified in the Coalescing Time field before sending another interrupt event.

• IDLE—The system does not send an interrupt until there is a period of no activity lasting as least as long as the time specified in the

Coalescing Time field.

The time to wait between interrupts or the idle period that must be encountered before an interrupt is sent.

Enter an integer between 1 and 65535. To turn off interrupt coalescing, enter 0 (zero) in this field.

The class of service to associate with traffic from this usNIC.

Select an integer between 0 and 6, with 0 being lowest priority and 6 being the highest priority.

Note

This option cannot be used in VNTAG mode.

If checked, the CPU sends large TCP packets to the hardware to be segmented. This option may reduce

CPU overhead and increase throughput rate.

If cleared, the CPU segments large packets.

Note

This option is also known as Large Send

Offload (LSO).

If checked, the hardware reassembles all segmented packets before sending them to the CPU. This option may reduce CPU utilization and increase inbound throughput.

If cleared, the CPU processes all large packets.

If checked, the CPU sends all packets to the hardware so that the checksum can be calculated. This option may reduce CPU overhead.

If cleared, the CPU calculates all packet checksums.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

193

Managing Network Adapters

Managing Cisco usNIC

Name

TCP Rx Checksum check box

Step 7

Click Save Changes.

The changes take effect upon the next server reboot.

Description

If checked, the CPU sends all packet checksums to the hardware for validation. This option may reduce

CPU overhead.

If cleared, the CPU validates all packet checksums.

Viewing usNIC Properties

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Networking menu.

Step 2

In the Adapter Card pane, click the vNICs tab.

Step 3

In the vNICs pane, click eth0 or eth1.

Step 4

In the Host Ethernet Interfaces pane's usNIC Properties area, review the information in the following fields:

Name Description

Name

The name for the vNIC that is the parent of the usNIC.

Note

This field is read-only.

usNIC field

The number of usNICs assigned to the specific vNIC.

Enter an integer between 0 and 225.

To assign additional usNICs to a specified vNIC, enter value higher than the existing value.

To delete usNICs from a specified vNIC, enter value smaller than the existing value.

To delete all the usNICs assigned to a vNIC, enter zero.

Transmit Queue Count field

Receive Queue Count field

The number of transmit queue resources to allocate.

Enter an integer between 1 and 256.

The number of receive queue resources to allocate.

Enter an integer between 1 and 256.

194

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Network Adapters

Managing Cisco usNIC

Name

Completion Queue Count field

Transmit Queue Ring Size field

Receive Queue Ring Size field

Interrupt Count field

Interrupt Coalescing Type drop-down list

Interrupt Coalescing Timer Time field

Class of Service field

Description

Enter an integer between 1 and 512.

The number of descriptors in each transmit queue.

Enter an integer between 64 and 4096.

The number of descriptors in each receive queue.

Enter an integer between 64 and 4096.

The number of interrupt resources to allocate. In general, this value should be equal to the number of completion queue resources.

Enter an integer between 1 and 514.

This can be one of the following:

• MIN—The system waits for the time specified in the Coalescing Time field before sending another interrupt event.

• IDLE—The system does not send an interrupt until there is a period of no activity lasting as least as long as the time specified in the

Coalescing Time field.

The time to wait between interrupts or the idle period that must be encountered before an interrupt is sent.

Enter an integer between 1 and 65535. To turn off interrupt coalescing, enter 0 (zero) in this field.

The class of service to associate with traffic from this usNIC.

Select an integer between 0 and 6, with 0 being lowest priority and 6 being the highest priority.

Note

This option cannot be used in VNTAG mode.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

195

Configuring iSCSI Boot Capability

Name

TCP Segment Offload check box

Large Receive check box

TCP Tx Checksum check box

TCP Rx Checksum check box

Managing Network Adapters

Description

If checked, the CPU sends large TCP packets to the hardware to be segmented. This option may reduce

CPU overhead and increase throughput rate.

If cleared, the CPU segments large packets.

Note

This option is also known as Large Send

Offload (LSO).

If checked, the hardware reassembles all segmented packets before sending them to the CPU. This option may reduce CPU utilization and increase inbound throughput.

If cleared, the CPU processes all large packets.

If checked, the CPU sends all packets to the hardware so that the checksum can be calculated. This option may reduce CPU overhead.

If cleared, the CPU calculates all packet checksums.

If checked, the CPU sends all packet checksums to the hardware for validation. This option may reduce

CPU overhead.

If cleared, the CPU validates all packet checksums.

Configuring iSCSI Boot Capability

Configuring iSCSI Boot Capability for vNICs

When the rack-servers are configured in a standalone mode, and when the VIC adapters are directly attached to the Nexus 5000 and Nexus 6000 family of switches, you can configure these VIC adapters to boot the servers remotely from iSCSI storage targets. You can configure Ethernet vNICs to enable a rack server to load the host OS image from remote iSCSI target devices.

To configure the iSCSI boot capability on a vNIC:

• You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

• To configure a vNIC to boot a server remotely from an iSCSI storage target, you must enable the PXE boot option on the vNIC.

196

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Network Adapters

Configuring iSCSI Boot Capability

Note

You can configure a maximum of 2 iSCSI vNICs for each host.

Configuring iSCSI Boot Capability on a vNIC

You can configure a maximum of 2 iSCSI vNICs for each host.

Before You Begin

• To configure a vNIC to boot a server remotely from an iSCSI storage target, you must enable the PXE boot option on the vNIC.

• You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Networking menu.

Step 2

In the Adapter Card pane, click the vNICs tab.

Step 3

In the vNICs pane, click eth0 or eth1.

Step 4

In the Ethernet Interfaces area, select the iSCSI Boot Properties area.

Step 5

In the General Area, update the following fields:

Name Description

Name field The name of the vNIC.

DHCP Network check box

DHCP iSCSI check box

DHCP ID field

DHCP Timeout field

Whether DHCP Network is enabled for the vNIC.

If enabled, the initiator network configuration is obtained from the

DHCP server.

Whether DHCP iSCSI is enabled for the vNIC. If enabled and the DHCP

ID is set, the initiator IQN and target information are obtained from the

DHCP server.

Note

If DHCP iSCSI is enabled without a DHCP ID, only the target information is obtained.

The vendor identifier string used by the adapter to obtain the initiator

IQN and target information from the DHCP server.

Enter a string up to 64 characters.

The number of seconds to wait before the initiator assumes that the

DHCP server is unavailable.

Enter an integer between 60 and 300 (default: 60 seconds)

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

197

Managing Network Adapters

Configuring iSCSI Boot Capability

Name

Link Timeout field

LUN Busy Retry Count field

IP Version field

Description

The number of seconds to wait before the initiator assumes that the link is unavailable.

Enter an integer between 0 and 255 (default: 15 seconds)

The number of times to retry the connection in case of a failure during iSCSI LUN discovery.

Enter an integer between 0 and 255. The default is 15.

The IP version to use during iSCSI boot.

Step 6

In the Initiator Area, update the following fields:

Name Description

Name field A regular expression that defines the name of the iSCSI initiator.

You can enter any alphanumeric string as well as the following special characters:

• . (period)

• : (colon)

• - (dash)

IP Address field

Note

The name is in the IQN format.

The IP address of the iSCSI initiator.

Subnet Mask field

Gateway field

The subnet mask for the iSCSI initiator.

The default gateway.

Primary DNS field

Secondary DNS field

TCP Timeout field

The primary DNS server address.

The secondary DNS server address.

The number of seconds to wait before the initiator assumes that TCP is unavailable.

Enter an integer between 0 and 255 (default: 15 seconds)

CHAP Name field

CHAP Secret field

The Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) name of the initiator.

The Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) shared secret of the initiator.

198

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Network Adapters

Configuring iSCSI Boot Capability

Step 7

In the Primary Target Area, update the following fields:

Name Description

Name field

The name of the primary target in the IQN format.

IP Address field The IP address of the target.

The TCP port associated with the target.

TCP Port field

Boot LUN field

CHAP Name field

The Boot LUN associated with the target.

The Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) name of the initiator.

CHAP Secret field The Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) shared secret of the initiator.

Step 8

In the Secondary Target Area, update the following fields:

Name Description

Name field The name of the secondary target in the IQN format.

IP Address field The IP address of the target.

TCP Port field

Boot LUN field

CHAP Name field

CHAP Secret field

The TCP port associated with the target.

The Boot LUN associated with the target.

The Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) name of the initiator.

The Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) shared secret of the initiator.

Name

Configure ISCSI button

Unconfigure ISCSI button

Reset Values button

Cancel button

Description

Configures iSCSI boot on the selected vNIC.

Removes the configuration from the selected vNIC.

Restores the values for the vNIC to the settings that were in effect when this dialog box was first opened.

Closes the dialog box without making any changes.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

199

Managing Network Adapters

Backing Up and Restoring the Adapter Configuration

Step 9

Click Save Changes.

Removing iSCSI Boot Configuration from a vNIC

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Networking menu.

Step 2

In the Adapter Card pane, click the vNICs tab.

Step 3

In the vNICs pane, click eth0 or eth1.

Step 4

In the Ethernet Interfaces area, select the iSCSI Boot Properties area.

Step 5

Click the Unconfigure ISCSI button at the bottom of the area.

Backing Up and Restoring the Adapter Configuration

Exporting the Adapter Configuration

The adapter configuration can be exported as an XML file to a remote server which can be one of the following:

• TFTP

• FTP

• SFTP

• SCP

• HTTP

Before You Begin

Obtain the remote server IP address.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Networking menu.

Step 2

Click the Adapter Card tab.

The General tab appears.

Step 3

In the Actions area of the General tab, click Export Configuration.

200

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Network Adapters

Importing the Adapter Configuration

The Export Adapter Configuration dialog box opens.

Step 4

In the Export Adapter Configuration dialog box, update the following fields:

Name Description

Export to drop-down list The remote server type. This can be one of the following:

• TFTP Server

• FTP Server

• SFTP Server

• SCP Server

• HTTP Server

Server IP/Hostname field

Note

If you chose SCP or SFTP as the remote server type while performing this action, a pop-up window is displayed with the message Server (RSA) key fingerprint is <server_finger_print

_ID> Do you wish to continue?. Click Yes or No depending on the authenticity of the server fingerprint.

The fingerprint is based on the host's public key and helps you to identify or verify the host you are connecting to.

The IPv4 or IPv6 address, or hostname of the server to which the adapter configuration file will be exported. Depending on the setting in the Export

to drop-down list, the name of the field may vary.

Path and Filename field

Username

Password

The path and filename Cisco IMC should use when exporting the file to the remote server.

The username the system should use to log in to the remote server. This field does not apply if the protocol is TFTP or HTTP.

The password for the remote server username. This field does not apply if the protocol is TFTP or HTTP.

Step 5

Click Export Configuration.

Importing the Adapter Configuration

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Networking menu.

Step 2

Click the Adapter Card tab.

The General tab appears.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

201

Managing Network Adapters

Importing the Adapter Configuration

Step 3

In the Actions area of the General tab, click Import Configuration.

The Import Adapter Configuration dialog box opens.

Step 4

In the Import Adapter Configuration dialog box, update the following fields:

Name Description

Import from drop-down list The remote server type. This can be one of the following:

• TFTP Server

• FTP Server

• SFTP Server

• SCP Server

• HTTP Server

Server IP/Hostname field

Path and Filename field

Note

If you chose SCP or SFTP as the remote server type while performing this action, a pop-up window is displayed with the message Server (RSA) key fingerprint is <server_finger_print

_ID> Do you wish to continue?. Click Yes or No depending on the authenticity of the server fingerprint.

The fingerprint is based on the host's public key and helps you to identify or verify the host you are connecting to.

The IPv4 or IPv6 address, or hostname of the server on which the adapter configuration file resides. Depending on the setting in the Import from drop-down list, the name of the field may vary.

The path and filename of the configuration file on the remote server.

Username

Password

The username the system should use to log in to the remote server. This field does not apply if the protocol is TFTP or HTTP.

The password for the remote server username. This field does not apply if the protocol is TFTP or HTTP.

Step 5

Click Import Configuration.

The adapter downloads the configuration file from the specified path on the TFTP server at the specified IP address. The configuration will be installed during the next server reboot.

What to Do Next

Reboot the server to apply the imported configuration.

202

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Network Adapters

Restoring Adapter Defaults

Restoring Adapter Defaults

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Networking menu.

Step 2

Click the Adapter Card tab.

The General tab appears.

Step 3

In the Actions area of the General tab, click Reset To Defaults and click OK to confirm.

Note

Resetting the adapter to default settings sets the port speed to 4 X 10 Gbps. Choose 40 Gbps as the port speed only if you are using a 40 Gbps switch.

Resetting the Adapter

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Networking menu.

Step 2

Click the Adapter Card tab.

The General tab appears.

Step 3

In the Actions area of the General tab, click Reset and click Yes to confirm.

Note

Resetting the adapter also resets the host and requires a reformat.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

203

Resetting the Adapter

Managing Network Adapters

204

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

C H A P T E R

Managing Storage Adapters

This chapter includes the following sections:

•

Managing Storage Adapters, page 205

•

Managing the Flexible Flash Controller, page 234

•

Managing the FlexUtil Controller, page 243

•

Scrub Policy, page 254

Managing Storage Adapters

Self Encrypting Drives (Full Disk Encryption)

Cisco IMC supports self encrypting drives (SED). A special hardware in the drives encrypts incoming data and decrypts outgoing data in real-time. This feature is also called Full Disk Encryption (FDE).

The data on the drive is encrypted on its way into the drive and decrypted on its way out. However, if you lock the drive, no security key is required to retrieve the data.

When a drive is locked, an encryption key is created and stored internally. All data stored on this drive is encrypted using that key, and stored in encrypted form. Once you store the data in this manner, a security key is required in order to un-encrypt and fetch the data from the drive. Unlocking a drive deletes that encryption key and renders the stored data unusable. This is called a Secure Erase. The FDE comprises a key ID and a security key.

The FDE feature supports the following operations:

• Enable and disable security on a controller

• Create a secure virtual drive

• Secure a non-secure drive group

• Unlock foreign configuration drives

• Enable security on a physical drive (JBOD)

• Clear secure SED drives

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

205

Managing Storage Adapters

Self Encrypting Drives (Full Disk Encryption)

• Clear secure foreign configuration

Scenarios to consider While Configuring Controller Security in a Dual SIOC Environment

Note

Dual SIOC connectivity is available only on some servers.

Controller security can be enabled, disabled, or modified independently. However, local and remote key management applies to all the controllers on the server. Therefore security action involving switching the key management modes must be performed with caution. In a scenario where both controllers are secure, and you decide to move one of the controllers to a different mode, you need to perform the same operation on the other controller as well.

Consider the following two scenarios:

• Scenario 1—Key management is set to remote; both controllers are secure and use remote key management. If you now wish to switch to local key management, switch the key management for each controller and disable remote key management.

• Scenario 2—Key management is set to local; both controllers are secure and use local key management.

If you now wish to switch to remote key management, enable remote key management and switch the key management for each controller.

If you do not modify the controller security method on any one of the controllers, it renders the secure key management in an unsupported configuration state.

Enabling Controller Security

This option is available only on some C-series servers.

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

In the Storage menu, click the appropriate LSI MegaRAID or HBA controller.

Step 3

In the Controller Info area, click Enable Drive Security.

Step 4

In the Enable Drive Security dialog box, update the following fields:

Name Description

Controller Security field Indicates that the controller is disabled.

206

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Storage Adapters

Self Encrypting Drives (Full Disk Encryption)

Name

Key Management field

Security Key Identifier field

Security Key field

Confirm Security Key field

Suggest button

Description

Indicates whether the key is remotely managed or locally managed.

This can be one of the following:

• Remote Key Management radio button— Controller security key is configured or managed using the remote KMIP server.

Note

If you choose this option, you do not have to specify the existing security key but you have to provide the key ID and the security key for local management.

• Local Key Management radio button— Controller security is configured locally.

The current key ID.

Security key used to enable controller security. If you wish to change the current security key, enter the new key here.

Note

Once you change the security key, a Secure Key Verification pop-up window appears where you need to enter the current security key to verify it.

Re-enter the security key.

Suggests the security key or key ID that can be assigned.

Step 5

Click Save.

This enables controller security.

Modifying Controller Security

This option is available only on some C-series servers.

Before You Begin

• You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

• You must have first enabled controller security to modify it.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

In the Storage menu, click the appropriate LSI MegaRAID or HBA controller.

Step 3

In the Controller Info area, click Modify Drive Security.

Step 4

In the Modify Drive Security dialog box, update the following fields:

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

207

Managing Storage Adapters

Self Encrypting Drives (Full Disk Encryption)

Name

Controller Security field

Key Management field

Security Key Identifier field

Security Key field

Confirm Security Key field

Suggest button

Save button

Cancel button

Description

Indicates whether or not controller security is enabled. This can be one of the following:

• True— Controller security is enabled.

• False— Controller security is disabled.

Indicates whether the key is remotely managed or locally managed.

This can be one of the following:

• Remote Key Management radio button— Controller security key is configured or managed using the remote KMIP server.

Note

If you choose this option, you do not have to specify the existing security key but you have to provide the key ID and the security key for local management.

• Local Key Management radio button— Controller security is configured locally.

The current key ID.

Security key used to enable controller security. If you wish to change the current security key, enter the new key here.

Note

Once you change the security key, a Secure Key Verification pop-up window appears where you need to enter the current security key to verify it.

Re-enter the security key.

Suggests the security key or key ID that can be assigned.

Saves the data.

Cancels the action.

Step 5

Click Save.

This modifies the controller security settings.

Disabling Controller Security

This option is available only on some C-series servers.

Before You Begin

• You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

208

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Storage Adapters

Creating Virtual Drive from Unused Physical Drives

• You must have first enabled controller security to disable it.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

In the Storage menu, click the appropriate LSI MegaRAID or HBA controller.

Step 3

In the Controller Info area, click Disable Drive Security.

Step 4

Click OK in the confirmation pop-up window.

This disables controller security.

Switching Controller Security Between Local and Remote Key Management

This task allows you to switch controller security from local management to remote management, and from remote to local management.

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

In the Storage menu, click the appropriate LSI MegaRAID or HBA controller.

Step 3

In the Controller Info area, to switch the controller security from remote to local management, click Switch

to Local Key Management.

Note

When you switch from remote to local key management, ensure that you disable KMIP secure key management first.

Step 4

(Optional) Similarly, if you want to switch the controller security from local to remote management, click

Switch to Remote Key Management.

Step 5

Click OK to confirm.

Creating Virtual Drive from Unused Physical Drives

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

209

Managing Storage Adapters

Creating Virtual Drive from Unused Physical Drives

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

In the Storage menu, click the appropriate LSI MegaRAID or HBA controller.

Step 3

In the Actions area, click Create Virtual Drive from Unused Physical Drives.

The Create Virtual Drive from Unused Physical Drives dialog box displays.

Step 4

In the Create Virtual Drive from Unused Physical Drives dialog box, select the RAID level for the new virtual drives:

This can be one of the following:

• Raid 0—Simple striping.

• Raid 1—Simple mirroring.

• Raid 5—Striping with parity.

• Raid 6—Striping with two parity drives.

• Raid 10—Spanned mirroring.

• Raid 50—Spanned striping with parity.

• Raid 60—Spanned striping with two parity drives.

Step 5

In the Create Drive Groups area, choose one or more physical drives to include in the group.

Use the >> button to add the drives to the Drive Groups table. Use the << button to remove physical drives from the drive group.

Note

• The size of the smallest physical drive in the drive group defines the maximum size used for all the physical drives. To ensure maximum use of space for all physical drives, it is recommended that the size of all the drives in the drive group are similar.

• Cisco IMC manages only RAID controllers and not HBAs attached to the server.

• You must have multiple drive groups available to create virtual drives for certain RAID levels.

While creating drives for these RAID levels, the create drive option is available only if the required number of drives are selected.

Step 6

In the Virtual Drive Properties area, update the following properties:

Name Description

Virtual Drive Name field The name of the new virtual drive you want to create.

Read Policy drop-down list

The read-ahead cache mode.

Cache Policy drop-down list

Strip Size drop-down list

The cache policy used for buffering reads.

The size of each strip, in KB.

210

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Storage Adapters

Creating Virtual Drive from Unused Physical Drives

Name

Write Policy drop-down list

Description

This can be one of the following

• Write Through— Data is written through the cache and to the physical drives. Performance is improved, because subsequent reads of that data can be satisfied from the cache.

• Write Back— Data is stored in the cache, and is only written to the physical drives when space in the cache is needed. Virtual drives requesting this policy fall back to Write Through caching when the BBU cannot guarantee the safety of the cache in the event of a power failure.

• Write Back Bad BBU—With this policy, write caching remains

Write Back even if the battery backup unit is defective or discharged.

Disk Cache Policy drop-down list This can be one of the following

• Unchanged— The disk cache policy is unchanged.

• Enabled— Allows IO caching on the disk.

• Disabled— Disallows disk caching.

Access Policy drop-down list This can be one of the following

• Read Write— Enables host to perform read-write on the VD.

• Read Only— Host can only read from the VD.

• Blocked— Host can neither read nor write to the VD.

Size field The size of the virtual drive you want to create. Enter a value and select one of the following units:

• MB

• GB

• TB

Step 7

Click the Generate XML API Request button to generate an API request.

Step 8

Click Close.

Step 9

Click Create Virtual Drive.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

211

Managing Storage Adapters

Creating Virtual Drive from an Existing Drive Group

Creating Virtual Drive from an Existing Drive Group

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

In the Storage menu, click the appropriate LSI MegaRAID or HBA controller.

Step 3

In the Actions area, click Create Virtual Drive from an Existing Virtual Drive Group.

The Create Virtual Drive from an Existing Virtual Drive Group dialog box displays.

Step 4

In the Create Virtual Drive from an Existing Virtual Drive Group dialog box, select the virtual drive whose drive group you want to use to create a new virtual drive.

Step 5

In the Virtual Drive Properties area, update the following properties:

Name Description

Virtual Drive Name field The name of the new virtual drive you want to create.

Read Policy drop-down list The read-ahead cache mode.

Cache Policy drop-down list

Strip Size drop-down list

Write Policy drop-down list

The cache policy used for buffering reads.

The size of each strip, in KB.

This can be one of the following

• Write Through— Data is written through the cache and to the physical drives. Performance is improved, because subsequent reads of that data can be satisfied from the cache.

• Write Back Bad BBU—With this policy, write caching remains

Write Back even if the battery backup unit is defective or discharged.

Disk Cache Policy drop-down list This can be one of the following

• Unchanged— The disk cache policy is unchanged.

• Enabled— Allows IO caching on the disk.

• Disabled— Disallows disk caching.

212

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Storage Adapters

Setting a Virtual Drive to Transport Ready State

Name

Access Policy drop-down list

Size field

Description

This can be one of the following

• Read Write— Enables host to perform read-write on the VD.

• Read Only— Host can only read from the VD.

• Blocked— Host can neither read nor write to the VD.

The size of the virtual drive you want to create. Enter a value and select one of the following units:

• MB

• GB

• TB

Step 6

Click the Generate XML API Request button to generate an API request.

Step 7

Click Close.

Step 8

Click Create Virtual Drive.

Setting a Virtual Drive to Transport Ready State

You can move a virtual drive from one MegaRAID controller to another using the Set Transport Ready feature. This allows all the pending IOs of the virtual drive to complete their activities, hide the virtual drive from the operating system, flush cache, pause all the background operations, and save the current progress in disk data format, allowing you to move the drive. When you move a virtual drive, all other drives belonging to the same drive group inherit the same change as the moved drive.

When the last configured physical drive on the group is removed from the current controller, the drive group becomes foreign and all foreign configuration rules apply to the group. However, the Transport Ready feature does not change any foreign configuration behavior.

You can also clear a virtual drive from the Transport Ready state. This makes the virtual drive available to the operating systems.

Following restrictions apply to a transport ready virtual drive:

• Only a maximum of 16 transport ready drive groups are currently supported.

• This feature is not supported on high availability.

• A virtual drive cannot be set as transport ready under these conditions:

• When a virtual drive of a drive group is being reconstructed

• When a virtual drive of a drive group contains a pinned cache

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

213

Managing Storage Adapters

Setting a Virtual Drive as Transport Ready

• When a virtual drive of a drive group is marked as cacheable or associated with a cachecade virtual drive

• If a virtual drive is a cachecade virtual drive

• If a virtual drive is offline

• If a virtual drive is a bootable virtual drive

Setting a Virtual Drive as Transport Ready

Before You Begin

• You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

• The virtual drive must be in optimal state to enable transport ready.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

On the Storage menu, click the appropriate LSI MegaRAID or HBA Controller.

Step 3

On the Work pane, click the Virtual Drive Info tab.

Step 4

In the Virtual Drives area, choose the drive that you want set as transport ready.

Step 5

In the Actions area, click Set Transport Ready.

The Set Transport Ready dialog box displays.

Step 6

Update the following properties in the dialog box:

Name Description

Initialize Type drop-down list Allows you to select the initialization type using which you can set the selected virtual drive as transport ready. This can be one of the following:

• Exlude All— Excludes all the dedicated hot spare drives.

• Include All— Includes any exclusively available or shared dedicated hot spare drives.

• Include Dedicated Hot Spare Drive— Includes exclusive dedicated hot spare drives.

Set Transport Ready button

Cancel button

Sets the selected virtual drive as transport ready.

Cancels the action.

Note

When you set a virtual drive to transport ready all the physical drives associated with it are displayed as Ready to Remove.

214

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Storage Adapters

Clearing a Virtual Drive from Transport Ready State

Clearing a Virtual Drive from Transport Ready State

Before You Begin

• You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

• The virtual drive must be transport ready.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

On the Storage menu, click the appropriate LSI MegaRAID or HBA controller.

Step 3

On the Work pane, click the Virtual Drive Info tab.

Step 4

In the Virtual Drives area, choose the drive to set as transport ready.

Step 5

In the Actions area, click Clear Transport Ready.

This reverts the selected transport ready virtual drive to its original optimal state.

Importing Foreign Configuration

When one or more physical drives that have previously been configured with a different controller are inserted into a server, they are identified as foreign configurations. You can import these foreign configurations to a controller.

Important

You cannot import a foreign configuration in the following two scenarios:

When the secure virtual drive was created on server 1 (from which you want to import the configuration) using the remote key, and on server 2 (to which you want to import) using the local key.

When server 2 is configured with another KMIP server, which is not a part of the server 1 KMIP server cluster.

In order to import the foreign configuration in these scenarios, change the controller security on server 2 from local key management to remote key management, and use the same KMIP server from the same cluster where the server 1 KMIP is configured.

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

215

Managing Storage Adapters

Clearing Foreign Configuration

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

In the RAID controller area, the Controller Info tab displays by default.

Step 3

In the Actions area, click Import Foreign Config.

Note

If KMIP is not enabled, a Secure Key Verification dialog box is displayed, prompting you to enter a security key to initiate the foreign configuration import process.

If KMIP is enabled, the Secure Key Verification dialog box is displayed with the following note:

"If drive security has been enabled via remote key management, specifying Security key is optional.

Click on verify to start foreign configuration import."

This allows you to click Verify without entering the Security Key, and initiate import.

Step 4

Click OK to confirm.

Clearing Foreign Configuration

Important

This task clears all foreign configuration on the controller. Also, all configuration information from all physical drives hosting foreign configuration is deleted. This action cannot be reverted.

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

On the Storage menu, click the appropriate LSI MegaRAID or HBA controller.

In the RAID Controller area, the Controller Info tab displays by default.

Step 3

In the Actions area, click Clear Foreign Config.

Step 4

Click OK to confirm.

Clearing a Boot Drive

Important

This task clears the boot drive configuration on the controller. This action cannot be reverted.

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

216

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Storage Adapters

Enabling JBOD Mode

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

On the Storage menu, click the appropriate LSI MegaRAID or HBA controller.

In the RAID Controller area, the Controller Info tab displays by default.

Step 3

In the Actions area, click Clear Boot Drive.

Step 4

Click OK to confirm.

Enabling JBOD Mode

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

On the Storage menu, click the appropriate LSI MegaRAID or HBA controller.

Step 3

In the RAID Controller area, click the Physical Drive Info tab.

Step 4

In the Physical Drives area, select an unconfigured good drive.

Step 5

In the Actions area, click Enable JBOD.

Step 6

Click Ok to confirm.

Disabling a JBOD

Note

This option is available only on some UCS C-Series servers.

Before You Begin

JBOD option must be enabled for the selected controller.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

On the Storage menu, click the appropriate LSI MegaRAID or HBA controller.

Step 3

In the RAID Controller area, click the Physical Drive Info tab.

Step 4

In the Physical Drives area, select a JBOD drive.

Step 5

In the Actions area, click Disable JBOD.

Step 6

Click Ok to confirm.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

217

Managing Storage Adapters

Retrieving Storage Firmware Logs for a Controller

Retrieving Storage Firmware Logs for a Controller

This task retrieves the storage firmware logs for the controller and places it in the /var/log location. This ensures that this log data is available when Technical Support Data is requested.

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

In the working area, the Controller Info tab displays by default.

Step 3

In the Actions area, click Get Storage Firmware Log.

Step 4

Click OK to confirm.

Important

Retrieving storage firmware logs for a controller could take up to 2-4 minutes. Until this process is complete, do not initiate exporting technical support data.

Clearing Controller Configuration

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

In the Storage menu, click the appropriate LSI MegaRAID or HBA controller.

Step 3

In the Controller Info area, click Clear All Configuration.

Step 4

Click OK to confirm.

This clears the existing controller configuration.

Restoring Storage Controller to Factory Defaults

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

218

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Storage Adapters

Preparing a Drive for Removal

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

In the Storage menu, click the appropriate LSI MegaRAID or HBA controller.

Step 3

In the Controller Info area, click Set Factory Defaults.

Step 4

Click OK to confirm.

This restores the controller configuration to factory defaults.

Preparing a Drive for Removal

Note

You can perform this task only on physical drives that display the Unconfigured Good status.

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

On the Storage menu, click the appropriate LSI MegaRAID or HBA controller.

Step 3

In the RAID Controller area, click the Physical Drive Info tab.

Step 4

In the Physical Drives area, select the drive you want to remove.

Step 5

In the Actions area, click Prepare for Removal.

Step 6

Click OK to confirm.

Undo Preparing a Drive for Removal

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

219

Managing Storage Adapters

Making a Dedicated Hot Spare

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

On the Storage menu, click the appropriate LSI MegaRAID or HBA controller.

Step 3

On the RAID Controller area, click the Physical Drive Info tab.

Step 4

In the Physical Drives area, select a drive with a status of Ready to Remove.

Step 5

In the Actions area, click Undo Prepare for Removal.

Step 6

Click OK to confirm.

Making a Dedicated Hot Spare

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage tab.

Step 2

On the Storage menu, click the appropriate LSI MegaRAID or HBA controller.

Step 3

On the RAID Controller area, click the Physical Drive Info tab.

Step 4

In the Physical Drives area, select an unconfigured good drive you want to make a dedicated hot spare.

Step 5

In the Actions area, click Make Dedicated Hot Spare.

The Make Dedicated Hot Spare dialog box displays.

Step 6

In the Virtual Drive Details area, update the following properties:

Name Description

Virtual Drive Number drop-down list

Select the virtual drive to which you want to dedicate the physical drive as hot spare.

Virtual Drive Name field

The name of the selected virtual drive.

Make Dedicated Hot Spare

button

Cancel button

Creates the dedicated hot spare.

Closes the dialog box without saving any changes made while the dialog box was open.

Step 7

Click Make Dedicated Hot Spare to confirm.

220

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Storage Adapters

Making a Global Hot Spare

Making a Global Hot Spare

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage tab.

Step 2

On the Storage menu, click the appropriate LSI MegaRAID or HBA controller.

Step 3

In the RAID Controller area, click the Physical Drive Info tab.

Step 4

In the Physical Drives area, select an unconfigured good drive you want to make a global hot spare.

Step 5

In the Actions area, click Make Global Hot Spare.

Removing a Drive from Hot Spare Pools

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

On the Storage tab, click the appropriate LSI MegaRAID controller.

Step 3

On the Work pane, click the Physical Drive Info tab.

Step 4

In the Physical Drives area, select the global or dedicated hot spare you want to remove from the hot spare pools.

Step 5

In the Actions area, click Remove From Hot Spare Pools.

Toggling Physical Drive Status

Before You Begin

• You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

• The controller must support the JBOD mode and the JBOD mode must be enabled.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

221

Managing Storage Adapters

Setting a Physical Drive as a Controller Boot Drive

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage tab.

Step 2

On the Storage menu, click the appropriate LSI MegaRAID or HBA controller.

Step 3

In the RAID Controller area, click the Physical Drive Info tab.

Step 4

In the Physical Drives area, select the drive you want to set as unconfigured good.

Step 5

In the Actions area, click Set State as Unconfigured Good.

Step 6

Click OK to confirm that the JBOD mode be disabled.

The Set State as JBOD option is enabled.

Step 7

To enable the JBOD mode for the physical drive, click Set State as JBOD.

Step 8

Click OK to confirm.

The Set State as Unconfigured Good option is enabled.

Setting a Physical Drive as a Controller Boot Drive

Before You Begin

• You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

• The controller must support the JBOD mode and the JBOD mode must be enabled.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

On the Storage menu, click the appropriate LSI MegaRAID or HBA controller.

Step 3

In the RAID Controller area, click the Physical Drive Info tab.

Step 4

In the Physical Drives area, select the drive you want to set as boot drive for the controller.

Step 5

In the Actions area, click Set as Boot Drive.

Step 6

Click OK to confirm.

Initializing a Virtual Drive

All data on a virtual drive is lost when you initialize the drive. Before you run an initialization, back up any data on the virtual drive that you want to save.

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

222

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Storage Adapters

Set as Boot Drive

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

On the Storage menu, click the appropriate LSI MegaRAID or HBA controller.

Step 3

In the RAID Controller area, click the Virtual Drive Info tab.

Step 4

In the Virtual Drives area, choose the drive that you want to initialize.

Step 5

In the Actions area, click Initialize.

The Initialize Virtual Drive dialog box displays.

Step 6

Choose the type of initialization you want to use for the virtual drive.

This can be one of the following:

• Fast Initialize—This option allows you to start writing data to the virtual drive immediately.

• Full Initialize—A complete initialization is done on the new configuration. You cannot write data to the new virtual drive until the initialization is complete.

Step 7

Click Initialize VD to initialize the drive, or Cancel to close the dialog box without making any changes.

Step 8

To view the status of the task running on the drive, in the Operations area, click Refresh.

The following details are displayed:

Name

Operation

Description

Name of the operation that is in progress on the drive.

Progress in %

Elapsed Time in secs

Progress of the operation, in percentage complete.

The number of seconds that have elapsed since the operation began.

Set as Boot Drive

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

223

Managing Storage Adapters

Editing a Virtual Drive

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

On the Storage menu, click the appropriate LSI MegaRAID or HBA controller.

Step 3

In the RAID Controller area, click the Virtual Drive Info tab.

Step 4

In the Virtual Drives area, choose the drive from which the controller must boot.

Step 5

In the Actions area, click Set as Boot Drive.

Step 6

Click OK to confirm.

Editing a Virtual Drive

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

On the Storage menu, click the appropriate LSI MegaRAID or HBA controller.

Step 3

In the RAID Controller area, click the Virtual Drive Info tab.

Step 4

In the Virtual Drives area, click Edit Virtual Drive.

Step 5

Review the instructions, and then click OK.

The Edit Virtual Drive dialog box displays before prompting you to take a backup of your data.

Step 6

From the Select RAID Level to migrate drop-down list, choose a RAID level.

See the following table for RAID migration criteria:

224

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Storage Adapters

Editing a Virtual Drive

Name

Select RAID Level to migrate

drop-down list

Description

Select the RAID level to which you want to migrate. Migrations are allowed for the following RAID levels:

• RAID 0 to RAID 1

• RAID 0 to RAID 5

• RAID 0 to RAID 6

• RAID 1 to RAID 0

• RAID 1 to RAID 5

• RAID 1 to RAID 6

• RAID 5 to RAID 0

• RAID 6 to RAID 0

• RAID 6 to RAID 5

When you are migrating from one raid level to another, the data arms of the new RAID level should be equal to or greater than the existing one.

In case of RAID 6, the data arms will be number of drives minus two, as RAID 6 has double distributed parity. For example, when you create

RAID 6 with eight drives, the number of data arms will be 8 – 2 = 6.

In this case, if you are migrating from RAID 6 to RAID 0, RAID 0 must have a minimum of six drives. If you select lesser number of drives then

Edit or Save button will be disabled.

If you are adding, you can migrate to RAID 0 as you will not be deleting any drives.

Note

RAID level migration is not supported in the following cases:

• When there are multiple virtual drives in a RAID group.

• With a combination of SSD/HDD RAID groups.

Step 7

From the Write Policy drop-down list in the Virtual Drive Properties area, choose one of the following:

• Write Through— Data is written through the cache and to the physical drives. Performance is improved, because subsequent reads of that data can be satisfied from the cache.

BBU cannot guarantee the safety of the cache in the event of a power failure.

• Write Back Bad BBU—With this policy, write caching remains Write Back even if the battery backup unit is defective or discharged.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

225

Managing Storage Adapters

Deleting a Virtual Drive

Step 8

Click Save Changes.

Deleting a Virtual Drive

Important

This task deletes a virtual drive, including the drives that run the booted operating system. So back up any data that you want to retain before you delete a virtual drive.

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

On the Storage menu, click the appropriate LSI MegaRAID or HBA controller.

Step 3

In the RAID Controller area, click the Virtual Drive Info tab.

Step 4

In the Virtual Drives area, select the virtual drive you want to delete.

Step 5

In the Actions area, click Delete Virtual Drive.

Step 6

Click OK to confirm.

Hiding a Virtual Drive

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

On the Storage menu, click the appropriate LSI MegaRAID or HBA controller.

Step 3

On the RAID Controller area, click the Virtual Drive Info tab.

Step 4

In the Virtual Drives area, select the virtual drive you want to hide.

Step 5

In the Actions area, click Hide Drive.

Step 6

Click OK to confirm.

226

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Storage Adapters

Starting Learn Cycles for a Battery Backup Unit

Starting Learn Cycles for a Battery Backup Unit

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

On the Storage menu, click the appropriate LSI MegaRAID or HBA controller.

Step 3

In the RAID Controller area, click the Battery Backup Unit tab.

Step 4

From the Actions pane, click Start Learn Cycle.

A dialog prompts you to confirm the task.

Step 5

Click OK.

Viewing Storage Controller Logs

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

On the Storage menu, click the appropriate LSI MegaRAID or HBA controller.

Step 3

In the RAID Controller area, click Storage Log tab and review the following information:

Name Description

Time column

The date and time the event occurred.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

227

Viewing SSD Smart Information for MegaRAID Controllers

Name

Severity column

Description column

Managing Storage Adapters

Description

The event severity. This can be one of the following:

• Emergency

• Alert

• Critical

• Error

• Warning

• Notice

• Informational

• Debug

A description of the event.

Viewing SSD Smart Information for MegaRAID Controllers

You can view smart information for a solid state drive. Complete these steps:

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage tab.

Step 2

On the Storage menu, click the appropriate LSI MegaRAID Controller.

Step 3

On the Work pane, click the Physical Drive Info tab.

Step 4

In the Smart Information area, review the following information:

Name Description

Power Cycle Count field Number of power cycles that the drive went through from the time it was manufactured.

Power on Hours field

Total number of hours that the drive is in the 'Power

On' mode.

228

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Storage Adapters

Viewing NVMe Controller Details

Name

Percentage Life Left field

Wear Status in Days field

Operating Temperature field

Percentage Reserved Capacity Consumed field

Time of Last Refresh field

Description

The number of write cycles remaining in a solid state drive (SSD). For instance, if an SSD is capable of

100 write cycles during its life time, and it has completed 15 writes, then the percentage of life left in the drive is 85%. Each percentage range is represented in a different color. For instance, green for 75% to 100% and red for 1 to 25%.

The number of days an SSD has gone through with the write cycles.

SSD vendors provide a finite number of writes per day on the SSD, based on which, you can calculate the total number of years the SSD would continue to work.

The current temperature of the drive at which the selected SSD operates at the time of selection.

The total capacity (out of the percentage reserved for it) consumed by the SSD.

Time period since the drive was last refreshed.

Viewing NVMe Controller Details

Before You Begin

• The server must be powered on.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

In the Storage menu, click the appropriate NVMe controller.

Step 3

In the Controller area, the Controller Info tab displays by default.

Step 4

In the Work pane's Health/Status area, review the following information:

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

229

Managing Storage Adapters

Viewing NVMe Controller Details

Name

Composite Health field

Drive Count field

Description

The health of the controller. This can be one of the following:

• Good- All the drives under the controller is in optimal state.

• Severe Fault- When one or more drives under the controller is in faulty state.

• N/A

The number of drives configured on the controller.

Step 5

In the Manufacturer Information area, review the following information:

Name Description

Vendor ID field The vendor ID of the NVMe controller.

Product ID field

Component ID field

The controller product ID.

The component ID of the NVMe controller.

Product Revision field The board revision number, if any.

Step 6

In the Group PCI Info area, review the following information:

Name Description

Vendor ID field The PCI vendor ID, in hexadecimal.

Device ID field

The PCI device ID, in hexadecimal.

Step 7

In the Group Firmware Information area, review the following information:

Name Description

Running Firmware Images field

NVMe drive fimware version.

Step 8

In the Group Switch Information area, review the following information:

Name Description

Temperature field Temperature in degree centigrade of the switch.

230

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Storage Adapters

Name

Switch Status field

Link Status field

Shutdown Temperature field

Viewing NVMe Physical Drive Details

Description

The current status of the switch. This can be one of the following:

• Optimal — The controller is functioning properly.

• Failed — The controller is not functioning.

• Unresponsive — The controller is down.

The current status of the link. This field indicates if any of the upstream or downstream links in the switch are down. Individual drive also has a link status that can then be used to identify which drive causes the switch link status to be Link Degraded. This can be one of the following:

• Optimal — The controller is functioning properly.

• Failed — The controller is not functioning.

• Unresponsive — The controller is down.

This is the temperature beyond which the safe operation of switch is not guaranteed and recommends shutting down the system.

Viewing NVMe Physical Drive Details

Before You Begin

• The server must be powered on.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

In the Storage menu, click the appropriate NVMe controller.

Step 3

Click Physical Drive tab and review the following information

Name Description

Physical Drives column The list of available physical drives.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

231

Managing Storage Adapters

Viewing NVMe Physical Drive Details

Name

PCI Slot column

Managed ID column

Product Name column

Firmware Version column

Vendor column

Serial Number column

Description

The PCI slot number in which the physical drive resides.

Internal ID referenced in debug.

The name of the drive as assigned by the vendor.

The firmware version running on the drive.

The drive vendor name.

Drive serial number.

Step 4

Physical Drives Details

Note

These details of a physical drive are displayed when you expand one of the listed physical drives.

Name

PCI Slot field

Description

The PCI slot number in which the physical drive resides.

Managed ID field Internal ID referenced in debug.

Throttle State field

Serial Number field

Chip Temperature field

Percentage Drive Life Used field

Device ID field

The state of the throttle.

Controller serial number.

Temperature of the drive in degree centigrade. This is the max temperature read from internal sensors in the drive.

The percentage of the drive life that is used up.

The PCI device ID, in hexadecimal.

Sub Device ID field

Drive Status field

Performance Level field

Shutdown Temperature field

Percentage of Total Power On Hours field

Vendor ID field

The PCI subdevice ID, in hexadecimal.

Status of the drive.

Indicates the performance of the drive.

Temperature at which the drive shuts down.

The percentage of time the drive was powered on.

The PCI vendor ID, in hexadecimal.

232

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Storage Adapters

Name

SubVendor ID field

LED Fault Status field

Controller Temperature field

Running Firmware Images field

Throttle Start Temperature field

Starting Copyback Operation

Description

The PCI subvendor ID, in hexadecimal.

The status of the LED fault.

Temperature of the controller in degree centigrade.

This is the overall composite temperature of the

NVMe subsystem ID.

NVMe drive fimware version.

Temperature at which the drive starts to throttle.

Starting Copyback Operation

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

On the Storage menu, click the appropriate LSI MegaRAID or HBA controller.

Step 3

In the RAID Controller area, click the Physical Drive Info tab.

Step 4

In the Physical Drives area, select a drive, which is in online state.

Step 5

In the Actions area, click Start Copyback.

Step 6

A Start Copyback Operation dialog box appears.

Step 7

Select the Destination Physical Drive to which the copyback operation needs to be done.

Step 8

Click Start Copyback.

Step 9

You can also perform the following copyback operations:

• Pause Copyback - If the drive is in copyback state, you can pause the copyback operation.

• Resume Copyback- The paused copyback operation can be resumed.

• Abort Copyback - If the drive is in copyback state, you can abort the copyback operation.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

233

Managing Storage Adapters

Managing the Flexible Flash Controller

Managing the Flexible Flash Controller

Cisco Flexible Flash

On the M5 servers, Flexible Flash Controller is inserted into the mini storage module socket. The mini storage socket is inserted into the M.2 slot on the motherboard. M.2 slot also supports SATA M.2 SSD slots.

Note

M.2 slot does not support NVMe in this release.

Some C-Series Rack-Mount Servers support an internal Secure Digital (SD) memory card for storage of server software tools and utilities. The SD card is hosted by the Cisco Flexible Flash storage adapter.

The SD storage is available to Cisco IMC as a single hypervisor (HV) partition configuration. Prior versions had four virtual USB drives. Three were preloaded with Cisco UCS Server Configuration Utility, Cisco drivers and Cisco Host Upgrade Utility, and the fourth as user-installed hypervisor. A single HV partition configuration is also created when you upgrade to the latest version of Cisco IMC or downgrade to the prior version, and reset the configuration.

For more information about installing and configuring the M.2 drives, see the Storage Controller

Considerations (Embbeded SATA RAID Requirements) and Replacing an M.2 SSD in a Mini-Storage

Carrier For M.2 sections in the Cisco UCS Server Installation and Service Guide for the C240 M5 servers at this URL: https://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/support/servers-unified-computing/ucs-c-series-rack-servers/ products-installation-guides-list.html

For information about the Cisco software utilities and packages, see the Cisco UCS C-Series Servers

Documentation Roadmap at this URL: http://www.cisco.com/go/unifiedcomputing/c-series-doc

Card Management Feature in the Cisco Flexible Flash Controller

The Cisco Flexible Flash controller supports management of both single and two SD cards as a RAID-1 pair.

With the introduction of card management, you can perform the following tasks:

Note

• If you want to upgrade from version 1.4(5e) to 1.5(4) or higher versions, you must first upgrade to version1.5(2) and then upgrade to a higher version of Cisco IMC.

• Reset the Cisco Flexible Flash controller to load the latest Flex Flash firmware after every Cisco

IMC firmware upgrade.

Action

Reset Cisco Flex Flash

Reset Partition Defaults

Description

Allows you to reset the controller.

Allows you to reset the configuration in the selected slot to the default configuration.

234

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Storage Adapters

Upgrading from Single Card to Dual Card Mirroring with FlexFlash

Action

Synchronize Card Configuration

Configure Operational Profile

Description

Allows you to retain the configuration for an SD card that supports firmware version 253 and later.

Allows you to configure the SD cards on the selected

Cisco Flexible Flash controller.

RAID Partition Enumeration

Non-RAID partitions are always enumerated from the primary card and the enumeration does not depend on the status of the primary card.

Following is the behavior of the RAID partition enumeration when there are two cards in the Cisco Flexible

Flash controller:

Scenario

Single card

Behavior

RAID partitions are enumerated if the card is healthy, and if the mode is either Primary or

Secondary-active.

Dual paired cards

Dual unpaired cards

RAID partitions are enumerated if one of the cards is healthy.

When only one card is healthy, all read/write operations occur on this healthy card. You must use

UCS SCU to synchronize the two RAID partitions.

If this scenario is detected when the server is restarting, then neither one of the RAID partitions is enumerated.

If this scenario is detected when the server is running, when a user connects a new SD card, then the cards are not managed by the Cisco Flexible Flash controller. This does not affect the host enumeration.

You must pair the cards to manage them. You can pair the cards using the Reset Partition Defaults or

Synchronize Card Configuration options.

Upgrading from Single Card to Dual Card Mirroring with FlexFlash

You can upgrade from a single card mirroring to dual card mirroring with FlexFlash in one of the following methods:

• Add an empty FlexFlash card to the server, and then upgrade its firmware to the latest version.

• Upgrade the FlexFlash firmware to the latest version and then add an empty card to the server.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

235

Managing Storage Adapters

Configuring the Flexible Flash Controller Properties

Prior to using either of these methods, you must keep in mind the following guidelines:

• To create RAID1 mirroring, the empty card that you want to add to the server must be of the exact size of the card that is already in the server. Identical card size is a must to set up RAID1 mirroring.

• Ensure that the card with valid data in the Hypervisor partition is marked as the primary healthy card.

You can determine this state either in the Cisco IMC GUI or from the Cisco IMC CLI. To mark the state of the card as primary healthy, you can either use the Reset Configuration option in the Cisco IMC

GUI or run the reset-config command in the Cisco IMC CLI. When you reset the configuration of a particular card, the secondary card is marked as secondary active unhealthy.

• In a Degraded RAID health state all read-write transactions are done on the healthy card. In this scenario, data mirroring does not occur. Data mirroring occurs only in the Healthy RAID state.

• Data mirroring is only applicable to RAID partitions. In the C-series servers, only Hypervisor partitions operate in the RAID mode.

• If you have not configured SD cards for use with prior versions, then upgrading to the latest version loads the latest 253 firmware and enumerates all four partitions to the host.

While upgrading versions of the FlexFlash, you may see the following error message:

Unable to communicate with Flexible Flash controller: operation ffCardsGet, status

CY_AS_ERROR_INVALID_RESPONSE

”

In addition, the card status may be shown as missing. This error occurs because you accidently switched to an alternate release or a prior version, such as 1.4(x). In this scenario, you can either revert to the latest version, or you can switch back to the FlexFlash 1.4(x) configuration. If you choose to revert to the latest Cisco IMC version, then the Cisco FlexFlash configuration remains intact. If you choose to switch back to the prior version configuration, you must reset the Flexflash configuration. In this scenario, you must be aware of the following:

• If multiple cards are present, and you revert to a prior version, then the second card cannot be discovered or managed.

• If the card type is SD253, then you must run the reset-config command twice from the Cisco IMC CLI

- once to reload the old firmware on the controller and to migrate SD253 to SD247 type, and the second time to start the enumeration.

Configuring the Flexible Flash Controller Properties

After you upgrade to the latest verison of Cisco IMC or downgrade to a prior version, and reset the configuration, the server will access HV partition only.

Before You Begin

• You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

• Cisco Flexible Flash must be supported by your platform.

236

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Storage Adapters

Configuring the Flexible Flash Controller Properties

Note

This task results in the host re-scanning all the virtual drives, and a loss of virtual drive connectivity. We recommend that you configure the Cisco Flexible Flash controller properties before using any virtual drives, or power down the host prior to starting this task

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage tab.

Step 2

On the Storage tab, click Cisco FlexFlash.

Step 3

In the Controller Info tab, click Configure Operational Profile.

Step 4

In the Operational Profile dialog box, update the following fields:

Table 7: Operational Profile Fields for M5 Servers

Name

Controller field

Description

The system-defined name of the selected Cisco Flexible Flash controller.

This name cannot be changed.

Firmware Operating Mode field

System displayed message. Displays the firmware operating mode as

Mirror.

SLOT-1 Read Error Threshold

field

The number of read errors that are permitted while accessing Slot 1 of the Cisco Flexible Flash card. If the number of read errors exceeds this threshold on a card, the card is marked unhealthy.

To specify a read error threshold, enter an integer between 1 and 255.

To specify that the card should never be disabled regardless of the number of errors encountered, enter 0 (zero).

SLOT-1 Write Error Threshold

field

The number of write errors that are permitted while accessing Slot 1 of the Cisco Flexible Flash card. If the number of write errors exceeds this threshold on a card, the card is marked unhealthy.

To specify a write error threshold, enter an integer between 1 and 255.

To specify that the card should never be disabled regardless of the number of errors encountered, enter 0 (zero).

Step 5

Click Save.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

237

Managing Storage Adapters

Configuring the Flexible Flash Controller Cards

Configuring the Flexible Flash Controller Cards

Before You Begin

• You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

• Cisco Flexible Flash must be supported by your platform.

Note

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage tab.

Step 2

On the Storage tab, click Cisco FlexFlash.

Step 3

In the Actions area, click Configure Cards.

Configure Cards dialog box appears.

Step 4

In the Configure Cards dialog box, update the following fields:

Name Description

Mode field

Displays the mode type as Mirror.

Mirror Partition Name field

Auto Sync checkbox

The name that you want to assign to the partition.

If selected, data from the selected primary card syncs automatically with the secondary card.

Note

• There must be two cards for you to choose this option.

• If this option is selected, data on the secondary card is erased and overwritten by the data on the primary card.

• The status of this is displayed under the Virtual Drive tab.

Select Primary Card drop-down Slot that you want to set as the primary card. This can be one of the following:

• Slot1

• Slot2

Virtual Drive drop-down The virtual drive type. This can be one of the following:

• Removable

• Non Removable

238

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Storage Adapters

Resetting the Flexible Flash Controller

Step 5

Click Save.

The cards are configured in the chosen mode.

Resetting the Flexible Flash Controller

In normal operation, it should not be necessary to reset the Cisco Flexible Flash. We recommend that you perform this procedure only when explicitly directed to do so by a technical support representative.

Note

This operation will disrupt traffic to the virtual drives on the Cisco Flexible Flash controller.

Before You Begin

• You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

• Cisco Flexible Flash must be supported by your platform.

Procedure

Step 1

On the Storage Adapters pane, click Cisco FlexFlash.

Step 2

In the Cisco FlexFlash pane, click the Controller Info tab.

Step 3

In the Actions area, click Reset FlexFlash Controller.

Step 4

Click OK to confirm.

Enabling Virtual Drives

Before You Begin

• You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

• Cisco Flexible Flash must be supported by your platform.

Note

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

239

Managing Storage Adapters

Erasing Virtual Drives

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage tab.

Step 2

On the Storage tab, click Cisco FlexFlash.

Step 3

Click the Virtual Drive Info tab.

Step 4

In the Virtual Drive Info tab, click Enable/Disable Virtual Drive(s).

Step 5

In the Enable/Disable VD(s) dialog box, select the virtual drives that you want to enable.

Step 6

Click Save.

The selected virtual drives are enabled to the host.

Erasing Virtual Drives

Before You Begin

• You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

• Cisco Flexible Flash must be supported by your platform.

Note

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage tab.

Step 2

On the Storage tab, click Cisco FlexFlash.

Step 3

Click the Virtual Drive Info tab.

Step 4

In the Virtual Drive Info tab, click Erase Virtual Drive(s).

Step 5

In the Erase Virtual Drive(s) dialog box, select the virtual drives that you want to erase.

Step 6

Click Save.

Data on the selected virtual drives is erased.

Syncing Virtual Drives

Before You Begin

• You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

240

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Storage Adapters

Viewing FlexFlash Log Details

• Cisco Flexible Flash must be supported by your platform.

• Cards must be in mirror mode.

Note

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage tab.

Step 2

On the Storage tab, click Cisco FlexFlash.

Step 3

Click the Virtual Drive Info tab.

Step 4

In the Virtual Drive Info tab, click Sync Virtual Drive.

Step 5

Click OK in the confirmation dialog box.

Syncs the virtual drive hypervisor with the primary card.

Viewing FlexFlash Log Details

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

In the Storage menu, click the Cisco Flexible Flash Controller.

Step 3

In the FlexFlash Logs tab's FlexFlash LogTable area, review the following fields:

Name Description

Time column The date and time the event occurred.

Severity column The event severity. This can be one of the following:

• Emergency

• Alert

• Critical

• Error

• Warning

• Info

• Notice

• Debug

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

241

Managing Storage Adapters

Viewing FlexFlash Log Details

Name

Description column

Description

A description of the event.

Step 4

In the FlexFlash Logs tab's Actions area, review the following fields:

Name Description

Show drop-down list

Customize the way you want to view Cisco IMC log entries using filters. These can be:

• Quick Filter— Default view

• Advanced Filter— Filter options to display the log entries based on one or more criteria. Using the matching rule, you can view entries matching all the rules or any one combination of rules you specified in the Filter fields.

Click + to add new filtering criteria.

Click Go to view the entries matching the filter criteria that you set.

Click the Save icon to save the filter criteria that you set. This becomes a user-defined filter which you can use later.

Note

The user-defined filter appears in the

Manage Preset Filters dialog box.

• All—Displays all entries

• Manage Preset Filters—Displays user-defined filters. You can edit or remove the user-defined filter from this dialog box.

• List of pre-defined filters— Displays the system-defined filters.

Filter icon

Column drop-down list

Displays or hides the quick filter fields.

Allows you to choose the columns you want to view.

Step 5

In the FlexFlash Logs tab's Log Navigation Toolbar area, review the following fields:

Name Description

<<Newest

If there are more events than can fit on a single page, click this link to view the newest entries.

The total number of entries displayed depends on the setting in the

Entries per Page drop-down list.

242

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Storage Adapters

Managing the FlexUtil Controller

Name

<Newer

Log Entries field

Older>

Oldest>>

Page Number drop-down list

Number of Rows field

Description

If there are more events than can fit on a single page, click this link to view the next page of entries that are newer than the set you are currently viewing.

This field displays which log entries are currently being shown in the table.

If there are more events than can fit on a single page, click this link to view the next page of entries that are older than the set you are currently viewing.

If there are more events than can fit on a single page, click this link to view the oldest entries.

Allows you to navigate to a specific page. Select the page number from the drop-down list.

Displays the rows displayed in the current page.

Managing the FlexUtil Controller

The C-Series M5 Rack-Mount servers support microSD memory card for storage of server software tools and utilities. Riser 1 has this microSD memory card slot. Cisco FlexUtil supports only 32GB microSD card.

The following user visible partitions are present on the microSD card:

• Server Configuration Utility (SCU) – 1.25 GB

• Diagnostics – 0.25 GB

• Host Update Utility (HUU) – 1.5 GB

• Drivers – 8 GB

• User

Note

The number of partitions and size of each partition on microSD is fixed.

At any time, two partitions can be mapped onto the host. These partitions (except the user partition ) can also be updated through a CIFS or NFS share. A second level BIOS boot order support is also available for all the bootable partitions.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

243

Managing Storage Adapters

Configuring FlexUtil Controller Properties

Note

User partition must be used only for storage.

Configuring FlexUtil Controller Properties

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

In the Storage menu, click the Cisco FlexUtil Controller.

Step 3

In the General tab's Actions area, click Configure Operational Profile.

Step 4

In the Operational Profile dialog box, update the following fields.

Name Description

Controller field The system-defined name of the selected Flex Util controller.

This name cannot be changed.

Read Error Threshold field

Write Error Threshold field

The number of read errors that are permitted while accessing the Flex

Util card. If the number of read errors exceeds this threshold on a card, the card is marked unhealthy.

To specify a read error threshold, enter an integer between 1 and 255.

To specify that the card should never be disabled regardless of the number of errors encountered, enter 0 (zero).

The number of write errors that are permitted while accessing the Flex

Util card. If the number of write errors exceeds this threshold on a card, the card is marked unhealthy.

To specify a write error threshold, enter an integer between 1 and 255.

To specify that the card should never be disabled regardless of the number of errors encountered, enter 0 (zero).

Resetting FlexUtil Card Configuration

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

244

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Storage Adapters

Viewing Cisco FlexUtil Controller Properties

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

In the Storage menu, click the Cisco FlexUtil Controller.

Step 3

In the General tab's Actions area, click Reset Card Configuration.

This action resets the FlexUtil card configuration to its default settings.

Viewing Cisco FlexUtil Controller Properties

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

In the Storage menu, click the Cisco FlexUtil Controller.

Step 3

In the General tab's General area, review the following fields:

Name Description

Product Name field The name of the product.

Controller Name field

Controller Status field

The name for the controller.

The current status of the FlexUtil card. This can be one of the following:

• Card is absent

• Card is Unhealthy

• Metadata Read Error

• Card access error

• Invalid Card size

• Metadata is in failed state

• No partition, reset required

• Invalid partition, reset required

• Card is write protected

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

245

Managing Storage Adapters

Viewing Cisco FlexUtil Controller Properties

Name

Internal State field

Description

The internal state of the controller. This can be one of the following:

• Uninitialized—FlexUtil monitoring is not initialized.

• Initializing—FlexUtil monitoring is initializing.

• Configuring—The controller is determining the FlexUtil card configuration.

• OK—The FlexUtil card is not connected to the host.

• Connecting—The controller is connecting to the host.

• Connected—The controller is connected to the host.

• Failed—The controller has failed. See the

Controller Status field for more details.

• Erasing—The FlexUtil card is being erased.

• Updating—The FlexUtil card is being updated.

• Resetting—The configuration on the card is reset.

Step 4

In the General tab's Physical Drive Count area, review the following fields:

Name Description

Physical Drive Count field

The number of FlexUtil cards detected in the server.

Step 5

In the General tab's Virtual Drive Count area, review the following fields:

Name Description

Virtual Drive Count field

The number of virtual drives configured on the

FlexUtil cards installed in the server.

246

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Storage Adapters

Viewing Physical Drive Properties

Viewing Physical Drive Properties

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

In the Storage menu, click the Cisco FlexUtil Controller.

Step 3

In the Physical Drive tab's General area, review the following fields:

Name Description

Drive

Name of the drive.

Drive Status

Serial Number field

Indicates whether the drive is present.

The serial number for the FlexUtil card.

Manufacturer ID field

OEM ID field

Product Name field

Product Revision field

The manufacturer ID for the FlexUtil card.

The OEM ID for the FlexUtil card, if any.

The name of the FlexUtil card.

The revision number for the FlexUtil card.

Manufacturing Date field

Write Enabled field

Block Size field

Capacity field

Health

The date the FlexUtil card was manufactured, in the format mm/yy.

If this field displays true, the FlexUtil card accepts writes.

The block size on the FlexUtil card, in bytes.

The capacity of the FlexUtil card, in megabytes.

This can be one of the following:

• Healthy

• Unhealthy

Step 4

In the Physical Drive tab's Error Counters area, review the following fields.

Name Description

Read Error Threshold field The number of read errors that are permitted while accessing the FlexUtil card.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

247

Managing Storage Adapters

Viewing Virtual Drive Properties

Name

Read Error Count field

Write Error Threshold field

Write Error Count field

Description

The number of read errors encountered while handling

I/O traffic since the FlexUtil card was first installed.

The number of write errors that are permitted while accessing the FlexUtil card.

The number of write errors encountered while handling I/O traffic since the FlexUtil card was first installed.

Step 5

In the Physical Drive tab's Partition area, review the following fields.

Name Description

Partition Count field The number of partitions on the FlexUtil card.

Drives Enabled field The virtual drives enabled for access on the FlexUtil card.

Viewing Virtual Drive Properties

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

In the Storage menu, click the Cisco FlexUtil Controller.

Step 3

In the Virtual Drive tab's Virtual Drives area, review the following fields.

Name Description

Virtual Drive column

The name of the virtual drive.

ID column

LUN ID

Virtual drive ID.

The LUN ID, if available.

Drive Scope column

Size column

How the virtual drive is configured. This will always be NON RAID.

The size of the virtual drive in megabytes.

248

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Storage Adapters

Viewing Virtual Drive Properties

Name

Drive Status column

Host Accessible column

Drive Type column

Operation in Progress column

Last Operation Status column

Description

Status of the drive. This can be one of the following:

• Healthy

• Unhealthy

Indicates whether the virtual drive is mapped to the host. This can be one of the following:

• Connected

• Not-Connected

If this field displays connected, it means the virtual drive is mapped to the host.

Type of the drive. This will always be Removable.

Operation that is in progress. This can be one of the following:

• Erasing

• Erase-Pending

• Updating

• Update-Pending

• NA

Note

If your reboot Cisco IMC while any operation is running, the operation will be aborted and after the reboot the state of the operation will be set to NA.

Status of the last operation. This can be one of the following:

• Erase-Success

• Erase-Failed

• Update-Success

• Update-Failed

Step 4

In the Virtual Drive tab's Actions area, review the following fields.

Name Description

Enable/Disable Virtual Drive(s)

Allows you to enable or disable a virtual drive.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

249

Mapping an Image to a Virtual Drive

Name

Erase Virtual Drive(s)

Add Image

Update Image

Cancel Update

Unmap Image

Managing Storage Adapters

Description

Allows you to format the virtual drives to FAT 32 format.

Note

You cannot cancel an erase operation in progress or a pending erase operation.

Allows you to add an ISO image configuration for the SCU, HUU, Diagnostics, and Drivers.

Allows you to update virtual drive with the ISO image.

Note

• When erase or update is in progress or pending on any virtual drive, you cannot perform any actions available on the Virtual tab.

• Use the Cancel Update button to cancel an ongoing update operation.

Cancels any ongoing update operation.

Allows you to delete the ISO image configuration.

Mapping an Image to a Virtual Drive

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

In the Storage menu, click the Cisco FlexUtil Controller.

Step 3

Click the Virtual Drives tab.

Step 4

In the Virtual Drives area, select the virtual drive, and click Add Image.

Step 5

In the Add New Image dialog box, update the following fields:

250

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Storage Adapters

Mapping an Image to a Virtual Drive

Name

Volume field

Mount Type drop-down list

Remote Share field

Remote File field

Description

The identity of the image mounted for mapping. This can be one of the following:

• SCU

• Diagnostics

• HUU

• Drivers

The type of mapping. This can be one of the following:

• NFS—Network File System.

• CIFS—Common Internet File System.

• WWW(HTTP/HTTPS)—HTTP-based or HTTPS-based system.

The URL of the image to be mapped. The format depends on the selected

Mount Type:

• NFS—Use serverip:/share path.

• CIFS—Use //serverip/share path.

• WWW(HTTP/HTTPS)—Use http[s]://serverip/share.

The name and location of the .iso file in the remote share. Following are the example of remote share files:

• NFS — /softwares/ucs-cxx-scu-3.1.9.iso

• CIFS — /softwares/ucs-cxx-scu-3.1.9.iso

• WWW(HTTP/HTTPS) — http[s]://softwares/ucs-cxx-scu-3.1.9.iso

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

251

Managing Storage Adapters

Updating an Image on the Virtual Drive

Name

Mount Options field

Description

Industry-standard mount options entered in a comma separated list. The options vary depending on the selected Mount Type.

If you are using NFS, leave the field blank or enter one or more of the following:

• ro

• rw

• nolock

• noexec

• soft

• port=VALUE

• timeo=VALUE

• retry=VALUE

If you are using CIFS, leave the field blank or enter one or more of the following:

• soft

• nounix

• noserverino

If you are using WWW(HTTP/HTTPS), leave the field blank or enter the following:

• noauto

Note

Before mounting the image, Cisco IMC tries to verify reachability to the end server by pinging the server.

• username=VALUE

• password=VALUE

Step 6

Optional: The Add Image button is a toggle button. After you map an image, if you want to unmap the same image from the drive, select the virtual drive, and click Unmap Image.

Updating an Image on the Virtual Drive

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

252

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Storage Adapters

Unmapping an Image From a Virtual Drive

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

In the Storage menu, click the Cisco FlexUtil Controller.

Step 3

Click the Virtual Drives tab.

Step 4

In the Virtual Drives area, select the virtual drive for which you want to update an image and click Update

Image.

Step 5

Optional: If you want to cancel an ongoing update operation, click Cancel Update.

Unmapping an Image From a Virtual Drive

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

In the Storage menu, click the Cisco FlexUtil Controller.

Step 3

Click the Virtual Drives tab.

Step 4

In the Virtual Drives area, select the virtual drive for which you want to delete the image and click Unmap

Image.

Erasing a Virtual Drive

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Storage menu.

Step 2

In the Storage menu, click the Cisco FlexUtil Controller.

Step 3

Click the Virtual Drives tab.

Step 4

In the Virtual Drives area, select the virtual drive you want to erase, and click Erase Virtual Drive.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

253

Managing Storage Adapters

Scrub Policy

Scrub Policy

Scrub Policy Settings

This policy determines what happens to local data and to the BIOS settings on a server during the discovery process, when the server is re-acknowledged, or when the server is disassociated from a service profile.

Note

Local disk scrub policies only apply to hard drives that are managed by Cisco UCS Manager and do not apply to other devices such as USB drives.

Depending upon how you configure a scrub policy, the following can occur at those times:

Disk scrub

One of the following occurs to the data on any local drives on disassociation:

• If enabled, destroys all data on any local drives.

• If disabled, preserves all data on any local drives, including local storage configuration.

Note

Scrub policies are supported on all B-Series platforms and only on the following C-Series platforms:

• C240 M4

• C220 M4

• C460 M4

• C240 M5

• C220 M5

• C460 M5

BIOS Settings Scrub

One of the following occurs to the BIOS settings when a service profile containing the scrub policy is disassociated from a server:

• If enabled, erases all BIOS settings for the server and resets them to the BIOS defaults for that server type and vendor.

• If disabled, preserves the existing BIOS settings on the server.

FlexFlash Scrub

FlexFlash Scrub enables you to pair new or degraded SD cards, resolve FlexFlash metadata configuration failures, and migrate older SD cards with 4 partitions to single partition SD cards. One of the following occurs

254

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Storage Adapters

Creating a Scrub Policy

to the SD card when a service profile containing the scrub policy is disassociated from a server, or when the server is reacknowledged:

• If enabled, the HV partition on the SD card is formatted using the PNUOS formatting utility. If two SD cards are present, the cards are RAID-1 paired, and the HV partitions in both cards are marked as valid.

The card in slot 1 is marked as primary, and the card in slot 2 is marked as secondary.

• If disabled, preserves the existing SD card settings.

Note

• Because the FlexFlash scrub erases the HV partition on the SD cards, we recommend that you take a full backup of the SD card(s) using your preferred host operating system utilities before performing the FlexFlash scrub.

• To resolve metadata config failures in a service profile, you need to disable FlexFlash in the local disk config policy before you run the FlexFlash scrub, then enable FlexFlash after the server is reacknowledged.

• Disable the scrub policy as soon as the pairing is complete or the metadata failures are resolved.

• FlexFlash scrub is not supported for Cisco UCS S3260 Storage Server.

Creating a Scrub Policy

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click Servers.

Step 2

Expand Servers > Policies.

Step 3

Expand the node for the organization where you want to create the policy.

If the system does not include multitenancy, expand the root node.

Step 4

Right-click Scrub Policies and select Create Scrub Policy.

Step 5

In the Create Scrub Policy wizard, complete the following fields:

Name Description

Name field The name of the policy.

This name can be between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters. You cannot use spaces or any special characters other than - (hyphen), _

(underscore), : (colon), and . (period), and you cannot change this name after the object is saved.

Description field A description of the policy. Cisco recommends including information about where and when to use the policy.

Enter up to 256 characters. You can use any characters or spaces except

` (accent mark), \ (backslash), ^ (carat), " (double quote), = (equal sign),

> (greater than), < (less than), or ' (single quote).

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

255

Managing Storage Adapters

Deleting a Scrub Policy

Name

Disk Scrub field

BIOS Settings Scrub field

FlexFlash Scrub field

Description

If this field is set to Yes, when a service profile containing this scrub policy is disassociated from a server, all data on the server local drives is completely erased. If this field is set to No, the data on the local drives is preserved, including all local storage configuration.

If the field is set to Yes, when a service profile containing this scrub policy is disassociated from a server, the BIOS settings for that server are erased and reset to the defaults for that server type and vendor. If this field is set to No, the BIOS settings are preserved.

If the field is set to Yes, the HV partition on the SD card is formatted using the PNUOS formatting utility when the server is reacknowledged.

If this field is set to No, the SD card is preserved.

Step 6

Click OK.

Note

Disk scrub and FlexFlash Scrub options are not supported for Cisco UCS S3260 Storage Server.

Deleting a Scrub Policy

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click Servers.

Step 2

Expand Servers > Policies > Organization_Name.

Step 3

Expand the Scrub Policies node.

Step 4

Right-click the policy you want to delete and select Delete.

Step 5

If a confirmation dialog box displays, click Yes.

256

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

C H A P T E R

Configuring Communication Services

This chapter includes the following sections:

•

Configuring HTTP, page 257

•

Configuring SSH, page 258

•

Configuring XML API, page 259

•

Enabling Redfish, page 260

•

Configuring IPMI, page 260

•

Configuring SNMP, page 262

•

Configuring a Server to Send Email Alerts Using SMTP, page 268

Configuring HTTP

Before You Begin

You must log in as a user with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Communication Services.

Step 3

In the HTTP Properties area, update the following properties:

Name Description

HTTP/S Enabled check box Whether HTTP and HTTPS are enabled on the Cisco IMC.

Redirect HTTP to HTTPS

Enabled check box

If enabled, all attempts to communicate via HTTP are redirected to the equivalent HTTPS address.

We strongly recommend that you enable this option if you enable HTTP.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

257

Configuring Communication Services

Configuring SSH

Name

HTTP Port field

HTTPS Port field

Session Timeout field

Max Sessions field

Active Sessions field

Description

The port to use for HTTP communication. The default is 80.

The port to use for HTTPS communication. The default is 443

The number of seconds to wait between HTTP requests before the Cisco

IMC times out and terminates the session.

Enter an integer between 60 and 10,800. The default is 1,800 seconds.

The maximum number of concurrent HTTP and HTTPS sessions allowed on the Cisco IMC.

This value may not be changed.

The number of HTTP and HTTPS sessions currently running on the

Cisco IMC.

Step 4

Click Save Changes.

Configuring SSH

Before You Begin

You must log in as a user with admin privileges to configure SSH.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Communication Services.

Step 3

In the SSH Properties area, update the following properties:

Name Description

SSH Enabled check box Whether SSH is enabled on the Cisco IMC.

SSH Port field The port to use for secure shell access. The default is 22.

SSH Timeout field The number of seconds to wait before the system considers an SSH request to have timed out.

Enter an integer between 60 and 10,800. The default is 1,800 seconds.

258

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Configuring Communication Services

Configuring XML API

Name

Max Sessions field

Active Sessions field

Step 4

Click Save Changes.

Description

The maximum number of concurrent SSH sessions allowed on the Cisco

IMC.

This value may not be changed.

The number of SSH sessions currently running on the Cisco IMC.

Configuring XML API

XML API for Cisco IMC

The Cisco Cisco IMC XML application programming interface (API) is a programmatic interface to Cisco

IMC for a C-Series Rack-Mount Server. The API accepts XML documents through HTTP or HTTPS.

For detailed information about the XML API, see Cisco UCS Rack-Mount Servers Cisco IMC XML API

Programmer’s Guide.

Enabling the XML API

Before You Begin

You must log in as a user with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Communication Services.

Step 3

In the XML API Properties area, update the following properties:

Name Description

XML API Enabled check box

Whether API access is allowed on this server.

Max Sessions field

Active Sessions field

The maximum number of concurrent API sessions allowed on the Cisco

IMC.

This value may not be changed.

The number of API sessions currently running on the Cisco IMC.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

259

Configuring Communication Services

Enabling Redfish

Step 4

Click Save Changes.

Enabling Redfish

Before You Begin

You must be logged in as admin to perform this action.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin tab.

Step 2

On the Admin tab, click Communications Services.

Step 3

In the Redfish Properties area, update the following properties:

Name Description

XML API Enabled check box

Whether API access is allowed on this server.

Max Sessions field

Active Sessions field

The maximum number of concurrent API sessions allowed on the Cisco

IMC.

This value may not be changed.

The number of API sessions currently running on the Cisco IMC.

Step 4

Click Save Changes.

Configuring IPMI

IPMI Over LAN

Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) defines the protocols for interfacing with a service processor embedded in a server platform. This service processor is called a Baseboard Management Controller (BMC) and resides on the server motherboard. The BMC links to a main processor and other on-board elements using a simple serial bus.

During normal operations, IPMI lets a server operating system obtain information about system health and control system hardware. For example, IPMI enables the monitoring of sensors, such as temperature, fan speeds and voltages, for proactive problem detection. If server temperature rises above specified levels, the server operating system can direct the BMC to increase fan speed or reduce processor speed to address the problem.

260

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Configuring Communication Services

Configuring IPMI over LAN

Configuring IPMI over LAN

Configure IPMI over LAN when you want to manage the Cisco IMC with IPMI messages.

Before You Begin

You must log in as a user with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Communication Services.

Step 3

In the IPMI over LAN Properties area, update the following properties for BMC 1, BMC 2, CMC 1, or

CMC 2:

Name Description

Enabled check box

Whether IPMI access is allowed on this server.

Privilege Level Limit drop-down list

The highest privilege level that can be assigned to an IPMI session on this server. This can be one of the following:

• read-only—IPMI users can view information but cannot make any changes. If you select this option, IPMI users with the

"Administrator", "Operator", or "User" user roles can only create read-only IPMI sessions, regardless of their other IPMI privileges.

• user—IPMI users can perform some functions but cannot perform administrative tasks. If you select this option, IPMI users with the

"Administrator" or "Operator" user role can create user and read-only sessions on this server.

• admin—IPMI users can perform all available actions. If you select this option, IPMI users with the "Administrator" user role can create admin, user, and read-only sessions on this server.

Encryption Key field

Randomize button

The IPMI encryption key to use for IPMI communications.

Enables you to change the IPMI encryption key to a random value.

Step 4

Click Save Changes.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

261

Configuring Communication Services

Configuring SNMP

Configuring SNMP

SNMP

The Cisco UCS C-Series Rack-Mount Servers support the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) for viewing server configuration and status and for sending fault and alert information by SNMP traps. For information on Management Information Base (MIB) files supported by Cisco IMC, see the MIB Quick

Reference for Cisco UCS at this URL: http://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/td/docs/unified_computing/ucs/sw/mib/ b-series/b_UCS_MIBRef.html

Configuring SNMP Properties

Before You Begin

You must log in as a user with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Communication Services.

Step 3

In the Communications Services pane, click the SNMP tab.

Step 4

In the SNMP Properties area, update the following properties:

Name Description

SNMP Enabled check box Whether this server sends SNMP traps to the designated host.

Note

After you check this check box, you need to click Save

Changes before you can configure SNMP users or traps.

SNMP Port field

Access Community String field

The port on which Cisco IMC SNMP agent runs.

Enter an SNMP port number within the range 1 to 65535. The default port number is 161.

Note

The port numbers that are reserved for system calls, such as

22,23,80,123,443,623,389,636,3268,3269 and 2068, cannot be used as an SNMP port.

The default SNMP v1 or v2c community name Cisco IMC includes on any SNMP get operations.

Enter a string up to 18 characters.

262

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Configuring Communication Services

Configuring SNMP Trap Settings

Name

SNMP Community Access

drop-down list

Trap Community String field

System Contact field

System Location field

SNMP Input Engine ID field

SNMP Engine ID field

Description

This can be one of the following:

• Disabled — This option blocks access to the information in the inventory tables.

• Limited — This option provides partial access to read the information in the inventory tables.

• Full — This option provides full access to read the information in the inventory tables.

Note

SNMP Community Access is applicable only for SNMP v1 and v2c users.

The name of the SNMP community group used for sending SNMP trap to other devices.

Enter a string up to 18 characters.

Note

This field is visible only for SNMP v1 and v2c users. SNMP v3 users need to use SNMP v3 credentials.

The system contact person responsible for the SNMP implementation.

Enter a string up to 64 characters, such as an email address or a name and telephone number.

The location of the host on which the SNMP agent (server) runs.

Enter a string up to 64 characters.

User-defined unique identification of the static engine.

Unique string to identify the device for administration purpose. This is generated from the SNMP Input Engine ID if it is already defined, else it is derived from the BMC serial number.

Step 5

Click Save Changes.

What to Do Next

Configure SNMP trap settings.

Configuring SNMP Trap Settings

Before You Begin

You must log in as a user with admin privileges to perform this task.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

263

Configuring Communication Services

Configuring SNMP Trap Settings

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Communication Services.

Step 3

In the Communications Services pane, click the SNMP tab.

Step 4

Click on Trap Destinations tab.

Step 5

In the Trap Destinations area, you can perform one of the following:

• Select an existing user from the table and click Modify Trap.

• Click Add Trap to create a new user.

Note

If the fields are not highlighted, select

Enabled.

Step 6

In the Trap Details dialog box, complete the following fields:

Name Description

ID field The trap destination ID. This value cannot be modified.

Enabled check box drop-down list If checked, then this trap is active on the server.

Version drop-down list

The SNMP version and model used for the trap. This can be one of the following:

• V2

• V3

Trap Type radio button drop-down list

The type of trap to send. This can be one of the following:

• Trap: If this option is chosen, the trap will be sent to the destination but you do not receive any notifications.

• Inform: You can choose this option only for V2 users. If chosen, you will receive a notification when a trap is received at the destination.

User drop-down list The drop-down list displays all available users, select a user from the list.

Trap Destination Address field Address to which the SNMP trap information is sent. You can set an

IPv4 or IPv6 address or a domain name as the trap destination.

Port

The port the server uses to communicate with the trap destination.

Enter a trap destination port number within the range 1 to 65535.

264

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Configuring Communication Services

Sending a Test SNMP Trap Message

Step 7

Click Save Changes.

Step 8

If you want to delete a trap destination, select the row and click Delete.

Click OK in the delete confirmation prompt.

Sending a Test SNMP Trap Message

Before You Begin

You must log in as a user with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Communication Services.

Step 3

In the Communication Services pane, click SNMP.

Step 4

In the Trap Destinations area, select the row of the desired SNMP trap destination.

Step 5

Click Send SNMP Test Trap.

An SNMP test trap message is sent to the trap destination.

Note

The trap must be configured and enabled in order to send a test message.

Managing SNMP Users

Before You Begin

• You must log in as a user with admin privileges to perform this task.

• SNMP must be enabled.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Communication Services.

Step 3

In the Communications Services pane, click the SNMP tab.

Step 4

In the User Settings area, update the following properties:

Name Description

Add User button

Click an available row in the table then click this button to add a new

SNMP user.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

265

Configuring Communication Services

Configuring SNMP Users

Name

Modify User button

Delete User button

ID column

Name column

Auth Type column

Privacy Type column

Step 5

Click Save Changes.

Description

Select the user you want to change in the table then click this button to modify the selected SNMP user.

Select the user you want to delete in the table then click this button to delete the selected SNMP user.

The system-assigned identifier for the SNMP user.

The SNMP user name.

The user authentication type.

The user privacy type.

Configuring SNMP Users

Before You Begin

• You must log in as a user with admin privileges to perform this task.

• SNMP must be enabled.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Communication Services.

Step 3

In the Communications Services pane, click the SNMP tab.

Step 4

In the User Settings area, perform one of the following actions:

• Select an existing user from the table and click Modify User.

• Select a row in the Users area and click Add User to create a new user.

Step 5

In the SNMP User Details dialog box, update the following properties:

Name Description

ID field The unique identifier for the user. This field cannot be changed.

266

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Configuring Communication Services

Configuring SNMP Users

Name

Name field

Security Level drop-down list

Description

The SNMP username.

Enter between 1 and 31 characters or spaces.

Note

Cisco IMC automatically trims leading or trailing spaces.

The security level for this user. This can be one of the following:

• no auth, no priv—The user does not require an authorization or privacy password.

• auth, no priv—The user requires an authorization password but not a privacy password. If you select this option, Cisco IMC enables the Auth fields described below.

• auth, priv—The user requires both an authorization password and a privacy password. If you select this option, Cisco IMC enables the Auth and Privacy fields.

Auth Type drop-down The authorization type. This can be one of the following:

• MD5

• SHA

Auth Password field

Confirm Auth Password field

Privacy Type drop-down

The authorization password for this SNMP user.

Enter between 8 and 64 characters or spaces.

Note

Cisco IMC automatically trims leading or trailing spaces.

The authorization password again for confirmation purposes.

The privacy type. This can be one of the following:

• DES

• AES

Privacy Password field

The privacy password for this SNMP user.

Enter between 8 and 64 characters or spaces.

Note

Cisco IMC automatically trims leading or trailing spaces.

Confirm Privacy Password field

The authorization password again for confirmation purposes.

Step 6

Click Save Changes.

Step 7

If you want to delete a user, select the user and click Delete User.

Click OK in the delete confirmation prompt.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

267

Configuring Communication Services

Configuring a Server to Send Email Alerts Using SMTP

Configuring a Server to Send Email Alerts Using SMTP

The Cisco IMC supports email-based notification of server faults to recipients without relying on the SNMP.

The system uses the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) to send server faults as email alerts to the configured

SMTP server.

A maximum of four recipients is supported.

Configuring SMTP Server For Receiving Email Alerts

Configure the SMTP properties and add email recipients on the Mail Alert tab to receive email notifications for server faults.

Before You Begin

You must log in as a user with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Communication Services.

Step 3

In the Communications Services pane, click the Mail Alert tab.

Step 4

In the SMTP Properties area, update the following properties.

Name Description

SMTP Enabled checkbox

If checked, it enables the SMTP service.

SMTP Server Address field

SMTP Port field

Allows you to enter the SMTP server address.

Allows you to enter the SMTP port number. The default port number is 25.

268

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Configuring Communication Services

Adding SMTP Email Recipients

Name

Minimum Severity to Report

drop-down list

Description

Allows you to choose the minimum severity level for receiving the email alert. This can be one of the following:

• Condition

• Warning

• Minor

• Major

• Critical

If you choose a minimum severity level, the mail alerts are sent for that level and the other higher severity levels. For example, if you choose

'Minor' as the minimum severity level, you will receive email alerts for the minor, major, and critical fault events.

Step 5

In the SMTP Recipients area, do the following: a) Click the Add (+) button to add the email recipients to whom notifications should be sent. Enter the email

ID and click Save.

To delete an email recipient, select the email recipient and click the Delete (X) button.

b) Click Send Test Mail to check whether the email recipient you added is reachable.

If the email address and the SMTP settings are valid, a confirmation pop-up window appears with the message that an email has been sent. If the settings are not valid, a confirmation pop-up window appears with the message that no email has been sent. The Reachability column indicates whether test mails have been sent successfully to the email recipient. The Reachability column has one of the following values:

• Yes (if the test mail has been sent successfully)

• No (if the test mail has not been sent successfully)

• na (if no test mail has been sent)

Step 6

Click Save Changes.

Adding SMTP Email Recipients

Add email recipients on the Mail Alert tab to receive email notifications for server faults.

Before You Begin

• You must log in as a user with admin privileges to perform this task.

• Configure the SMTP server properties in the SMTP Properties area. See

Configuring SMTP Server For

Receiving Email Alerts, on page 268

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

269

Configuring Communication Services

Adding SMTP Email Recipients

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Communication Services.

Step 3

In the Communications Services pane, click the Mail Alert tab.

Step 4

In the SMTP Recipients area, do the following: a) Click the Add (+) button to add the email recipients to whom notifications should be sent. Enter the email

ID and click Save.

b) Click Send Test Mail to check whether the email recipient you added is reachable.

• Yes (if the test mail has been sent successfully)

• No (if the test mail has not been sent successfully)

• na (if no test mail has been sent)

270

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

C H A P T E R

Managing Certificates and Server Security

This chapter includes the following sections:

•

Managing the Server Certificate, page 271

•

Generating a Certificate Signing Request, page 272

•

Creating a Self-Signed Certificate, page 274

•

Creating a Self-Signed Certificate Using Windows, page 276

•

Uploading a Server Certificate, page 276

•

Key Management Interoperability Protocol, page 277

•

FIPS 140-2 Compliance in Cisco IMC, page 294

Managing the Server Certificate

You can generate a certificate signing request (CSR) to obtain a new certificate, and you can upload the new certificate to the Cisco IMC to replace the current server certificate. The server certificate may be signed either by a public Certificate Authority (CA), such as Verisign, or by your own certificate authority. The generated certificate key length is 2048 bits.

Note

Before performing any of the following tasks in this chapter, ensure that the Cisco IMC time is set to the current time.

Procedure

Step 1

Generate the CSR from the Cisco IMC.

Step 2

Submit the CSR file to a certificate authority that will issue and sign your certificate. If your organization generates its own self-signed certificates, you can use the CSR file to generate a self-signed certificate.

Step 3

Upload the new certificate to the Cisco IMC.

Note

The uploaded certificate must be created from a CSR generated by the Cisco IMC. Do not upload a certificate that was not created by this method.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

271

Managing Certificates and Server Security

Generating a Certificate Signing Request

Generating a Certificate Signing Request

Note

Do not use special characters (For example ampersand (&)) in the Common Name and Organization

Unit fields.

Before You Begin

• You must log in as a user with admin privileges to configure certificates.

• Ensure that the Cisco IMC time is set to the current time.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Security Management.

Step 3

In the Actions area, click the Generate New Certificate Signing Request link.

The Generate New Certificate Signing Request dialog box appears.

Step 4

In the Generate New Certificate Signing Request dialog box, update the following properties:

Name Description

Common Name field The fully qualified name of the Cisco IMC.

By default the CN of the servers appears in CXXX-YYYYYY format, where XXX is the model number and YYYYYY is the serial number of the server.

When you upgrade to latest version, CN is retained as is.

Subject Alternate Name (SAN)

You can now provide additional input parameter for Subject Alternate

Name. This allows various values to be associated using the subject field of the certificate.

The various options of SAN includes:

• Email

• DNS name

• IP address

• Uniform Resource Identifier (URI)

Organization Name field

Note

This field is optional. You can configure any number of SAN instances of each type, but all together the instances count must not exceed 10.

The organization requesting the certificate.

272

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Certificates and Server Security

Generating a Certificate Signing Request

Name

Organization Unit field

Locality field

State Name field

Description

The organizational unit.

The city or town in which the company requesting the certificate is headquartered.

The state or province in which the company requesting the certificate is headquartered.

Country Code drop-down list

Email field

Signature Algorithm

The country in which the company resides.

The email contact at the company.

Allows you to select the signature algorithm for generating certificate signing request. This can be one of the following:

• SHA384

• SHA1

• SHA256

• SHA512

The default signature algorithm selected for generating certificate signing request is SHA384.

Self Signed Certificate check box Generates a Self Signed Certificate.

Warning

After successful certificate generation, the Cisco IMC Web

GUI restarts. Communication with the management controller may be lost momentarily and you will need to

Note

re-login.

If enabled, CSR is generated, signed and uploaded automatically.

Note

If Self-signed certificate is enabled, ignore steps 5 and

Step 5

Click Generate CSR.

The Opening csr.txt dialog box appears.

Step 6

Perform any one of the following steps to manage the CSR file, csr.txt: a) Click Open With to view csr.txt.

b) Click Save File and then click OK to save csr.txt to your local machine.

What to Do Next

• Submit the CSR file to a certificate authority that will issue and sign your certificate. If your organization generates its own self-signed certificates, you can use the CSR file to generate a self-signed certificate.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

273

Managing Certificates and Server Security

Creating a Self-Signed Certificate

• Ensure that the certificate is of type Server.

Creating a Self-Signed Certificate

As an alternative to using a public Certificate Authority (CA) to generate and sign a server certificate, you can operate your own CA and sign your own certificates. This section shows commands for creating a CA and generating a server certificate using the OpenSSL certificate server running on Linux. For detailed information about OpenSSL, see http://www.openssl.org

Note

These commands are to be entered on a Linux server with the OpenSSL package, not in the Cisco IMC.

Before You Begin

• Obtain and install a certificate server software package on a server within your organization.

• Ensure that the Cisco IMC time is set to the current time.

Procedure

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Command or Action Purpose

openssl genrsa -out CA_keyfilename keysize

Example:

# openssl genrsa -out ca.key 2048

This command generates an RSA private key that will be used by the CA.

Note

To allow the CA to access the key without user input, do not use the -des3 option for this command.

The specified file name contains an RSA key of the specified key size.

openssl req -new -x509 -days numdays -key

CA_keyfilename -out CA_certfilename

This command generates a new self-signed certificate for the CA using the specified key. The certificate is valid for the specified period. The command prompts the user for additional certificate information.

Example:

# openssl req -new -x509 -days 365

-key ca.key -out ca.crt

The certificate server is an active CA.

echo "nsCertType = server" > openssl.conf

Example:

# echo "nsCertType = server" > openssl.conf

This command adds a line to the OpenSSL configuration file to designate the certificate as a server-only certificate. This designation is a defense against a man-in-the-middle attack, in which an authorized client attempts to impersonate the server.

The OpenSSL configuration file openssl.conf contains the statement "nsCertType = server".

openssl x509 -req -days numdays -in

CSR_filename -CA CA_certfilename

-set_serial 04 -CAkey CA_keyfilename -out

server_certfilename -extfile openssl.conf

This command directs the CA to use your CSR file to generate a server certificate.

Your server certificate is contained in the output file.

274

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Certificates and Server Security

Creating a Self-Signed Certificate

Command or Action Purpose

Step 5

Step 6

Example:

# openssl x509 -req -days 365 -in csr.txt -CA ca.crt -set_serial 04

-CAkey ca.key -out myserver05.crt

-extfile openssl.conf

openssl x509 -noout -text -purpose -in

<cert file>

Example:

openssl x509 -noout -text -purpose -in

Verifies if the generated certificate is of type Server.

Note

If the values of the fields Server SSL and

Netscape SSL server are not yes, ensure that openssl.conf is configured to generate certificates of type server.

If the generated certificate does not have the correct validity dates, ensure the Cisco IMC time is set to the current time, and regenerate the certificate by repeating steps 1 through

(Optional)

Certificate with the correct validity dates is created.

This example shows how to create a CA and to generate a server certificate signed by the new CA. These commands are entered on a Linux server running OpenSSL.

/usr/bin/openssl genrsa -out ca.key 2048

Generating RSA private key, 2048 bit long modulus

.............++++++

.....++++++ e is 65537 (0x10001)

/usr/bin/openssl req -new -x509 -days 365 -key ca.key -out ca.crt

You are about to be asked to enter information that will be incorporated into your certificate request.

What you are about to enter is what is called a Distinguished Name or a

DN.

There are quite a few fields but you can leave some blank

For some fields there will be a default value,

If you enter '.', the field will be left blank.

-----

Country Name (2 letter code) [GB]:

State or Province Name (full name) [Berkshire]:

California

Locality Name (eg, city) [Newbury]:

San Jose

Organization Name (eg, company) [My Company Ltd]:

Example Incorporated

Organizational Unit Name (eg, section) []:

Unit A

Common Name (eg, your name or your server's hostname) []: example.com

Email Address []: [email protected]

# echo "nsCertType = server" > openssl.conf

/usr/bin/openssl x509 -req -days 365 -in csr.txt -CA ca.crt -set_serial 01 -CAkey ca.key -out server.crt

-extfile openssl.conf

Signature ok subject=/C=US/ST=California/L=San Jose/O=Example Inc./OU=Unit

A/CN=example.com/[email protected]

Getting CA Private Key

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

275

Managing Certificates and Server Security

Creating a Self-Signed Certificate Using Windows

What to Do Next

Upload the new certificate to the Cisco IMC.

Creating a Self-Signed Certificate Using Windows

Before You Begin

• You must log in as a user with admin privileges to configure certificates.

• Ensure that the Cisco IMC time is set to the current time.

Procedure

Step 1

Open IIS Manager and navigate to the level you want to manage.

Step 2

In the Features area, double-click Server Certificate.

Step 3

In the Action pane, click Create Self-Signed Certificate.

Step 4

On the Create Self-Signed Certificate window, enter name for the certificate in the Specify a friendly name

for the certificate field.

Step 5

Click Ok.

Step 6

(Optional) If the generated certificate does not have the correct validity dates, ensure the Cisco IMC time is set to the current time, and regenerate the certificate by repeating steps 1 through 5.

Certificate with the correct validity dates is created.

Uploading a Server Certificate

You can either browse and select the certificate to be uploaded to the server or copy the entire content of the signed certificate and paste it in the Paste certificate content text field and upload it.

Before You Begin

• You must log in as a user with admin privileges to upload a certificate.

• The certificate file to be uploaded must reside on a locally accessible file system.

• Ensure that the generated certificate is of type server.

Note

You must first generate a CSR using the Cisco IMC Certificate Management menu, and you must use that

CSR to obtain the certificate for uploading. Do not upload a certificate that was not obtained by this method.

276

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Certificates and Server Security

Key Management Interoperability Protocol

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Certificate Management.

Step 3

In the Actions area, click Upload Server Certificate.

The Upload Certificate dialog box appears.

Step 4

In the Upload Certificate dialog box, update the following properties:

Name Description

File field The certificate file you want to upload.

Browse button Opens a dialog box that allows you to navigate to the appropriate certificate file.

Paste Certificate content radio button

Upload Certificate button

Opens a dialog box that allows you to copy the entire content of the signed certificate and paste it in the Paste certificate content text field.

Note

Ensure the certificate is signed before uploading.

Allows you to upload the certificate.

Step 5

Click Upload Certificate.

Key Management Interoperability Protocol

Key Management Interoperability Protocol (KMIP) is a communication protocol that defines message formats to handle keys or classified data on a key management server. KMIP is an open standard and is supported by several vendors. Key management involves multiple interoperable implementations, so a KMIP client works effectively with any KMIP server.

Self-Encrypting Drives(SEDs) contain hardware that encrypts incoming data and decrypts outgoing data in realtime. A drive or media encryption key controls this function. However, the drives need to be locked in order to maintain security. A security key identifier and a security key (key encryption key) help achieve this goal. The key identifier provides a unique ID to the drive.

Different keys have different usage requirements. Currently, the responsibility of managing and tracking local keys lies primarily with the user, which could result in human error. The user needs to remember the different keys and their functions, which could prove to be a challenge. KMIP addresses this area of concern to manage the keys effectively without human involvement.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

277

Managing Certificates and Server Security

Viewing Secure Key Management Settings

Viewing Secure Key Management Settings

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Security Management.

Step 3

In the Security Management pane, click Secure Key Management.

Step 4

In the Work pane, review the following field:

Name Description

Enable Secure Key Management check box

If checked, allows you to enable the secure key management feature.

Step 5

In the Actions Area, review the following fields:

Name

Download Root CA Certificate link

Export Root CA Certificate link

Delete Root CA Certificate link

Download Client Certificate link

Export Client Certificate link

Delete Client Certificate link

Download Client Private Key link

Export Client Private Key link

Delete Client Private Key link

Delete KMIP Login link

Description

This allows you to download the root CA certificate to Cisco IMC.

This allows you to export the downloaded root CA certificate to a local file or remote server.

This allows you to delete the root CA certificate.

This allows you to download the client certificate to

Cisco IMC.

This allows you to export the downloaded client certificate to a local file or remote server.

This allows you to delete the client certificate.

This allows you to download the client private key to Cisco IMC.

This allows you to export the downloaded root CA certificate to local file or remote server.

This allows you to delete the root CA certificate.

This allows you to delete the KMIP login details.

Step 6

In the KMIP Servers Area, review the following fields:

278

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Certificates and Server Security

Viewing Secure Key Management Settings

Name

ID field

IP Address field

Port field

Timeout field

Delete button

Test Connection button

Description

ID for the KMIP server configuration.

IP address of the KMIP server.

Communication port to the KMIP server.

Time period that Cisco IMC waits for a response from the KMIP server.

Deletes the KMIP server configuration.

Tests whether or not the KMIP connection was successful.

Step 7

In the KMIP Root CA Certificate Area, review the following fields:

Name Description

Server Root CA Certificate field Indicates the availability of the root CA certificate.

Download Status field This field displays the status of the root CA certificate download.

Download Progress field

Export Status field

Export Progress field

This field displays the progress of the root CA certificate download.

This field displays the status of the root CA certificate export.

This field displays the progress of the root CA certificate export.

Step 8

In the KMIP Client Certificate Area, review the following fields:

Name Description

Client Certificate field Indicates the availability of the client certificate.

Download Status field This field displays the status of the client certificate download.

Download Progress field

Export Status field

This field displays the progress of the client certificate download.

This field displays the status of the client certificate export.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

279

Managing Certificates and Server Security

Viewing Secure Key Management Settings

Name

Export Progress field

Description

This field displays the progress of the client certificate export.

Step 9

In the KMIP Login Details Area, review the following fields:

Name Description

Use KMIP Login check box Allows you to choose whether or not to use KMIP login details.

Login name to KMIP Server field

Password to KMIP Server field

User name of the KMIP server.

Password of the KMIP server.

Change Password check box

New Password field

Confirm Password field

Allows you to change the KMIP password.

Allows you to enter the new password that you want to assign to the KMIP server.

Note

This option is only visible when you enable the Change Password check box.

Enter the new password again in this field.

Note

This option is only visible when you enable the Change Password check box.

Step 10 In the KMIP Client Private Key Area, review the following fields:

Name Description

Client Private Key field Indicates the availability of the client private key.

Download Status field

This field displays the status of the client private key download.

Download Progress field

Export Status field

Export Progress field

This field displays the progress of the client private key download.

This field displays the status of the client private key export.

This field displays the progress of the client private key export.

280

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Certificates and Server Security

Creating a Client Private Key and Client Certificate for KMIP Configuration

Creating a Client Private Key and Client Certificate for KMIP Configuration

Note

These commands are to be entered on a Linux server with the OpenSSL package, not in the Cisco IMC.

Before You Begin

• Obtain and install a certificate server software package on a server within your organization.

• Ensure that the Cisco IMC time is set to the current time.

Procedure

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Command or Action Purpose openssl genrsa -out

Client_Privatekeyfilename keysize

This command generates a client private key that will be used to generate the client certificate.

The specified file name contains an RSA key of the specified key size.

Example:

# openssl genrsa

–out client_private.pem 2048

openssl req -new -x509 -days numdays

-key Client_Privatekeyfilename -out

Client_certfilename

Example:

# openssl req -new -x509 -key client_private.pem -out client.pem

-days 365

This command generates a new self-signed client certificate using the client private key obtained from the previous step. The certificate is valid for the specified period. The command prompts the user for additional certificate information.

A new self-signed client certificate is created.

Obtain the KMIP root CA certificate from the KMIP server.

Refer to the KMIP vendor documentation for details on obtaining the root CA certificate.

What to Do Next

Upload the new certificate to the Cisco IMC.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

281

Managing Certificates and Server Security

Downloading a Client Certificate

Downloading a Client Certificate

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Security Management.

Step 3

In the Security Management pane, click Secure Key Management.

Step 4

In the Actions area of the Secure Key Management tab, click Download Client Certificate.

Step 5

In the Download Client Certificate dialog box, complete these fields:

Name Description

Download From Remote

Location radio button

Selecting this option allows you to choose the certificate from a remote location and download it. Enter the following details:

• ◦TFTP Server

◦FTP Server

◦SFTP Server

◦SCP Server

◦HTTP Server

Note

If you chose SCP or SFTP as the remote server type while performing this action, a pop-up window is displayed with the message Server (RSA) key fingerprint is

<server_finger_print _ID> Do you wish to continue?.

Click Yes or No depending on the authenticity of the server fingerprint.

The fingerprint is based on the host's public key and helps you to identify or verify the host you are connecting to.

• Server IP/Hostname field — The IP address or hostname of the server on which the client certificate file should be stored.

Depending on the setting in the Download Certificate from drop-down list, the name of the field may vary.

• Path and Filename field — The path and filename Cisco IMC should use when downloading the file to the remote server.

• Username field — The username the system should use to log in to the remote server. This field does not apply if the protocol is

TFTP or HTTP.

• Password field — The password for the remote server username.

This field does not apply if the protocol is TFTP or HTTP.

282

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Certificates and Server Security

Exporting a Client Certificate

Name

Download Through Browser

Client radio button

Paste Content radio button

Description

Selecting this option allows you to navigate to the certificate stored on a drive that is local to the computer running the Cisco IMC GUI.

When you select this option, Cisco IMC GUI displays a Browse button that lets you navigate to the file you want to import.

Selecting this option allows you to copy the entire content of the signed certificate and paste it in the Paste Certificate Content text field.

Note

Ensure the certificate is signed before uploading.

Exporting a Client Certificate

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Security Management.

Step 3

In the Security Management pane, click Secure Key Management.

Step 4

In the Actions area of the Secure Key Management tab, click Export Client Certificate.

Step 5

In the Export Client Certificate dialog box, complete these fields:

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

283

Managing Certificates and Server Security

Exporting a Client Certificate

Name

Export to Remote Location

Export to Local File

Description

Selecting this option allows you to choose the certificate from a remote location and export it. Enter the following details:

• ◦TFTP Server

◦FTP Server

◦SFTP Server

◦SCP Server

◦HTTP Server

Note

If you chose SCP or SFTP as the remote server type while performing this action, a pop-up window is displayed with the message Server

(RSA) key fingerprint is

<server_finger_print _ID> Do you

wish to continue?. Click Yes or No depending on the authenticity of the server fingerprint.

The fingerprint is based on the host's public key and helps you to identify or verify the host you are connecting to.

• Server IP/Hostname field — The IP address or hostname of the server on which the certificate file should be exported. Depending on the setting in the Download Certificate

from drop-down list, the name of the field may vary.

• Path and Filename field — The path and filename Cisco IMC should use when downloading the certificate from the remote server.

• Username field — The username the system should use to log in to the remote server. This field does not apply if the protocol is TFTP or

HTTP.

• Password field — The password for the remote server username. This field does not apply if the protocol is TFTP or HTTP.

Selecting this option allows you to choose the certificate stored on a drive that is local to the computer and export it.

284

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Certificates and Server Security

Deleting a Client Certificate

Deleting a Client Certificate

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Security Management.

Step 3

In the Security Management pane, click Secure Key Management.

Step 4

In the Actions area of the Secure Key Management tab, click Delete Client Certificate.

Step 5

At the prompt, click OK to delete the client certificate, or Cancel to cancel the action.

Downloading a Root CA Certificate

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Security Management.

Step 3

In the Security Management pane, click Secure Key Management.

Step 4

In the Actions area of the Secure Key Management tab, click Download Root CA Certificate.

Step 5

In the Download Root CA Certificate dialog box, complete these fields:

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

285

Managing Certificates and Server Security

Downloading a Root CA Certificate

Name

Download From Remote

Location radio button

Description

Selecting this option allows you to choose the certificate from a remote location and download it. Enter the following details:

• ◦TFTP Server

◦FTP Server

◦SFTP Server

◦SCP Server

◦HTTP Server

Note

If you chose SCP or SFTP as the remote server type while performing this action, a pop-up window is displayed with the message Server (RSA) key fingerprint is

<server_finger_print _ID> Do you wish to continue?.

Click Yes or No depending on the authenticity of the server fingerprint.

The fingerprint is based on the host's public key and helps you to identify or verify the host you are connecting to.

• Server IP/Hostname field — The IP address or hostname of the server on which the root CA certificate file should be stored.

Depending on the setting in the Download Certificate from drop-down list, the name of the field may vary.

• Path and Filename field — The path and filename Cisco IMC should use when downloading the file to the remote server.

• Username field — The username the system should use to log in to the remote server. This field does not apply if the protocol is

TFTP or HTTP.

• Password field — The password for the remote server username.

This field does not apply if the protocol is TFTP or HTTP.

Download Through Browser

Client radio button

Paste Content radio button

Selecting this option allows you to navigate to the certificate stored on a drive that is local to the computer running the Cisco IMC GUI.

When you select this option, Cisco IMC GUI displays a Browse button that lets you navigate to the file you want to import.

Selecting this option allows you to copy the entire content of the signed certificate and paste it in the Paste Certificate Content text field.

Note

Ensure the certificate is signed before uploading.

286

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Certificates and Server Security

Exporting a Root CA Certificate

Exporting a Root CA Certificate

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Security Management.

Step 3

In the Security Management pane, click Secure Key Management.

Step 4

In the Actions area of the Secure Key Management tab, click Export Root CA Certificate.

Step 5

In the Export Root CA Certificate dialog box, complete these fields:

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

287

Managing Certificates and Server Security

Exporting a Root CA Certificate

Name

Export to Remote Location

Export to Local File

Description

Selecting this option allows you to choose the certificate from a remote location and export it. Enter the following details:

• ◦TFTP Server

◦FTP Server

◦SFTP Server

◦SCP Server

◦HTTP Server

Note

If you chose SCP or SFTP as the remote server type while performing this action, a pop-up window is displayed with the message Server

(RSA) key fingerprint is

<server_finger_print _ID> Do you

wish to continue?. Click Yes or No depending on the authenticity of the server fingerprint.

The fingerprint is based on the host's public key and helps you to identify or verify the host you are connecting to.

• Server IP/Hostname field — The IP address or hostname of the server on which the certificate file should be exported. Depending on the setting in the Download Certificate

from drop-down list, the name of the field may vary.

• Path and Filename field — The path and filename Cisco IMC should use when downloading the certificate from the remote server.

• Username field — The username the system should use to log in to the remote server. This field does not apply if the protocol is TFTP or

HTTP.

• Password field — The password for the remote server username. This field does not apply if the protocol is TFTP or HTTP.

Selecting this option allows you to choose the certificate stored on a drive that is local to the computer and export it.

288

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Certificates and Server Security

Deleting a Root CA Certificate

Deleting a Root CA Certificate

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Security Management.

Step 3

In the Security Management pane, click Secure Key Management.

Step 4

In the Actions area of the Secure Key Management tab, click Delete Root CA Certificate.

Step 5

At the prompt, click OK or Cancel to delete the root CA certificate, or cancel the action.

Downloading a Client Private Key

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Security Management.

Step 3

In the Security Management pane, click Secure Key Management.

Step 4

In the Actions area of the Secure Key Management tab, click Download Client Private Key.

Step 5

In the Download Client Private Key dialog box, complete these fields:

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

289

Managing Certificates and Server Security

Downloading a Client Private Key

Name

Download From Remote

Location radio button

Description

Selecting this option allows you to choose the private key from a remote location and download it. Enter the following details:

• ◦TFTP Server

◦FTP Server

◦SFTP Server

◦SCP Server

◦HTTP Server

Note

If you chose SCP or SFTP as the remote server type while performing this action, a pop-up window is displayed with the message Server (RSA) key fingerprint is

<server_finger_print _ID> Do you wish to continue?.

Click Yes or No depending on the authenticity of the server fingerprint.

The fingerprint is based on the host's public key and helps you to identify or verify the host you are connecting to.

• Server IP/Hostname field — The IP address or hostname of the server on which the client private key should be stored. Depending on the setting in the Download Certificate From drop-down list, the name of the field may vary.

• Path and Filename field — The path and filename Cisco IMC should use when downloading the file to the remote server.

• Username field — The username the system should use to log in to the remote server. This field does not apply if the protocol is

TFTP or HTTP.

• Password field — The password for the remote server username.

This field does not apply if the protocol is TFTP or HTTP.

Download Through Browser

Client radio button

Paste Content radio button

Selecting this option allows you to navigate to the private key stored on a drive that is local to the computer running the Cisco IMC GUI.

When you select this option, Cisco IMC GUI displays a Browse button that lets you navigate to the file you want to import.

Selecting this option allows you to copy the entire content of the signed private key and paste it in the Paste Private Key Content text field.

290

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Certificates and Server Security

Exporting a Client Private Key

What to Do Next

Exporting a Client Private Key

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Security Management.

Step 3

In the Security Management pane, click Secure Key Management.

Step 4

In the Actions area of the Secure Key Management tab, click Export Client Private Key.

Step 5

In the Export Client Private Key dialog box, complete these fields:

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

291

Managing Certificates and Server Security

Exporting a Client Private Key

Name

Export to Remote Location

Export to Local File

Description

Selecting this option allows you to choose the certificate from a remote location and export it. Enter the following details:

• ◦TFTP Server

◦FTP Server

◦SFTP Server

◦SCP Server

◦HTTP Server

Note

If you chose SCP or SFTP as the remote server type while performing this action, a pop-up window is displayed with the message Server

(RSA) key fingerprint is

<server_finger_print _ID> Do you

wish to continue?. Click Yes or No depending on the authenticity of the server fingerprint.

The fingerprint is based on the host's public key and helps you to identify or verify the host you are connecting to.

• Server IP/Hostname field — The IP address or hostname of the server on which the certificate file should be exported. Depending on the setting in the Download Certificate

from drop-down list, the name of the field may vary.

• Path and Filename field — The path and filename Cisco IMC should use when downloading the certificate from the remote server.

• Username field — The username the system should use to log in to the remote server. This field does not apply if the protocol is TFTP or

HTTP.

• Password field — The password for the remote server username. This field does not apply if the protocol is TFTP or HTTP.

Selecting this option allows you to choose the certificate stored on a drive that is local to the computer and export it.

292

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Certificates and Server Security

Deleting a Client Private Key

Deleting a Client Private Key

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Security Management.

Step 3

In the Security Management pane, click Secure Key Management.

Step 4

In the Actions area of the Secure Key Management pane, click Delete Client Private Key.

Step 5

At the prompt, click OK or Cancel to delete the client private key, or cancel the action.

Testing the KMIP Server Connection

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Security Management.

Step 3

In the Security Management pane, click Secure Key Management.

Step 4

In the KMIP Servers area of the Secure Key Management tab, select a row by checking the check box and click Test Connection.

Step 5

If the connection is successful, a success message is displayed.

Restoring the KMIP Server to Default Settings

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Security Management.

Step 3

In the Security Management pane, click Secure Key Management.

Step 4

In the KMIP Servers area of the Secure Key Management tab, select a row by checking the check box and click Delete.

Step 5

At the prompt, click OK

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

293

Managing Certificates and Server Security

Deleting KMIP Login Details

This restores the KMIP server to its default settings.

Deleting KMIP Login Details

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Security Management.

Step 3

In the Security Management pane, click Secure Key Management.

Step 4

In the Actions area of the Secure Key Management pane, click Delete KMIP Login.

Step 5

At the prompt, click OK to delete the KMIP login details, or Cancel to cancel the action.

FIPS 140-2 Compliance in Cisco IMC

The Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) Publication 140-2, (FIPS PUB 140-2), is a U.S. government computer security standard used to approve cryptographic modules. Prior to the 3.1(3) release, the Rack Cisco

IMC is not FIPS compliant as per NIST guideline. It does not follow FIPS 140-2 approved cryptographic algorithms and modules. With this release, all CIMC services will use the Cisco FIPS Object Module (FOM), which provides the FIPS 140-2 compliant cryptographic module.

The Cisco FIPS Object Module is a software library that provides cryptographic services to a vast array of

Cisco's networking and collaboration products. The module provides FIPS 140 validated cryptographic algorithms and KDF functionality for services such as IPSec (IKE), SRTP, SSH, TLS, and SNMP.

Enabling Security Configuration (FIPS)

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Security Management.

Step 3

In the Security Management pane, click Security Configuration.

Step 4

In the Work pane, check the Enable FIPS check-box.

Note

When you switch the FIPS mode, it restarts the SSH, KVM, SNMP, webserver, XMLAPI, and redfish services.

Step 5

You will be prompted to continue. If you wish to continue, click OK else click on Cancel.

294

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Certificates and Server Security

Enabling Security Configuration (FIPS)

This enables FIPS.

Note

When you enable FIPS, the following is an impact on the SNMP configuration:

• The community string configuration for the SNMPv2 protocols, and the SNMPv3 users configured with noAuthNoPriv or authNoPriv security-level option are disabled.

• The traps configured for SNMPv2 or SNMPv3 users with the noAuthNoPriv security-level option are disabled.

• The MD5 and DES Authentication type and Privacy type are disabled.

• It also ensures only FIPS-compliant ciphers in SSH, webserver, and KVM connections.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

295

Enabling Security Configuration (FIPS)

Managing Certificates and Server Security

296

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

C H A P T E R

Managing Firmware

This chapter includes the following sections:

•

Cisco IMC Firmware, page 297

•

Viewing Firmware Components, page 298

•

Updating the Firmware, page 299

•

Activating the Firmware, page 300

Cisco IMC Firmware

You can manage the following firmware components from a single page in the web UI:

• Adapter firmware —The main operating firmware, consisting of an active and a backup image, can be installed from different interfaces such as:

• Host Upgrade Utility (HUU)

• Web UI — Local and remote protocols

• PMCLI —Remote protocols

• XML API — Remote protocols

You can upload a firmware image from either a local file system or a TFTP server.

• Bootloader firmware—The bootloader firmware cannot be installed from the Cisco IMC. You can install this firmware using the Host Upgrade Utility.

Firmware for the following individual components can be updated:

• BMC

• BIOS

• CMC

• SAS Expander

• Adapter

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

297

Managing Firmware

Viewing Firmware Components

Firmware for the Hard Disk Drive (HDD) can also be installed from the same interfaces as the adapter firmware mentioned above.

Viewing Firmware Components

Procedure

Step 1

In the Admin menu, click Firmware Management.

Step 2

In the General tab's Firmware Management area, review the following information:

Name Description

Update button Opens a dialog box that allows you to install a firmware image file that is available to your local machine or on a remote server.

Activate button

Component column

Running Version column

Opens a dialog box that allows you to select which available firmware version you would like to activate on the server.

Important

If any firmware or BIOS updates are in progress, do not activate new firmware until those tasks complete.

List of components available for which you can update the firmware.

The firmware version of the component that is currently active.

Backup Version column

Bootloader Version column

Status column

Progress in % column

The alternate firmware version installed on the server, if any. The backup version is not currently running.

To activate it, click Activate.

Note

When you install new firmware, any existing backup version is deleted and the new firmware becomes the backup version. You must manually activate the new firmware if you want the server to run the new version.

The bootloader version associated with the boot-loader software of the component.

The status of the firmware activation on this server.

The progress of the operation, in percentage.

298

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Managing Firmware

Updating the Firmware

Updating the Firmware

You can install the firmware package from a local disk or from a remote server, depending on the component you choose from the Firmware Management area. After you confirm the installation, BMC replaces the firmware version in the component's backup memory slot with the selected version.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Admin menu, click Firmware Management.

Step 2

In the Firmware Management area, select a component from the Component column and click Update.

The Update Firmware dialog box appears.

Step 3

Review the following information in the dialog box:

Name Description

Install Firmware through Browser Client radio button

If the firmware package resides on a local machine, click this radio button.

Install Firmware through Remote Server radio button

If the firmware package resides on a remote server, click this radio button.

Step 4

To install the firmware through the browser client, click Browse and navigate to the firmware file that you want to install.

Step 5

After you select the file, click Install Firmware.

Step 6

To update the firmware using remote server, select the remote server type from the Install Firmware from drop-down list. This could be one of the following:

• TFTP

• FTP

• SFTP

• SCP

• HTTP

Step 7

Depending on the remote server type you choose, enter details in the server's IP/Hostname and Image Path

and Filename fields.

Once you install the firmware, the new image replaces the non-active image. You can activate the image after it is installed.

Important

For FTP, SFTP, and SCP server types, you need to provide user credentials.

Step 8

Click Install Firmware to begin download and installation.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

299

Managing Firmware

Activating the Firmware

Activating the Firmware

Procedure

Step 1

In the Admin menu, click Firmware Management.

Step 2

In the Firmware Management area, select a component from the Component column and click Activate.

The Activate Firmware dialog box appears.

Step 3

In the Activate Firmware dialog box, select the desired firmware image (radio button) to activate. This image becomes the running version.

Step 4

Click Activate Firmware.

Depending on the firmware image you chose, the activation process begins.

Important

While the activation is in progress, do not:

• Reset, power off, or shut down the server

• Reboot or reset BMC

• Activate any other firmware

• Export technical support or configuration data

300

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

C H A P T E R

Viewing Faults and Logs

This chapter includes the following sections:

•

Faults Summary, page 301

•

Fault History, page 303

•

Cisco IMC Log, page 305

•

System Event Log, page 307

•

Logging Controls, page 310

Faults Summary

Viewing the Fault Summary

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Faults and Logs.

Step 3

In the Faults Summary tab, review the following information:

Table 8: Actions Area

Name

Total

Column drop-down list

Description

Displays the total number of rows in the Fault Entries table.

Allows you to choose the columns you wish to be displayed.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

301

Viewing Faults and Logs

Viewing the Fault Summary

Name

Show drop-down list

Table 9: Fault Entries Area

Name

Time

Severity

Code

Description

Customize the way you want to view fault entries using filters. These can be:

• Quick Filter - Default view.

• Advanced Filter - Filter options to display the fault entries based on one or more criteria. Using the matching rule, you can view entries matching all the rules or any one combination of rules you specified in the Filter fields.

Click Go to view the entries matching the filter criteria that you set.

Click the Save icon to save the filter criteria that you set. This becomes a user-defined filter which you can use later.

Note

The user-defined filter appears in the

Manage Preset Filters dialog box.

• All - Displays all entries

• Manage Preset Filters - Displays user-defined filters. You can edit or remove the user-defined filter from this dialog box.

• List of pre-defined filters - Displays the system-defined filters.

Note

You can use the Filter icon to hide or unhide the filter fields.

Description

The time when the fault occurred.

This can be one of the following:

• Cleared - A fault or condition was cleared.

• Critical

• Info

• Major

• Minor

• Warning

The unique identifier assigned to the fault.

302

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Viewing Faults and Logs

Name

Probable Cause

Description

Fault History

Description

The distinguished name (DN) is a hierarchical representation of the device endpoint and its instance on the server.

The unique identifier associated with the event that caused the fault.

More information about the fault.

It also includes a proposed solution.

Fault History

Viewing Faults History

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Faults and Logs.

Step 3

In the Faults History tab, review the following information

Table 10: Actions Area

Name

Total

Column drop-down list

Description

Displays the total number of rows in the Fault History table.

Allows you to choose the columns you wish to be displayed.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

303

Viewing Faults History

Name

Show drop-down list

Table 11: Faults History Area

Name

Time

Viewing Faults and Logs

Description

Customize the way you want to view fault history entries using filters. These can be:

• Quick Filter - Default view.

• Advanced Filter - Filter options to display the entries based on one or more criteria. Using the matching rule, you can view entries matching all the rules or any one combination of rules you specified in the Filter fields.

Click Go to view the entries matching the filter criteria that you set.

Click the Save icon to save the filter criteria that you set. This becomes a user-defined filter which you can use later.

Note

The user-defined filter appears in the

Manage Preset Filters dialog box.

• All - Displays all entries

• Manage Preset Filters - Displays user-defined filters. You can edit or remove the user-defined filter from this dialog box.

• List of pre-defined filters - Displays the system-defined filters.

Note

You can use the Filter icon to hide or unhide the filter fields.

Description

The time when the fault occurred.

304

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Viewing Faults and Logs

Name

Severity

Source

Probable Cause

Description

What to Do Next

Cisco IMC Log

Viewing the Cisco IMC Log

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Faults and Logs.

Step 3

In the Cisco IMC Log tab, review the following information:

Cisco IMC Log

Description

This can be one of the following:

• Emergency

• Alert

• Critical

• Error

• Warning

• Notice

• Informational

• Debug

The software module that logged the event.

The unique identifier associated with the event that caused the fault.

More information about the fault.

It also includes a proposed solution.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

305

Viewing Faults and Logs

Viewing the Cisco IMC Log

Table 12: Actions Area

Name

Clear Log button

Total

Column drop-down list

Show drop-down list

Description

Clears all log files.

Note

This option is only available if your user ID is assigned the admin or user user role.

Displays the total number of rows in the Cisco IMC

Log table.

Allows you to choose the columns you wish to be displayed.

Customize the way you want to view Cisco IMC log entries using filters. These can be:

• Quick Filter - Default view.

• Advanced Filter - Filter options to display the log entries based on one or more criteria. Using the matching rule, you can view entries matching all the rules or any one combination of rules you specified in the Filter fields.

Click Go to view the entries matching the filter criteria that you set.

Click the Save icon to save the filter criteria that you set. This becomes a user-defined filter which you can use later.

Note

The user-defined filter appears in the

Manage Preset Filters dialog box.

• All - Displays all entries

• Manage Preset Filters - Displays user-defined filters. You can edit or remove the user-defined filter from this dialog box.

• List of pre-defined filters - Displays the system-defined filters.

Note

You can use the Filter icon to hide or unhide the filter fields.

Table 13: Cisco IMC Log Table

Name

Time column

Description

The date and time the event occurred.

306

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Viewing Faults and Logs

Name

Severity column

Source column

Description column

System Event Log

Description

The event severity. This can be one of the following:

• Emergency

• Alert

• Critical

• Error

• Warning

• Notice

• Informational

• Debug

The software module that logged the event.

A description of the event.

System Event Log

Viewing System Event Logs

The System Event Log tab displays only the recent 3008 system events, as against the total capacity of 131068 entries in the Cisco System Event Log (Cisco SEL) stored internally. When the Cisco SEL reaches its full capacity (131068 records), the oldest entries are overwritten with the most recent entries.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Faults and Logs.

Step 3

On the System Event Log tab, review the following information:

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

307

Viewing System Event Logs

Table 14: Actions Area

Name

SEL Fullness Indicator

Clear Log button

Chassis drop-down list

Total

Column drop-down list

Viewing Faults and Logs

Description

Displays, in percentage, the used space in the System

Event Log tab. The percentage is calculated with 3008 entries as the reference (the System Event Log tab always displays only the most recent 3008 system events). For example, if there are 1504 entries in the

System Event Log tab, then the percentage is shown as 50.

After the first set of 3008 entries are reached, the status is always displayed as 100% until the SEL is cleared.

Clears all events from the log file.

Note

This option is only available if your user ID is assigned the admin or user user role.

Select a chassis or a server to view its logs.

Displays the total number of rows in the System Event

Log table.

Allows you to choose the columns you wish to be displayed.

308

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Viewing Faults and Logs

Viewing System Event Logs

Name

Show drop-down list

Description

Customize the way you want to view events using filters. These can be:

• Quick Filter - Default view.

• Advanced Filter - Filter options to display the events based on one or more criteria. Using the matching rule, you can view entries matching all the rules or any one combination of rules you specified in the Filter fields.

Click Go to view the entries matching the filter criteria that you set.

Click the Save icon to save the filter criteria that you set. This becomes a user-defined filter which you can use later.

Note

The user-defined filter appears in the

Manage Preset Filters dialog box.

• All - Displays all entries

• Manage Preset Filters - Displays user-defined filters. You can edit or remove the user-defined filter from this dialog box.

• List of pre-defined filters - Displays the system-defined filters.

Note

You can use the Filter icon to hide or unhide the filter fields.

Table 15: System Event Log Table

Name

Time column

Severity column

Description column

Description

The date and time the event occurred.

The severity field includes both text and a color-coded icon. For the icon, green indicates normal operation, yellow is informational, and warning, critical, and non-recoverable errors are shown in shades of red.

A description of the event.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

309

Viewing Faults and Logs

Logging Controls

Logging Controls

Viewing Logging Controls

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Faults and Logs.

Step 3

In the Logging Controls tab, review the following information:

Remote Logging

Name

Enabled check box

Description

If checked, the Cisco IMC sends log messages to the Syslog server named in the IP Address field.

Host Name/IP Address field

Port field

The address of the Syslog server on which the Cisco IMC log should be stored. You can set an IPv4 or IPv6 address or a domain name as the remote system address.

Enter a destination port number of the Syslog server within the range

1 to 65535. The default port number is 514.

Protocol field The transport layer protocol for transmission of syslog messages. You can select one of the following:

• TCP

• UDP

Minimum Severity to Report

field

Specify the lowest level of messages that will be included in the remote logs. You can select one of the following:

• Emergency

• Alert

• Critical

• Error

• Warning

• Notice

• Informational

• Debug

310

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Viewing Faults and Logs

Sending the Cisco IMC Log to a Remote Server

Note

The Cisco IMC does not remotely log any messages with a severity below the selected severity. For example, if you select Error, then the Cisco IMC remote log contains all messages with the severity

Emergency, Alert, Critical, or Error. It does not show Warning, Notice, Informational, or Debug messages.

Local Logging

This area displays only the Minimum Severity to Report drop-down list as shown in the table above. You can specify the lowest level of messages to be included in the local log

What to Do Next

Sending the Cisco IMC Log to a Remote Server

You can configure profiles for one or two remote syslog servers to receive Cisco IMC log entries.

Before You Begin

• The remote syslog server must be configured to receive logs from a remote host.

• The remote syslog server must be configured to receive all types of logs, including authentication-related logs.

• The remote syslog server's firewall must be configured to allow syslog messages to reach the syslog server.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Faults and Logs.

Step 3

In either of the Remote Syslog Server areas, complete the following fields:

Name Description

Enabled check box If checked, the Cisco IMC sends log messages to the Syslog server named in the IP Address field.

Host Name/IP Address field

The address of the Syslog server on which the Cisco IMC log should be stored. You can set an IPv4 or IPv6 address or a domain name as the remote system address.

Port field Enter a destination port number of the Syslog server within the range

1 to 65535. The default port number is 514.

Step 4

(Optional) In the Minimum Severity to Report drop-down list, specify the lowest level of messages that will be included in the remote logs.

You can select one of the following, in decreasing order of severity:

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

311

Viewing Faults and Logs

Configuring the Cisco IMC Log Threshold

• Emergency

• Alert

• Critical

• Error

• Warning

• Notice

• Informational

• Debug

Note

Cisco IMC does not remotely log any messages with a severity below the selected severity. For example, if you select Error, then the Cisco IMC remote log will contain all messages with the severity Emergency, Alert, Critical, or Error. It will not show Warning, Notice, Informational, or

Debug messages.

Step 5

Click Save Changes.

Configuring the Cisco IMC Log Threshold

Before You Begin

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Faults and Logs.

Step 3

In the Local Logging area, use the Minimum Severity to Report drop-down list to specify the lowest level of messages that will be included in the Cisco IMC log.

You can select one of the following, in decreasing order of severity:

• Emergency

• Alert

• Critical

• Error

• Warning

• Notice

• Informational

• Debug

Note

Cisco IMC does not log any messages with a severity below the selected severity. For example, if you select Error, then the Cisco IMC log will contain all messages with the severity Emergency,

Alert, Critical, or Error. It will not show Warning, Notice, Informational, or Debug messages.

312

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Viewing Faults and Logs

Sending a Test Cisco IMC Log to a Remote Server

Sending a Test Cisco IMC Log to a Remote Server

Before You Begin

• The remote syslog server must be configured to receive logs from a remote host.

• The remote syslog server must be configured to receive all types of logs, including authentication-related logs.

• The remote syslog server's firewall must be configured to allow syslog messages to reach the syslog server.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Chassis menu.

Step 2

In the Chassis menu, click Faults and Logs.

Step 3

In the Faults and Logs pane, click the Logging Controls tab.

Step 4

In the Action area, click Send Test Syslog.

A test Cisco IMC log is sent to the configured remote servers.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

313

Sending a Test Cisco IMC Log to a Remote Server

Viewing Faults and Logs

314

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

C H A P T E R

Server Utilities

This chapter includes the following sections:

•

Exporting Technical Support Data, page 315

•

Resetting to Factory Default, page 318

•

Exporting and Importing the Cisco IMC Configuration, page 320

•

Generating Non Maskable Interrupts to the Host, page 325

•

Adding or Updating the Cisco IMC Banner, page 326

•

Viewing Cisco IMC Last Reset Reason, page 327

•

Downloading Hardware Inventory to a Local File, page 327

•

Exporting Hardware Inventory Data to a Remote Server, page 328

•

Uploading a PID Catalog, page 329

•

Activating a PID Catalog, page 330

•

Enabling Smart Access USB, page 331

•

Enabling or Disabling Cisco Intersight Management, page 331

•

Configuring HTTPS Proxy Settings for Device Connector, page 332

•

Viewing Starship Device Connector Properties, page 333

Exporting Technical Support Data

Perform this task when requested by the Cisco Technical Assistance Center (TAC). This utility creates a summary report containing configuration information, logs and diagnostic data that will help TAC in troubleshooting and resolving a technical issue.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

315

Server Utilities

Exporting Technical Support Data

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Utilities.

Step 3

In the Actions area of the Utilities pane, click Export Technical Support Data.

Step 4

In the Export Technical Support Data dialog box, complete the following fields:

Name Description

Export Technical Support Data

through drop-down list

Note

Front Panel USB option is visible only if Smart Access USB is enabled and a USB storage device is connected to the server.

You can export the technical support data to a remote server or to a

USB storage device connected to a server. You can choose one of the following:

• Remote— This allows you to export the technical support data to a remote server using one of the following protocols:

◦TFTP

◦FTP

◦SFTP

◦SCP

◦HTTP

Note

If you chose SCP or SFTP as the remote server type while performing this action, a pop-up window is displayed with the message Server (RSA) key

fingerprint is <server_finger_print _ID> Do you

wish to continue?. Click Yes or No depending on the authenticity of the server fingerprint.

The fingerprint is based on the host's public key and helps you to identify or verify the host you are connecting to.

• Front Panel USB—This allows you to export the technical support data to a USB storage device connected to the server.

Server IP/Hostname field

Path and Filename field

The IP address or hostname of the server on which the support data file should be stored. Depending on the setting in the Export Technical

Support Data to drop-down list, the name of the field may vary.

The path and filename Cisco IMC should use when exporting the file to the remote server.

Note

If the server includes any of the supported network adapter cards, the data file also includes technical support data from the adapter card.

316

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Server Utilities

Downloading Technical Support Data to a Local File

Name

Username

Password

Description

The username the system should use to log in to the remote server. This field does not apply if the protocol is TFTP or HTTP.

The password for the remote server username. This field does not apply if the protocol is TFTP or HTTP.

Step 5

Click Export.

What to Do Next

Provide the generated report file to Cisco TAC.

Downloading Technical Support Data to a Local File

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Utilities.

Step 3

In the Actions area of the Utilities pane, click Generate Technical Support Data for Local Download.

Step 4

In the Download Technical Support Data to Local File dialog box, complete the following fields:

Name Description

Generate Technical Support

Data radio button

Cisco IMC disables this radio button when there is no technical support data file to download.

Click Generate to create the data file. When data collection is complete, click Download Technical Support Data to Local File in the Actions area to download the file.

Regenerate Technical Support

Data radio button

Cisco IMC displays this radio button when a technical support data file is available to download.

To replace the existing support data file with a new one, select this option and click Regenerate. When data collection is complete, click

Download Technical Support Data to Local File in the Actions area to download the file.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

317

Server Utilities

Resetting to Factory Default

Name

Generate and Download button

Description

Download to local file radio button

Cisco IMC enables this radio button when a technical support data file is available to download.

To download the existing file, select this option and click Download.

Note

If the server includes any of the supported network adapter cards, the data file also includes technical support data from the adapter card.

Allows you to generate and download the technical support data file.

Generate button

Download button

Allows you to generate the technical support data file.

Allows you to download the technical support data file after it is generated.

Step 5

Click Generate to create the data file. When data collection is complete, click Download Technical Support

Data to Local File in the Actions area to download the file..

What to Do Next

Provide the generated report file to Cisco TAC.

Resetting to Factory Default

On rare occasions, such as an issue with the current running firmware or troubleshooting a server, you might require to reset the server components to the factory default. When this happens, all user-configurable settings are reset.

This procedure is not part of the normal server maintenance. After you reset the server components, you are logged off and must log in again. You might also lose connectivity and might need to reconfigure the network settings. Some of the inventory information might not be available during this transition.

When you reset the BMC to factory settings, the serial number is displayed in the Cisco IMCXXXXXX format, where XXXXXX is the serial number of the server.

Important When you move VIC adapters from other generation C-Series servers (for example M4 servers) to the M5 generation C-Series servers or M5 servers to other generation servers, you must reset the adapters to factory defaults.

Before You Begin

You must log in as a user with admin privileges to reset the server components to factory defaults.

318

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Server Utilities

Resetting to Factory Default

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Utilities.

Step 3

In the Actions area of the Utilities pane, click Reset to Factory Default.

Step 4

In the Reset to Factory Default dialog box, review the following information:

Name Description

All checkbox If checked, it resets all the components of the server to factory settings.

Expand to select the specific component that you want to reset to factory settings.

BMC checkbox If checked, it resets the BMC to factory settings.

Note

After you reset the BMC to factory settings, the serial number is displayed in the Cisco IMCXXXXXX format, where

XXXXXX is the serial number of the server. Additionally, at the time of reset, the Cisco card mode is configured by default.

Storage checkbox

VIC checkbox

Reset button

If checked, it resets all the available storage adapters to factory settings.

When you reset a storage adapter, the data on the disk is not modified but the virtual drive meta data will be erased which may result in data loss. Expand to select the specific storage adapters that you want to reset to factory settings.

Note

The host must be powered on to reset storage adapters to factory defaults.

If checked, it resets all the available VICs to factory settings.

Expand to select the specific VICs that you want to reset to factory settings.

Note

The host must be powered on to reset VIC adapters to factory defaults.

Resets the selected components to the factory settings.

Step 5

Click Reset to reset the selected components to the factory-default settings.

A reboot of Cisco IMC, while the host is performing BIOS POST (Power on Self Test) or is in EFI shell, powers down the host for a short amount of time. Cisco IMC powers on when it is ready. Upon restart, the network configuration mode is set to Cisco Card mode by default.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

319

Server Utilities

Exporting and Importing the Cisco IMC Configuration

Exporting and Importing the Cisco IMC Configuration

To perform a backup of the Cisco IMC configuration, you take a snapshot of the system configuration and export the resulting Cisco IMC configuration file to a location on your network. The export operation saves information from the management plane only; it does not back up data on the servers. Sensitive configuration information such as user accounts and the server certificate are not exported.

You can restore an exported Cisco IMC configuration file to the same system or you can import it to another

Cisco IMC system, provided that the software version of the importing system is the same as or is configuration-compatible with the software version of the exporting system. When you import a configuration file to another system as a configuration template, you must modify system-specific settings such as IP addresses and host names. An import operation modifies information on the management plane only.

The Cisco IMC configuration file is an XML text file whose structure and elements correspond to the Cisco

IMC command modes.

When performing an export or import operation, consider these guidelines:

• You can perform an export or an import while the system is up and running. While an export operation has no impact on the server or network traffic, some modifications caused by an import operation, such as IP address changes, can disrupt traffic or cause a server reboot.

• You cannot execute an export and an import simultaneously.

You can perform an import or an export operation on the following features:

• Cisco IMC version

Note

You can only export this information.

• Network settings

• Technical support

• Logging control for local and remote logs

• Power policies

• BIOS - BIOS Parameters

Note

Precision boot is not supported.

• Communication services

• Remote presence

• User management - LDAP

• Event management

320

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Server Utilities

Exporting the Cisco IMC Configuration

• SNMP

• Dynamic Storage Configuration

• Chassis Description

Exporting the Cisco IMC Configuration

Note

For security reasons, this operation does not export user accounts or the server certificate.

Before You Begin

Obtain the backup remote server IP address.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Utilities.

Step 3

In the Actions area of the Utilities pane, click Export Configuration.

Step 4

In the Export Configuration dialog box, complete the following fields:

Name Description

Select Component for Export

drop-down list

The component type. This can be one of the following:

• BMC

• VIC Adapter(s)

Depending on the component you choose, the configuration of that component is exported.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

321

Server Utilities

Exporting the Cisco IMC Configuration

Name

Export To drop-down list

Server IP/Hostname field

Description

The location where you want to save the XML configuration file. This can be one of the following:

• Local: Select this option and click Export to save the XML configuration file to a drive that is local to the computer running the Cisco IMC GUI..

When you select this option, Cisco IMC GUI displays a File

Download dialog box that lets you navigate to the location to which the configuration file should be saved.

• Remote Server: Select this option to import the XML configuration file from a remote server.

When you select this option, Cisco IMC GUI displays the remote server fields.

• Front Panel USB: Select this option to export the configuration file to a USB storage device connected to the server.

Note

• Front Panel USB option to export Cisco IMC configuration is available only if Smart Access USB is enabled and a USB storage device is connected to the server.

• This option is available only when you choose BMC in the Select Component drop-down list.

The remote server type. This can be one of the following:

• TFTP Server

• FTP Server

• SFTP Server

• SCP Server

• HTTP Server

Note

If you chose SCP or SFTP as the remote server type while performing this action, a pop-up window is displayed with the message Server (RSA) key fingerprint is <server_finger_print

_ID> Do you wish to continue?. Click Yes or No depending on the authenticity of the server fingerprint.

The fingerprint is based on the host's public key and helps you to identify or verify the host you are connecting to.

The IPv4 or IPv6 address, or hostname of the server to which the configuration file will be exported. Depending on the remote server type selected in the Export to drop-down list, the name of the field may vary.

322

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Server Utilities

Importing the Cisco IMC Configuration

Name

Path and Filename field

Username

Password

Passphrase

Description

The path and filename Cisco IMC should use when exporting the file to the remote server.

The username the system should use to log in to the remote server. This field does not apply if the protocol is TFTP or HTTP.

The password for the remote server username. This field does not apply if the protocol is TFTP or HTTP.

The passphrase that uses the AES256 algorithm to encrypt the LDAP and SNMP v3 user passwords in the exported configuration files. Enter a string of 6 to 127 characters. Do not enter the following characters: !

# $ & < > ? ; ' | ` ~ \ % ^ ( )"

Step 5

Click Export.

Importing the Cisco IMC Configuration

Before You Begin

If you want to restore the SNMP configuration information when you import the configuration file, make sure that SNMP is disabled on this server before you do the import. If SNMP is enabled when you perform the import, Cisco IMC does not overwrite the current values with those saved in the configuration file.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Utilities.

Step 3

In the Actions area of the Utilities pane, click Import Configuration.

Step 4

In the Import Configuration dialog box, complete the following fields:

Name Description

Select Component for Import

drop-down list

The component type. This can be one of the following:

• BMC

• VIC Adapter(s)

Depending on the component you choose, the configuration of that component is imported.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

323

Server Utilities

Importing the Cisco IMC Configuration

Name

Import From drop-down list

Server IP/Hostname field

Path and Filename field

Description

The location of the XML configuration file. This can be one of the following:

• Local: Select this option to import the XML configuration file to a drive that is local to the computer running Cisco IMC GUI.

When you select this option, Cisco IMC GUI displays a Browse button that lets you navigate to the file you want to import.

• Remote Server: Select this option to import the XML configuration file from a remote server.

When you select this option, Cisco IMC GUI displays the remote server fields.

• Front Panel USB: Select this option to import the configuration file from a USB storage device connected to the server.

Note

• Front Panel USB option to import Cisco IMC configuration is available only if Smart Access USB is enabled and a USB storage device is connected to the server.

• This option is available only when you choose BMC in the Select Component drop-down list.

Note

These options are available only when you choose

Remote.

The remote server type. This can be one of the following:

• TFTP Server

• FTP Server

• SFTP Server

• SCP Server

• HTTP Server

Note

If you chose SCP or SFTP as the remote server type while performing this action, a pop-up window is displayed with the message Server (RSA) key fingerprint is <server_finger_print

_ID> Do you wish to continue?. Click Yes or No depending on the authenticity of the server fingerprint.

The fingerprint is based on the host's public key and helps you to identify or verify the host you are connecting to.

The IPv4 or IPv6 address, or hostname of the server on which the configuration file resides. Depending on the remote server type selected in the Import From drop-down list, the name of the field might vary.

The path and filename of the configuration file on the remote server.

324

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Server Utilities

Generating Non Maskable Interrupts to the Host

Name

Username

Password

Passphrase

Description

The username the system should use to log in to the remote server. This field does not apply if the protocol is TFTP or HTTP.

The password for the remote server username. This field does not apply if the protocol is TFTP or HTTP.

The passphrase that uses the AES256 algorithm to encrypt the LDAP and SNMP v3 user passwords in the imported configuration files. Enter a string of 6 to 127 characters. Do not enter the following characters: !

# $ & < > ? ; ' | ` ~ \ % ^ ( )"

Note

If you edit the encrypted sections in the configuration file and try to import it, the edits will be ignored and the import operation displays a partially successful message.

Step 5

Click Import.

Generating Non Maskable Interrupts to the Host

In some situations, the server might hang and not respond to traditional debug mechanisms. By generating a non maskable interrupt (NMI) to the host, you can create and send a crash dump file of the server and use it to debug the server.

Depending on the type of operating system associated with the server, this task might restart the OS.

Before You Begin

• You must log in as a user with admin privileges.

• The server must be powered on.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Utilities.

Step 3

In the Actions area of the Utilities pane, click Generate NMI to Host.

Step 4

In the Generate NMI to Host dialog box, review the following information:

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

325

Server Utilities

Adding or Updating the Cisco IMC Banner

Actions

Generate NMI to drop-down list

Description

Allows you to select the server for which you want to generate the non maskable interrupt (NMI). This can be one of the following:

• Server 1

• Server 2

Step 5

Click Send.

This action sends an NMI signal to the host, which might restart the OS.

Adding or Updating the Cisco IMC Banner

You can add or update the Cisco IMC banner by entering important information such as copyright or customized messages. Complete the following steps:

Before You Begin

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Utilities.

Step 3

In the Actions area of the Utilities pane, click Add/Update Cisco IMC Banner.

Step 4

In the Add/Update Cisco IMC Banner dialog box, complete the following fields:

Name Description

Banner (80 Chars per line. Max

2K Chars.) field

Enter copyright information or messages that you want to display on the login screen, before logging on to the Web UI or the command line interface.

Restart SSH checkbox When checked, the active SSH sessions are terminated after you click the Save Banner button.

Step 5

Click Save Banner.

326

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Server Utilities

Viewing Cisco IMC Last Reset Reason

What to Do Next

Viewing Cisco IMC Last Reset Reason

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Utilities.

Step 3

In the Actions area of the Utilities pane, view the following information under the Last Reset Reason area.

Name Description

Component field

The component that was last reset.

Status field The reason why the component was last reset. This can be one of the following:

• watchdog-reset—The watchdog-timer resets when the Cisco IMC memory reaches full capacity.

• ac-cycle— PSU power cables are removed (no power input).

• graceful-reboot— Cisco IMC reboot occurs.

Downloading Hardware Inventory to a Local File

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Utilities.

Step 3

In the Actions area of the Utilities pane, click Generate Inventory Data.

Step 4

In the Generate Inventory Data dialog box, complete the following fields:

Name Description

Generate Inventory Data radio button

Cisco IMC displays this radio button when there is no hardware inventory data file to download.

Download to local file radio button Cisco IMC enables this radio button when a inventory data file is available to download.

To download the existing file, select this option and click Download.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

327

Server Utilities

Exporting Hardware Inventory Data to a Remote Server

Step 5

Click Generate to create the data file. When data collection is complete, select the Download Inventory

Data to Local File radio button and click Download to download the file locally.

Exporting Hardware Inventory Data to a Remote Server

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin menu.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Utilities.

Step 3

In the Actions area of the Utilities pane, click Export Hardware Inventory Data to Remote.

Step 4

In the Export Hardware Inventory Data dialog box, complete the following fields:

Name Description

Export Hardware Inventory

Data to drop-down list

The remote server type. This can be one of the following:

• TFTP Server

• FTP Server

• SFTP Server

• SCP Server

• HTTP Server

Server IP/Hostname field

Note

If you chose SCP or SFTP as the remote server type while performing this action, a pop-up window is displayed with the message Server (RSA) key fingerprint is <server_finger_print

_ID> Do you wish to continue?. Click Yes or No depending on the authenticity of the server fingerprint.

The fingerprint is based on the host's public key and helps you to identify or verify the host you are connecting to.

The IP address or hostname of the server on which the data file should be stored. Depending on the setting in the Export Hardware Inventory

Data to drop-down list, the name of the field may vary.

Path and Filename field

Username

Password

The path and filename Cisco IMC should use when exporting the file to the remote server.

The username the system should use to log in to the remote server. This field does not apply if the protocol is TFTP or HTTP.

The password for the remote server username. This field does not apply if the protocol is TFTP or HTTP.

328

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Server Utilities

Uploading a PID Catalog

Step 5

Click Export.

Uploading a PID Catalog

Before You Begin

You must log in as a user with admin privileges to upload a PID catalog.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin tab.

Step 2

On the Admin tab, click Utilities.

Step 3

In the Work pane, click the Upload PID Catalog link.

The Upload PID Catalog dialog box appears.

Depending on the location of the catalog file, choose one of the options.

Step 4

In the Upload PID Catalog from Local File dialog box, click Browse and use the Choose File to Upload dialog box to select the catalog file that you want to upload.

Name Description

File field The PID catalog file that you want to upload.

Browse button Opens a dialog box that allows you to navigate to the appropriate file.

Step 5

In the Upload PID Catalog from Remote Server dialog box, complete the following fields:

Name Description

Upload PID Catalog from Remote Server

drop-down list

The remote server type. This can be one of the following:

• TFTP

• FTP

• SFTP

• SCP

• HTTP

Server IP/Hostname field The IP address or hostname of the server on which the PID catalog information is available. Depending on the setting in the Upload PID Catalog from drop-down list, the name of the field may vary.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

329

Activating a PID Catalog

Name

Path and Filename field

Username field

Password field

Upload button

Cancel button

Server Utilities

Description

The path and filename of the catalog file on the remote server.

Username of the remote server.

Password of the remote server.

Uploads the selected PID catalog.

Note

If you chose SCP or SFTP as the remote server type while performing this action, a pop-up window is displayed with the message Server (RSA) key fingerprint is

<server_finger_print _ID> Do you wish to

continue?. Click Yes or No depending on the authenticity of the server fingerprint.

The fingerprint is based on the host's public key and helps you to identify or verify the host you are connecting to.

Closes the wizard without making any changes to the firmware versions stored on the server.

Activating a PID Catalog

Before You Begin

You must log in as a user with admin privileges to activate a PID catalog.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin tab.

Step 2

On the Admin tab, click Utilities.

Step 3

In the Work pane, click the Activate PID Catalog link.

The Activate PID Catalog dialog box appears. Complete the following fields:

Name

Activate button

Description

Allows you to activate the PID catalog.

330

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Server Utilities

Enabling Smart Access USB

Note

The Activate PID Catalog link is greyed out when you log on to the system for the first time. It gets activated once you upload a PID catalog to the server. After you upload a PID file, the link remains active and you can activate the PID multiple times.

Enabling Smart Access USB

When you enable the smart access USB feature, the front panel USB device disconnects from the host operating system and connects to Cisco IMC. After enabling the smart access USB feature, you can use the front panel

USB device to export technical support data, import or export Cisco IMC configuration, or update Cisco IMC,

BIOS, and VIC firmware.

The supported file systems for smart access USB are as follows:

• EXT2

• EXT3

• EXT 4

• FAT 32

• FAT 16

• DOS

Note

Huge file support is not supported in BMC. For EXT 4 file system, huge file support has to be turned off.

Before You Begin

You must log in with admin privileges to perform this task.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin tab.

Step 2

In the Admin menu, click Utilities.

Step 3

In the Actions area, click Enable Smart Access USB.

This is a toggle button. To disable smart access, click Disable Smart Access USB. This button is visible only after you enable smart access USB. When you disable the smart access USB feature, the front panel USB device disconnects from Cisco IMC and connects to the host operating system.

Enabling or Disabling Cisco Intersight Management

When you enable the Intersight management, it establishes a bi-directional communication between the

Intersight Cloud application and the M5 server.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

331

Server Utilities

Configuring HTTPS Proxy Settings for Device Connector

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin tab.

Step 2

In the Admin tab, click Device Connector.

Step 3

In the Intersight Management area, click On to enable the Intersight management.

The Connection area displays the connection status of the Intersight management. If the device connector has not been able to establish a connection to Intersight management, review the recommendations provided in the Details & Recommendations drop-down list to fix the connection issues.

Step 4

Select the Access Mode as Read-only or Allow Control.

When the Read-only access mode is selected, then you cannot configure the device through Intersight.

Therefore, any configuration that comes to the device connector through cloud is rejected with an error code.

If the Allow Control mode is selected, then you have full control to configure the device through Intersight.

Step 5

To disable the Intersight management, click Off.

When you disable the Intersight management, the Connection area displays the connection status as

Administratively Disabled.

Configuring HTTPS Proxy Settings for Device Connector

You can manually configure the HTTPS proxy settings of the server.

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin tab.

Step 2

In the Admin tab, click Device Connector.

Step 3

In the Connections area, click HTTPS Proxy Settings and enter the proxy settings:

Action Name Description

Off button

Disables the HTTPS proxy settings.

Manual button Allows you to manually configure the HTTPS proxy settings.

The IP address or the host name of the proxy server.

Proxy Hostname/IP field

Proxy Port field

Authentication toggle button

The port number of the proxy server.

Enabling this option allows you to provide the credentials for the proxy server.

Username field

Password field

The credentials for the proxy server.

332

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Server Utilities

Viewing Starship Device Connector Properties

Step 4

In the HTTPS Proxy Settings dialog box, after adding the information, click Save.

Viewing Starship Device Connector Properties

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Admin tab.

Step 2

In the Admin tab, click Device Connector.

Step 3

In the Starship Management area, review the following information:

Action Name Description

State radio button Allows you to enable or disable the Starship management. This can be one of the following:

• On—Enables the Starship management.

• Off—Disables the Starship management.

Step 4

In the Connection area, review the following information:

Name Description

Status field Displays the status of the connection to Starship. This can be one of the following:

• Administratively Disabled—Indicates that the

Starship management has been disabled.

• DNS Misconfigured— Indicates that the DNS details have not been configured in BMC.

• UCS Connect Network Error—Indicates the invalid network configurations.

• Certification Validation Error—Indicates invalid certificate.

• Claimed—Indicates that the device is claimed in Starship.

• Not Claimed—Indicates that the device is registered, but not claimed in Starship.

Retry Connection link Allows you to retry the connection to Starship. This option appears only when there are Starship connection issues.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

333

Server Utilities

Viewing Starship Device Connector Properties

Name

Details & Recommendations drop-down list

HTTPS Proxy Settings dialog box

Serial Number field

Security Token field

Description

Lists the details and recommendations to fix the connection issues based on the status.

Allows you to manually configure HTTPS proxy settings required for the Starship connection.

Displays the serial number of the BMC.

Appears when the connection status is Not Claimed.

Use the security token to securely onboard the server in Starship.

Step 5

In the Connections area, click HTTPS Proxy Settings and review the following information:

Action Name Description

Off button Disables the HTTPS proxy settings.

Manual button Allows you to manually configure the HTTPS proxy settings.

Proxy Hostname/IP field

Proxy Port field

Authentication toggle button

Username field

The IP address or the host name of the proxy server.

The port number of the proxy server.

Enabling this option allows you to provide the credentials for the proxy server.

The credentials for the proxy server.

Password field

334

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

C H A P T E R

Troubleshooting

This chapter includes the following sections:

•

Recording the Last Boot Process, page 335

•

Recording the Last Crash, page 336

•

Downloading a DVR Player, page 337

•

Playing a Recorded Video Using the DVR Player on the KVM Console, page 337

Recording the Last Boot Process

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Compute menu.

Step 2

In the work pane, click the TroubleShooting tab.

Step 3

In the Bootstrap Process Recording area of the Troubleshooting tab, check Enable Recording check-box.

By default, this option is enabled.

Caution

This task is for troubleshooting purpose, and might impact Cisco IMC performance if it is enabled all the time.

Step 4

(Optional) If you want to record the boot process until BIOS POST, then check Stop On BIOS POST check-box.

Step 5

Click Save Changes

Step 6

On the tool bar above the Work pane, click Power On Server.

Step 7

In the Actions area, of the Bootstrap Process Recording pane, click Play Recording.

A confirmation dialog box with instructions on supported Java version appears.

Step 8

Review the instructions and click Ok.

The DVR Player Controls dialog box opens. This dialog box plays the recording of the last boot process. If you have enabled Stop On BIOS POST option then the system plays the recording process only till BIOS

POST.

This recording can be reviewed to analyze the factors that caused the system to reboot.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

335

Troubleshooting

Recording the Last Crash

Step 9

In the Actions area of the Bootstrap Process Recording area, click Download Recording.

Follow the instructions to download.

Note

The file is saved in a

.dvc

format to a local drive. You can view this recording using KVM player or an offline player. Every time you choose Download Recording option, the last boot process is recorded, it autogenerate the file name, and save it in the path specified earlier.

Step 10 Once the download is complete, you can select the file that you want play the video of the recording, and click

Open.

A DVR Player Controls window opens and plays the video of the selected file.

Recording the Last Crash

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Compute menu.

Step 2

In the work pane, click the TroubleShooting tab.

Step 3

In the Crash Recording area of the Troubleshooting tab, check the Enable Recording check-box.

Caution

This task is for troubleshooting purpose, and might impact Cisco IMC performance if it is enabled all the time.

Step 4

Click Save Changes.

Capture Recording button in the Actions area is enabled.

Step 5

(Optional) In the Actions area, click Capture Recording, to capture the recording of the system that crashed automatically.

Note

If you choose this option, it overwrites the existing crash records file. Click OK to continue.

Step 6

Click Play Recording in the Actions area to view the recording of the operations that ran on the server.

A confirmation dialog box with instructions on supported Java version appears.

Step 7

Review the instructions and click Ok.

The DVR Player Controls dialog box appears. This dialog box plays the recording of the operations that ran on the server in the last few minutes. This recording can be reviewed to analyze the factors that caused system to crash.

Step 8

In the Actions area of the Crash Recording area, click Download Recording.

Follow the instructions to download.

Note

The file is saved in a

.dvc

format to a local drive. You can view this recording using KVM player or an offline player. Every time you choose Download Recording option, the last crash process is recorded, it autogenerate the file name, and save it in the path specified earlier.

Step 9

Once the download is complete, you can select the file that you want play the video of the recording, and click

Open.

A DVR Player Controls window opens and plays the video of the selected file.

336

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Troubleshooting

Downloading a DVR Player

Downloading a DVR Player

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Server tab.

Step 2

On the Server tab, click Troubleshooting.

Step 3

In the Player area of the Troubleshooting tab, click Download Player.

Step 4

Follow the instructions to download. These files are saved to your local drive as a zipped file in a .tgz file format.

The offline player is stored for Windows, Linux, and MAC.

Step 5

Extract the zip file. The zip file generally gets saved below the bootstrap file, and its name follows the format offline.tgz

Step 6

Open the script file that you want to review the video recording.

Note

If you want to play the recording for Windows, then ensure that the Java version running on your system and in the script file are the same. If the Windows script file fails to play the recording, then follow these steps: a) Extract the Windows script file to your desktop.

b) Open the file using notepad.

c) Search for jre, and replace the Java version to match the version running on your system. By default, the

Java version is set to jre7.

d) Save the file.

After you update the Java version, you can delete the extracted files from your desktop.

Note

Verification of Java version is required only for Windows OS. For Linux and MAC, the Java version is picked automatically.

Step 7

Navigate to the folder in which these files are downloaded and open the script file that you want to play the video recording.

The DVR player is launched, playing the video of the operations that ran on the server.

Playing a Recorded Video Using the DVR Player on the KVM

Console

Procedure

Step 1

In the Navigation pane, click the Server tab.

Step 2

On the Server tab, click Sensors.

Step 3

In the Remote Presence pane, click the Virtual KVM tab.

Step 4

In the Actions area of the Virtual KVM tab, click Launch KVM Console.

Note

You can also launch KVM console by clicking Launch KVM Console button on the toolbar displayed above the Work pane.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

337

Playing a Recorded Video Using the DVR Player on the KVM Console

The KVM Console opens in a separate window.

Step 5

On the KVM Console window, choose Tools > Recorder /Playback Controls.

A DVR Player Controls window opens.

Step 6

On the DVR Player Controls window, click Open button.

Step 7

Choose the file that you want to play the recording, and click Open.

The DVR player is launched, playing the video of the operations that ran on the server.

Troubleshooting

338

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

A P P E N D I X

BIOS Parameters by Server Model

This section contains the following topics:

•

C220 M5 and C240 M5, page 339

C220 M5 and C240 M5

I/O Tab

Note

BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.

Table 16: BIOS Parameters in I/O Tab

Name

Reboot Host Immediately

checkbox

Description

Upon checking, reboots the host server immediately. You must check the checkbox after saving changes.

Legacy USB Support drop-down list

Whether the system supports legacy USB devices. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—USB devices are only available to EFI applications.

• Enabled—Legacy USB support is always available.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

339

I/O Tab

BIOS Parameters by Server Model

Name

Intel VT for directed IO

drop-down list

Intel VTD coherency support

drop-down list

Description

• Disabled—The processor does not permit virtualization.

• Enabled—The processor allows multiple operating systems in independent partitions.

Note

If you change this option, you must power cycle the server before the setting takes effect.

Whether the processor supports Intel VT-d Coherency. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The processor does not support coherency.

• Enabled—The processor uses VT-d Coherency as required.

Intel VTD ATS support

drop-down list

All Onboard LOM Oprom

drop-down list

Whether the processor supports Intel VT-d Address Translation Services

(ATS). This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The processor does not support ATS.

• Enabled—The processor uses VT-d ATS as required.

Whether Option ROM is available on all LOM ports. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—Option ROM is disabled on all the ports.

• Enabled—Option ROM is enabled on all the ports.

Onboard LOM Port0 Oprom

drop-down list

Whether Option ROM is available on the LOM port 0. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—Option ROM is not available on LOM port 0.

• Enabled—Option ROM is available on LOM port 0.

Onboard LOM Port1 Oprom

drop-down list

Whether Option ROM is available on the LOM port 1. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—Option ROM is not available on LOM port 1.

• Enabled—Option ROM is available on LOM port 1.

340

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

BIOS Parameters by Server Model

I/O Tab

Name Description

Pcie Slotn Oprom drop-down list Whether the server can use the Option ROMs present in the PCIe card slot designated by n. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—Option ROM for slot n is not available.

• Enabled—Option ROM for slot n is available.

MLOM Oprom drop-down list This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the

PCIe adapter connected to the MLOM slot. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—Does not execute Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the MLOM slot.

• Enabled—Executes Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the MLOM slot.

HBA Oprom drop-down list This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the

PCIe adapter connected to the HBA slot. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—Does not execute Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the HBA slot.

• Enabled—Executes Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the HBA slot.

Front NVME1 Oprom drop-down list

This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the

PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe1 slot. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—Does not execute Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe1 slot.

• Enabled—Executes Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe1 slot

Front NVME2 Oprom drop-down list

This options allows you to control the Option ROM execution of the

PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe2 slot. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—Does not execute Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe2 slot.

• Enabled—Executes Option ROM of the PCIe adapter connected to the SSD:NVMe2 slot

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

341

I/O Tab

BIOS Parameters by Server Model

Name

HBA Link Speed drop-down list

Description

This option allows you to restrict the maximum speed of an adapter card installed in PCIe HBA slot. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The maximum speed is not restricted.

• Auto—System selects the maximum speed allowed.

• GEN1—2.5GT/s (gigatransfers per second) is the maximum speed allowed.

• GEN2—5GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

• GEN3—8GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

MLOM Link Speed drop-down list

This option allows you to restrict the maximum speed of an adapter card installed in PCIe MLOM slot. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The maximum speed is not restricted.

• Auto—System selects the maximum speed allowed.

• GEN1—2.5GT/s (gigatransfers per second) is the maximum speed allowed.

• GEN2—5GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

• GEN3—8GT/s is the maximum speed allowed.

PCIe Slotn Link Speed

drop-down list

Front NVME1 Link Speed

drop-down list

System IO Controller n (SIOCn) add-on slot (designated by n) link speed. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

• Auto— The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

• GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

• GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

• GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

Link speed for NVMe front slot 1. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

• Auto—The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

• GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

• GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

• GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

342

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

BIOS Parameters by Server Model

I/O Tab

Name

Front NVME2 Link Speed

drop-down list

Rear NVME1 Link Speed

drop-down list

Rear NVME2 Link Speed

drop-down list

VGA Priority drop-down list

Description

Link speed for NVMe front slot 2. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

• Auto—The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

• GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

• GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

• GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

Link speed for NVMe rear slot 1. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

• Auto—The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

• GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

• GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

• GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

Link speed for NVMe rear slot 2. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—Slot is disabled, and the card is not enumerated.

• Auto—The default link speed. Link speed is automatically assigned.

• GEN1—Link speed can reach up to first generation.

• GEN2—Link speed can reach up to second generation.

• GEN3—Link speed can reach up to third generation.

Allows you to set the priority for VGA graphics devices if multiple

VGA devices are found in the system. This can be one of the following:

• OnBoard—Priority is given to the onboard VGA device. BIOS post screen and OS boot are driven through the onboard VGA port.

• OffBoard—Priority is given to the PCIE Graphics adapter. BIOS post screen and OS boot are driven through the external graphics adapter port.

• OnBoardDisabled—Priority is given to the PCIe Graphics adapter, and the onboard VGA device is disabled. The vKVM does not function when the onboard VGA is disabled.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

343

I/O Tab

BIOS Parameters by Server Model

Name Description

P-SATA OptionROM drop-down list

Allows you to select the PCH SATA optionROM mode. This can be one of the following:

• LSI SW Raid— Sets both SATA and sSATA controllers to raid mode for LSI SW Raid.

• Disabled— Disables both SATA and sSATA controllers.

M2.SATA OptionROM

drop-down list

Mode of operation of Serial Advanced Technology Attachment (SATA)

Solid State Drives (SSD). This can be one of the following:

• AHCI—

Sets both SATA and sSATA controllers to AHCI mode.

• LSI SW Raid— Sets both SATA and sSATA controllers to raid mode for LSI SW Raid.

• Disabled— Disables both SATA and sSATA controllers.

USB Port Rear drop-down list Whether the rear panel USB devices are enabled or disabled. This can be one of the following

• Disabled— Disables the rear panel USB ports. Devices connected to these ports are not detected by the BIOS and operating system.

• Enabled— Enables the rear panel USB ports. Devices connected to these ports are detected by the BIOS and operating system.

USB Port Front drop-down list Whether the front panel USB devices are enabled or disabled. This can be one of the following

• Disabled— Disables the front panel USB ports. Devices connected to these ports are not detected by the BIOS and operating system.

• Enabled— Enables the front panel USB ports. Devices connected to these ports are detected by the BIOS and operating system.

USB Port Internal drop-down list

Whether the internal USB devices are enabled or disabled. This can be one of the following

• Disabled— Disables the internal USB ports. Devices connected to these ports are not detected by the BIOS and operating system.

• Enabled— Enables the internal USB ports. Devices connected to these ports are detected by the BIOS and operating system.

344

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

BIOS Parameters by Server Model

Server Management Tab

Name

USB Port KVM drop-down list

Description

Whether the KVM ports are enabled or disabled. This can be one of the following

• Disabled— Disables the KVM keyboard and/or mouse devices.

Keyboard and/or mouse will not work in the KVM window.

• Enabled— Enables the KVM keyboard and/or mouse devices.

USB Port SD Card drop-down list Whether the SD card is enabled or disabled. This can be one of the following

• Disabled— Disables the SD card ports. Devices connected to these ports are not detected by the BIOS and operating system.

• Enabled— Enables the SD card ports. Devices connected to these ports are detected by the BIOS and operating system.

IPV6 PXE Support drop-down list

Enables or disables IPV6 support for PXE. This can be one of the following

• Disabled—IPV6 PXE support is not available.

• Enabled—IPV6 PXE support is always available.

Server Management Tab

Note

BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.

Table 17: BIOS Parameters in Server Management Tab

Name

Reboot Host Immediately checkbox

Description

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

345

BIOS Parameters by Server Model

Server Management Tab

Name

OS Boot Watchdog Timer Policy drop-down list

OS Watchdog Timer drop-down list

Description

What action the system takes if the watchdog timer expires. This can be one of the following:

• Power Off—The server is powered off if the watchdog timer expires during OS boot.

• Reset—The server is reset if the watchdog timer expires during OS boot.

Note

This option is only applicable if you enable the OS Boot Watchdog Timer.

Whether the BIOS programs the watchdog timer with a specified timeout value. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The watchdog timer is not used to track how long the server takes to boot.

• Enabled—The watchdog timer tracks how long the server takes to boot. If the server does not boot within the length of time specified in the

OS Boot Watchdog Timer Timeout field, the

Cisco IMC logs an error and takes the action specified in the OS Boot Watchdog Policy field.

OS Watchdog Timer Timeout drop-down list

If OS does not boot within the specified time, OS watchdog timer expires and system takes action according to timer policy. This can be one of the following:

• 5 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires 5 minutes after it begins to boot.

• 10 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires

10 minutes after it begins to boot.

• 15 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires

15 minutes after it begins to boot.

• 20 Minutes—The OS watchdog timer expires

20 minutes after it begins to boot.

Note

This option is only applicable if you enable the OS Boot Watchdog Timer.

346

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

BIOS Parameters by Server Model

Name

Baud Rate drop-down list

Console Redirection drop-down list

CDN Control drop-down list

FRB 2 Timer drop-down list

Server Management Tab

Description

What Baud rate is used for the serial port transmission speed. If you disable Console Redirection, this option is not available. This can be one of the following:

• 9.6k—A 9,600 Baud rate is used.

• 19.2k—A 19,200 Baud rate is used.

• 38.4k—A 38,400 Baud rate is used.

• 57.6k—A 57,600 Baud rate is used.

• 115.2k—A 115,200 Baud rate is used.

This setting must match the setting on the remote terminal application.

Allows a serial port to be used for console redirection during POST and BIOS booting. After the OS has booted, console redirection is irrelevant. This can be one of the following:

• Serial Port A—Enables console redirection on serial port A during POST.

• Serial Port B—Enables console redirection on serial port B during POST.

• Disabled—No console redirection occurs during

POST.

Whether the Ethernet Network naming convention is according to Consistent Device Naming (CDN) or the traditional way of naming conventions. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled— CDN support for VIC cards is disabled

• Enabled— CDN support is enabled for VIC cards.

Whether the FRB2 timer is used by Cisco IMC to recover the system if it hangs during POST. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The FRB2 timer is not used.

• Enabled—The FRB2 timer is started during

POST and used to recover the system if necessary.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

347

BIOS Parameters by Server Model

Security Tab

Name

Flow Control drop-down list

Terminal type drop-down list

Description

• None—No flow control is used.

• RTS/CTS—RTS/CTS is used for flow control.

Note

This setting must match the setting on the remote terminal application.

What type of character formatting is used for console redirection. This can be one of the following:

• PC-ANSI—The PC-ANSI terminal font is used.

• VT100—A supported VT100 video terminal and its character set are used.

• VT100-PLUS—A supported VT100-plus video terminal and its character set are used.

• VT-UTF8—A video terminal with the UTF-8 character set is used.

Security Tab

Note

BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.

348

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

BIOS Parameters by Server Model

Processor Tab

Table 18: BIOS Parameters in Security Tab

Name

Reboot Host Immediately checkbox

Description

If the Reboot Host Immediately check box is checked, the server is rebooted immediately and the new BIOS settings go into effect. Otherwise the changes are saved until the server is manually rebooted.

• Disabled—The server does not use the TPM.

• Enabled—The server uses the TPM.

Power on Password drop-down list

Note

Contact your operating system vendor to make sure the operating system supports this feature.

This token requires that you set a BIOS password before using the F2 BIOS configuration. If enabled, password needs to be validated before you access

BIOS functions such as IO configuration, BIOS set up, and booting to an operating system using BIOS.

It can be one of the following:

• Disabled—Support is disabled.

• Enabled—Support is enabled.

Processor Tab

Note

BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

349

Processor Tab

BIOS Parameters by Server Model

Table 19: BIOS Parameters in Processor Tab

Name

Intel Virtualization Technology drop-down list

Description

Whether the processor uses Intel Virtualization

Technology (VT), which allows a platform to run multiple operating systems and applications in independent partitions. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The processor does not permit virtualization.

• Enabled—The processor allows multiple operating systems in independent partitions.

Extended Apic drop-down list

Processor C1E drop-down list

Allows you to enable or disable extended APIC support. This can be one of the following:

• Enabled—Enables APIC support

• Disabled—Disables APIC support.

Whether the CPU transitions to its minimum frequency when entering the C1 state. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The CPU continues to run at its maximum frequency in C1 state.

• Enabled—The CPU transitions to its minimum frequency. This option saves the maximum amount of power in C1 state.

Note

This option is available only on some

C-Series servers.

350

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

BIOS Parameters by Server Model

Name

Processor C6 Report drop-down list

Execute Disable Bit drop-down list

Processor Tab

Description

• Disabled—The BIOS does not send the C6 report.

• Enabled—The BIOS sends the C6 report, allowing the OS to transition the processor to the C6 low power state.

Note

CPUPowerManagement must be set to

Custom or the server ignores the setting for this parameter.

This option is available only on some

C-Series servers.

• Disabled—The processor does not classify memory areas.

• Enabled—The processor classifies memory areas.

Note

Contact your operating system vendor to make sure the operating system supports this feature.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

351

Processor Tab

BIOS Parameters by Server Model

Name

Intel Turbo Boost Tech drop-down list

Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Tech drop-down list

Intel HyperThreading Tech drop-down list

Description

Whether the processor uses Intel Turbo Boost

Technology, which allows the processor to automatically increase its frequency if it is running below power, temperature, or voltage specifications.

This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The processor does not increase its frequency automatically.

• Enabled—The processor utilizes Turbo Boost

Technology if required.

Note

CPUPowerManagement must be set to

Custom or the server ignores the setting for this parameter.

Whether the processor uses Enhanced Intel SpeedStep

This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The processor never dynamically adjusts its voltage or frequency.

• Enabled—The processor utilizes Enhanced

Intel SpeedStep Technology and enables all supported processor sleep states to further conserve power.

We recommend that you contact your operating system vendor to make sure the operating system supports this feature.

Note

CPUPowerManagement must be set to

Custom or the server ignores the setting for this parameter.

Whether the processor uses Intel Hyper-Threading

Technology, which allows multithreaded software applications to execute threads in parallel within each processor. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The processor does not permit hyperthreading.

• Enabled—The processor allows for the parallel execution of multiple threads.

352

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

BIOS Parameters by Server Model

Processor Tab

Name

Workload Configuration drop-down list

Core MultiProcessing drop-down list

Sub NUMA Clustering drop-down list

IMC Interleave drop-down list

Description

This feature allows for workload optimization. The options are Balanced and I/O Sensitive:

• NUMA

• UMA

Allows you to disable one or more of the physical cores on the server. This can be one of the following:

• All—Enables all physical cores. This also enables Hyper Threading on the associated logical processor cores.

• 1 through 28—Specifies the number of physical processor cores that can run on the server. Each physical core has an associated logical core.

Note

Contact your operating system vendor to make sure the operating system supports this feature.

Whether the CPU supports sub NUMA clustering, in which the tag directory and the memory channel are always in the same region. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled— Sub NUMA clustering does not occur.

• Enabled— Sub NUMA clustering occurs.

• Auto — The BIOS determines what Sub

NUMA clustering is done.

This BIOS option controls the interleaving between the Integrated Memory Controllers (IMCs).

• 1-way Interleave—There is no interleaving.

• 2-way Interleave—Addresses are interleaved between the two IMCs.

• Auto —CPU determines the IMC Interleaving mode.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

353

Processor Tab

BIOS Parameters by Server Model

Name

XPT Prefetch drop-down list

Description

Whether XPT prefetch is used to enable a read request sent to the last level cache to issue a copy of that request to the memory controller prefetcher. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The CPU does not use the XPT

Prefetch option.

• Enabled—The CPU enanbles the XPT prefetcher option.

UPI Prefetch drop-down list UPI prefetch is a mechanism to get the memory read started early on a DDR bus. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The processor does not preload any cache data.

• Enabled—The UPI prefetcher preloads the L1 cache with the data it determines to be the most relevant.

Energy Performance BIOS Config drop-down list

Allows you to determine whether system performance or energy efficiency is more important on this server.

This can be one of the following:

• Performance — The server provides all server components with full power at all times. This option maintains the highest level of performance and requires the greatest amount of power.

• Balanced Performance — The server provides all server components with enough power to keep a balance between performance and power.

• Balanced Power — The server provides all server components with enough power to keep a balance between performance and power.

• Power — The server provides all server components with maximum power to keep reduce power consumption.

354

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

BIOS Parameters by Server Model

Processor Tab

Name

Power Performance Tuning drop-down list

LLC Prefetch drop-down list

Description

Determines if the BIOS or Operating System can turn on the energy performance bias tuning. The options are BIOS and OS.

• BIOS—

Chooses BIOS for energy performance tuning.

• OS—

Chooses OS for energy performance tuning.

Whether the processor uses the LLC Prefetch mechanism to fetch the date into the LLC. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The processor does not preload any cache data.

• Enabled—The LLC prefetcher preloads the L1 cache with the data it determines to be the most relevant.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

355

Processor Tab

Name

Package C State

Hardware P-States drop-down list

BIOS Parameters by Server Model

Description

The amount of power available to the server components when they are idle. This can be one of the following:

• No Limit—The server may enter any available

C state.

• Auto —The CPU determines the physical elevation.

• C0 C1 State—The server provides all server components with full power at all times. This option maintains the highest level of performance and requires the greatest amount of power.

Enables processor Hardware P-State. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—HWPM is disabled.

• HWPM Native Mode—HWPM native mode is enabled.

• HWPM OOB Mode—HWPM Out-Of-Box mode is enabled.

• Native Mode with no Legacy (only GUI)

356

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

BIOS Parameters by Server Model

Memory Tab

Memory Tab

Note

BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.

Table 20: BIOS Parameters in Memory Tab

Name

Reboot Host Immediately checkbox

NUMA drop-down list

Description

Upon checking, reboots the host server immediately.

You must check the checkbox after saving changes.

Whether the BIOS supports Non-Uniform Memory

Access (NUMA). This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—Support is disabled.

• Enabled—Support is enabled.

Select Memory RAS configuration drop-down list Determines how the memory reliability, availability, and serviceability (RAS) is configured for the server.

This can be one of the following:

• Maximum Performance—System performance is optimized.

• Mirror Mode 1LM—System reliability is optimized by using half the system memory as backup.

Above 4G Decoding drop-down list

Enables or disables MMIO above 4GB or not. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The server does not map I/O of

64-bit PCI devices to 4GB or greater address space.

• Enabled—The server maps I/O of 64-bit PCI devices to 4GB or greater address space.

Note

PCI devices that are 64-bit compliant but use a legacy option ROM may not function correctly with this setting enabled.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

357

BIOS Parameters by Server Model

Power/Performance Tab

Power/Performance Tab

Note

BIOS parameters listed in this tab may vary depending on the server.

Table 21: BIOS Parameters in Power/Performance Tab

Name

Reboot Host Immediately

checkbox

Description

Upon checking, reboots the host server immediately. You must check the checkbox after saving changes.

Hardware Prefetcher drop-down list

Whether the processor allows the Intel hardware prefetcher to fetch streams of data and instruction from memory into the unified second-level cache when necessary. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The hardware prefetcher is not used.

• Enabled—The processor uses the hardware prefetcher when cache issues are detected.

Adjacent Cache Line Prefetcher

drop-down list

Whether the processor fetches cache lines in even or odd pairs instead of fetching just the required line. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The processor only fetches the required line.

• Enabled—The processor fetches both the required line and its paired line.

DCU Streamer Prefetch

drop-down list

Whether the processor uses the DCU IP Prefetch mechanism to analyze historical cache access patterns and preload the most relevant lines in the L1 cache. This can be one of the following:

• Disabled—The processor does not try to anticipate cache read requirements and only fetches explicitly requested lines.

• Enabled—The DCU prefetcher analyzes the cache read pattern and prefetches the next line in the cache if it determines that it may be needed.

• Disabled—The processor does not preload any cache data.

• Enabled—The DCU IP prefetcher preloads the L1 cache with the data it determines to be the most relevant.

358

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

BIOS Parameters by Server Model

Power/Performance Tab

Name Description

CPU Performance drop-down list Sets the CPU performance profile for the options listed above. This can be one of the following:

• Enterprise—All options are enabled.

• HPC—All options are enabled. This setting is also known as high performance computing.

• Hight Throughput—Only the DCU IP Prefetcher is enabled. The rest of the options are disabled.

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

359

Power/Performance Tab

BIOS Parameters by Server Model

360

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

I N D E X

Activating firmware

300

adapter

80, 200, 201, 203

exporting the configuration

200

importing the configuration

201

PCI

resetting

203

restoring default configuration

203

Asset Tag

Creating

backing up

320, 321

configuration

320, 321

configuration

320, 321

BIOS profile

73, 74

activating

deleting

taking backup

BIOS Profile

uploading

BIOS profile details

viewing

BIOS settings

server boot order

blacklisting

DIMM

boot drive

216

clearing

216

boot order

about

Boot Order

configuring

boot table

175, 176

creating entry

175

deleting entry

176

description

175

certificate management

272, 276

new certificates

272

uploading a certificate

276

certificates

272

Chassis

89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 133, 135, 301, 303, 305, 307, 310

Faults and Logs

301, 303, 305, 307, 310

Sensors

89, 90, 91, 92, 93

chassis summary

viewing

Cisco IMC

2, 311

Overview

sending log

311

Cisco IMC Firmware

297

overview

297

Cisco IMC Log

305

Cisco VIC Adapter Properties

Chassis

Inventory

Clearing

218

Controller Configuration

218

clearing a virtual drive

215

transport ready state

215

clearing foreign configuration

216

Client Certificate

282, 283, 285

deleting

285

downloading

282

Exporting

283

Client Private Key

289, 291, 293

deleting

293

Downloading

289

Exporting

291

common properties

142

network properties

142

communication services properties

257, 258, 259, 261

HTTP properties

257

IPMI over LAN properties

261

SSH properties

258

XML API properties

259

configuration

320, 321, 323

backing up

321

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

IN-1

Index

configuration (continued) exporting

320

importing

323

configuring

fan policy

Configuring

244, 268

Operational Profile

244

SMTP Server

268

Configuring BIOS

configuring log threshold

312

Controller Security

206, 207, 208, 209

Disabling

208

Enabling

206

Modifying

207

Switching

209

copyback

233

operation

233

CPU properties

create virtual drive from existing

212

create virtual drive from unused physical drives

209

Current Sensors

delete virtual drive

226

disabling KVM

111

enabling

6g or 12g mixed mode

SAS Expander

Enabling

331

Smart Access USB

331

enabling KVM

109, 110

encrypting virtual media

Erasing

253

Virtual Drive

253

exporting

320, 321

configuration

320, 321

configuration

320, 321

fan policy

configuring

Fan Sensors

Fault Summary

301

Faults History

303

IN-2

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Firmware

299

updating

299

Firmware Components

298

viewing

298

Flexible Flash

234, 236, 239

configuring properties

236

description

234

enabling virtual drives

239

resetting

239

floppy disk emulation

foreign configuration

215

importing

215

generating NMI

325

GUI Overview

hiding unhiding virtual drive

226

home page

Host Power

133

hot spare

220, 221

dedicated

220

global

221

removing drive

221

HTML based kVM console

104

launching

104

HTTP properties

257

importing

323

configuration

323

individual settings

147

server NICs

147

initializing virtual drive

222

IP blocking

148

IPMI over LAN

260, 261

configuring

261

description

260

IPv4 Properties

143

IPv6 Properties

143

iscsi config

200

remove

200

iscsi-boot

196, 197

configuring vNIC

197

vNIC

196

Index

jbod

217

disabling

217

jbod mode

217

enabling

217

KMIP

277

Key Management Interoperability Protocol

277

Secure Key Management

277

KMIP Login Details

294

deleting

294

KVM

109, 110, 111

configuring

109

disabling

111

enabling

109, 110

KVM console

11, 103

LDAP

117

LDAP binding

129

testing

129

LDAP CA Certificate

125, 127, 129

deleting

129

downloading

127

exporting

125

LDAP CA Certificate status

124

viewing

124

LDAP Server

117

LDAP settings

119

group authorization

119

LED Sensors

local users

113

configuring

113

locator leds

135

Logging Controls

310

make dedicated hot spare

220

make global hot spare

221

mapped vmedia volume

97, 102, 103

creating

remapping

103

removing

102

Mapped vMedia volume

101

properties

101

Mapping

250

ISO image

250

memory properties

Navigation Pane

Work Pane

network adapter properties

151

viewing

151

Network Adapter Properties

Viewing

NIC Properties

138

network properties

138

NTP setting

149

NTP Settings

149

Online Help Overview

operating system installation

OS boot

USB port

OS installation

11, 12, 13

KVM console

methods

PXE

password expiry

117

enabling

117

password expiry duration

116

configuring

116

PCI adapter

viewing properties

persistent binding

176, 177

clearing

177

description

176

rebuilding

177

viewing

176

physical drive

222

controller boot drive

222

setting

222

physical drive status

221

toggling

221

PID catalog

84, 329, 330

activating

330

uploading

329

viewing

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

IN-3

Index

Pinging

134

policies

254, 255, 256

scrub

254, 255, 256

port profile properties

145

power capping

about

power monitoring summary

viewing

Power redundancy

power restore policy

configuring

Power Supplies

Power Supply Properties

Chassis

prepare drive for removal

219

PXE installation

remote presence

95, 97, 109, 110, 111

serial over LAN

virtual KVM

109, 110, 111

virtual media

Resetting

218, 244

Card Configuration

244

Controllers

218

resetting adapter

203

resetting to factory defaults

318

Root CA Certificate

285, 287, 289

deleting

289

Downloading

285

Exporting

287

SAS Expander Properties

20, 21

Viewing

20, 21

scrub policy

254, 255, 256

about

254

creating

255

deleting

256

SD cards

235

single to dual card mirroring

235

Secure Key Management

278

view settings

278

viewing

278

Security Configuration

294

view settings

294

viewing

294

Self Encrypting Drives

205

Full Disk Encryption

205

self-signed certificate

274

sensors

storage

Sensors

serial over LAN

Server Certificate

271

Managing

271

server management

server boot order

server NICs

137

Server Power

133

Server Software

set as boot drive

223

Setting Dynamic Front Panel Temperature Threshold

setting virtual drive

214

transport ready

214

Setting Virtual Drive to Transport Ready

213

SMTP Server

268

SNMP

262, 263, 265, 266

configuring properties

262

configuring SNMPv3 users

266

configuring trap settings

263

managing SNMPv3 users

265

sending test message

265

SSH properties

258

start learn cycles

227

bbu

227

storage adapter properties

157, 229, 231

viewing

157, 229, 231

storage controller logs

227

storage properties

viewing

storage sensors

syslog

311, 313

sending Cisco IMC log

311

sending test Syslog

313

System Event Logs

307

technical support data

315, 317

downloading to local file

317

exporting

315

Temperature Sensors

Timezone

135

Toolbar

TPM properties

TTY Logs

218

retrieving

218

IN-4

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

Index

UEFI Secure Boot

34, 35

disabling

Updating

252

ISO image

252

uploading a server certificate

276

user management

113

user sessions

130

usNIC

194

viewing properties

194

usNIC properties

191

configuring

191

vHBA

164, 165, 169, 174, 175, 176, 177

boot table

175

clearing persistent binding

177

creating

174

creating boot table entry

175

deleting

174

deleting boot table entry

176

guidelines for managing

164

modifying properties

169

persistent binding

176

rebuilding persistent binding

177

viewing persistent binding

176

viewing properties

165

Viewing

241

FlexFlash Logs

241

Viewing Cisco FlexUtil Properties

245

Viewing Physical Drive Properties

247

Viewing Virtual Drive Properties

248

virtual drive

222, 223, 224

editing

224

initializing

222

set as boot drive

223

virtual KVM

109, 110, 111

virtual media

VLAN Properties

144

vmedia mapping

103

deleting

103

vNIC

177, 178, 184, 189, 190, 197

creating

189

deleting

190

guidelines for managing

177

iscsi-boot configuration

197

modifying properties

184

viewing properties

178

vNICs

196

iSCSI-boot guidelines

196

Voltage Sensors

Web UI

134

XML API

259

description

259

XML API properties

259

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1

IN-5

Index

IN-6

Cisco UCS C-Series Integrated Management Controller GUI Configuration Guide, Release 3.1